Home

Using Professional OS-9 V2.4 - TRS

1. SMT WTFMTWTFMTWTFMT WT F Day of Backup Single Tape Backup Strategy Using Professional OS 9 7 13 Use of Tapes Disks Making Backups This strategy is designed for tape backups of larger systems Tapes are used efficiently because a question as to how many tapes are needed never arises This strategy also cuts down on person hours tape mounting and storage space used for tapes It allows for enough redundancy to make restoring a full system fairly painless Disadvantages however do exist Each time you do a backup you must determine the size of the back using fsave s As you near a full tape s worth of data this takes an increasing amount of time Use of Tapes Disks Whatever strategy you use you must make a decision concerning the number of tapes or disks to use This decision must weigh the emphasis placed on redundancy resources person hours and storage It must be offset with the possibility of tape or disk failure and system restoration In the first example strategy you must make the daily backups on different volumes to overcome the lack of redundancy You can use the four daily volumes week after week as daily backup volumes because of the lower level backups at the beginning of each week In the second example theoretically you could use the same tape for each day until a new level backup is reached This insures no redundancy and mini
2. Figure 4e The File System With the exception of the root directory each file and directory in the system has a parent directory A parent directory is the directory directly above the file or directory being discussed For example in Figure 4e the parent directory of file2 is SUB DIRECTORY1 Likewise the parent directory of SUB DIRECTORY 1 is the root directory 4 6 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Current Directories Current Directories Two working directories are always associated with each user or process These directories are called the current data directory and the current execution directory A data directory is where you create and store your text files An execution directory is where executable files such as utilities and programs you have created are located The current directory concept allows you to organize your files while keeping them separate from other users on the system The word current is used because you can use the chd command to move through the tree structure of the OS 9 file system to a different directory This new directory then becomes your current data or execution directory NOTE The chd utility is discussed later in this chapter On a single user system OS 9 chooses the root directory of your system disk as your initial current data directory Your initial current execution directory is the CMDS directory The CMDS directory is located in the root di
3. In this case verbal warnings are important This means that in addition to sending a warning message out over the system you may want to use either an intercom system or the telephone to talk to each person connected to the system You can simplify the process of actually shutting down your system by creating a procedure file Once created you can run the procedure either from the shell command line prompt or you can create a separate password entry for the sole purpose of shutting down the system For example if you have a procedure file called shutdown sys you could create the following password file entry sys shutdown 0 0 128 sys shell shutdown sys Once you login as user sys with password shutdown the shut down procedure begins because the system immediately has the shell execute the shutdown sys file Using Professional OS 9 8 21 System Shutdown Procedure OS 9 System Management The following is an example of a useful procedure file for shutting down the system t nx np System Shutdown Procedure echo WARNING The system will shut down in 3 minutes tee t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 sleep s 60 echo WARNING The system will shut down in 2 minutes tee t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 sleep s 115 echo WARNING 5 seconds to system shut down tee t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 sleep s 5 spl terminate spooler nmon n0 d shutdown network sleep s 3 wait 3 seconds break call ROM debugger The fir
4. Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities backup If an error occurs on the first pass something is wrong with the source disk or its drive If an error occurs in the second pass the problem is with the destination disk If backup fails repeatedly on the second pass re format the destination disk and try to backup again OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of backup b lt num gt k Allocates lt num gt k of memory for the backup buffer to use backup uses a 4K buffer by default backup runs faster if more memory is used r Causes the backup to continue if a read error occurs V Prevents backup from making a verification pass EXAMPLES This example backs up the disk in d2 to the disk in d3 backup D2 D3 This example backs up the disk in d0 to the disk in d1 without making a verification pass backup v This example allocates 40K of memory to use in backing up d0 to d2 backup b40 d0 d2 Using Professional OS 9 7 binex exbin The OS 9 Utilities binex exbin Convert Binary Files to S Record S Record to Binary SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS binex lt opts gt lt path1 gt lt path2 gt exbin lt path1 gt lt path2 gt binex converts binary files to S record files The exbin utility converts S record files to binary S record files are a type of text file containing records that represent binary data in hexadecimal form This Motoro
5. en Processes can switch states rapidly usually many times per second Therefore the procs dis play is a snapshot taken at the instant the command is executed and shows only those pro cesses running at that exact moment procs displays ten pieces of information for each process Id The process ID Pld The parent process ID Grp usr The group and user number of the owner of the process Prior The initial priority of the process MemSiz The amount of memory the process is using Sig The number of any pending signals for the process 5 28 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell The Procs Utility CPU Time Age Module amp I O The process status Ww Waiting S Sleeping a Active Currently executing The amount of CPU time the process has used The elapsed time since the process started The process name and standard I O paths lt Standard input gt Standard output gt gt Standard error output If several of the paths point to the same pathlist the identifiers for the paths are merged The following is an example of procs procs Id PId Grp Usr Prior MemSiz Sig S CPU Time Age Module amp I O 2 1 0 0 128 0 25k Ow 0 01 sysgo lt gt gt gt term NA wn Bb U oc OWN 0 0 128 4 75k Ow 4 11 01 13 shell lt gt gt gt term 0 0 5 400k Oa 12 42 06 00 14 xhog lt gt gt gt term 0 0 128 850k 0 0 08 00 00 procs lt gt gt term 0 0 128 4 00k 0s 0 02 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t1 0 0 128 4 00k 0
6. This tells you that build is waiting for input To terminate build type a carriage return at the prompt For example build test Some programmers have been known to howl at full moons 9 You cannot edit files with build You may also use the edt utility to create files edt is a line oriented text editor that allows you to create and edit source files To use the edt utility type edt and the desired pathlist If the file is new or cannot be found edt creates and opens the file edt then displays a question mark prompt and waits for an edit command If the file is found edt opens it displays the last line and then displays the prompt edt is fully detailed in the OS 9 Utilities section The preferred method of creating and editing files is with UMACS WMACS is a screen oriented text editor designed for creating and modifying test files and programs Through the use of multiple buffers UMACS allows you to display different files or different portions of the same file on the same screen In addition extensive formatting commands allow you to reformat paragraphs with new user defined margins transpose characters capitalize words and change words or sections into upper or lower case For a more detailed description see the Using uMACS manual Examining File Attributes with Attr When you create a file using build or uMACS only the owner read and owner write permissions are set When you create a directory it i
7. khlabm85hikimtron abm85h The TERM environment variable must be set to the name used in the second part of the name section In the following example TERM is set to abm85h setenv TERM abm85h NOTE You can check the values stored in TERM by using the printenv command printenv TERM abm85h The rest of the entry consists of a sequence of control code specifications for each control function Use a colon character to separate each item in the list You can continue an entry on to the next line by using a backslash character as the last character of the line It must appear after the last colon of the previous item The next line must begin with a colon For example kalamb85lkimtron abm85 ct E3 Each item begins with a terminal capability Each capability is a two character abbreviation Each capability is either a boolean itself or it is followed by a string or a number If a boolean capability is present in the termcap entry then the capability exists on that terminal 8 30 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management The Termcap File Format All numeric capabilities are followed by a pound sign and a number For example the number of col umns capability for an 80 column terminal could be described as follows co 80 All string capabilities are followed by an equal sign and a character string You can enter a time delay in milliseconds directly after the equal sign if padding is allowed
8. progms c misc junk c When you have finished entering the file names press the carriage return a second time to get the shell prompt If you have a file containing a list of the files to copy enter cfp z files s copy Displays the options function and command syntax of Cfp d Deletes the temporary file This is the default nd Does not delete the temporary file Executes the procedure file This is the default ne Does not execute the procedure file Instead it will dump to standard out put This option causes d and nd to have no effect because the tempo rary procedure file is not created S lt Str gt Reads lt str gt instead of a procedure file If the string contains characters interpreted by the shell the entire option needs to be enclosed in quotes It does not make sense to specify both a procedure file and this option t lt path gt Creates the temporary file at lt path gt rather than in the current working di rectory Z Reads the file names from standard input instead of lt path2 gt z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt instead of lt path2 gt Using Professional OS 9 13 cfp The OS 9 Utilities EXAMPLE In this example test p is a procedure file that contains the command line list gt p2 The command cfp test p file1 file2 file3 produces a procedure file containing the fol lowing commands list file1 gt p2 list file2 gt p2 lis
9. chd d1 BACKUP STUFF Select the destination directory for makecopy d0 makecopy Runs makecopy The second example uses the path d1 BACKUP STUFF in the dsave command Consequently you do not need to change directories before executing the procedure file This example also allocates 32K of memory for the copy procedure Allocating more memory for the copy procedure usually saves time chd d0 MYFILES STUFF dsave ib 32 d1 BACKUP STUFF gt saver saver The third example effectively accomplishes the same thing but without using a procedure file chd d0 MYFILES STUFF dsave ieb32 d1 BACKUP STUFF 38 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities dsave In the following example dir e shows the creation dates of the files This shows the d option of dsave chd d0 BACKUP dir e Directory of 14 14 32 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 90 12 01 1417 wr 1A2B 11113 program c 12 4 90 06 05 1601 wr 8543 5744 prog 2 chd d0 WORKFILES dir e Directory of 14 14 32 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 90 12 01 1417 wr DODO 11113 program c 12 4 90 12 01 1601 wr 3458 5780 prog 2 directory of 14 14 40 dsave deb32 d0 BACKUP chd d0 BACKUP dir e Directory of 14 14 32 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 90 12 01 1417 wr DD33 11113 program c 12 4 90 12 01 1601 wr 4356 5780 prog 2
10. and can be used with redirection modifiers The gt modifier redirects output to a file If the file already exists the output overwrites it The gt modifier adds the output to the end of the file The following example overwrites dirfile with output from the execution di rectory listing dir x gt dirfile The next example adds the listing of newfile to the end of oldfile list newfile gt oldfile NOTE Spaces may not occur between redirection operators and the device or file path Process Priority Modifier On multi user systems or when multi tasking many processes seem to execute simultaneously Actually OS 9 uses a scheduling algorithm to allocate execution time to active processes All active processes are sorted into a queue based on the age of the process The age is a number between 0 and 65535 based on how long a process has waited for ex AF ecution and its initial priority On a timesharing system the system manager assigns the initial priority for processes started by each user This priority for the initial process is listed in the password file The initial process is usually the shell On a single user system processes have their priority set in the Init module All child processes inherit their parent process s priority NOTE Password files are discussed later in this chapter When a process enters the active queue it has an age set to its initial priority Every time a new active
11. frestore gt add file1 file2 dir1 file5 dir1 file6 dir2 file7 frestore gt dir Directory of DIR1 DIR2 filel file2 file3 frestore gt dir dirl Directory of DIR1 file4 file5 file6 frestore gt dir dir2 Directory of DIR2 file7 file8 Using Professional OS 9 7 9 The Interactive Restore Process Making Backups The del command can unmark files Entire directories may be unmarked by specifying the directory s name on the command line If the r option is also used all files and directories included in the specified directory are unmarked For example frestore gt del r dir2 frestore gt dir Directory of 10 42 32 DIR1 DIR2 file1 file2 file3 frestore gt dir dir2 Directory of DIR2 file7 file8 Once files are marked the rest command may be used to restore the target device s current directory Files existing on the target system with the same name are overwritten without prompting if del q is used Otherwise frestore displays the following prompt frestore gt filel already exists write over it or skip it w s The cht command allows you to change directories on the target device This allows you to selectively restore files to specific directories After restoring files you may continue marking and unmarking files Files previously restored have a hyphen displayed next to their names in the restore file structure frestore gt dir Directory of 10 42 32 DIR1 DIR2 file1 file2 file3 fresto
12. mdir lt opts gt lt modname gt FUNCTION mdir displays the present module names in the system module directory The system module directory contains all modules currently resident in memory By specifying in dividual module names only specified modules are displayed if resident in memory If you use the e option an extended listing of the physical address size owner revision level user count and the type of each module is displayed The module type is listed using the following mnemonics Mnemonic Type of Module Prog Program Module Subr Subroutine Module Mult Multi Module Data Data Module Trap Trap Handler Module Sys System Module FMan File Manager Driv Device Driver Module Desc Device Descriptor Module NOTE User defined modules not corresponding with this list are displayed by their number By using the a option the language of each module is displayed instead of the type in an extended listing The language field uses the following mnemonics Mnemonic Module Language Obj 68000 Machine Code Bas Basic09 I Code Pasc Pascal I Code C C I Code Cobl Cobol I Code Fort Fortran I Code NOTE If the language field is inappropriate for the module a blank field is displayed For example dO t1 or init Using Professional OS 9 87 mdir The OS 9 Utilities WARNING Not all modules listed by mdir are executable as processes always check the module type code to make sure it is execu
13. prompt of the w option b lt num gt k _ Allocates lt num gt k memory to be used by copy copy uses a 4K mem ory by default f Rewrites destination files with no write permission p Does not print a list of the files copied This option is only for copying multiple files r Overwrites the existing file V Verifies the integrity of the new file w lt dir gt Copies one or more files to lt dir gt This option prints the file name after each successful copy If an error such as no permission to copy occurs the prompt continue y n is displayed X Uses the current execution directory for lt path1 gt Z Reads file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES The following example copies file1 to file2 If file2 already exists error 218 is returned copy filel file2 This example copies file1 to file2 using a 15K buffer copy file1 file2 b 15k This example copies all files in the current data directory to MYFILE copy w MYFILE This example copies all files in the current data directory that have names ending in Ip copy lp w MYFILE This example copies d1 joe and dO jim to FILE copy d1 joe d0 jim w FILE This example writes file3 over file4 copy file3 filed r 20 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities count count Count Characters Words and Lines in a File SYNTAX count lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION count counts the numb
14. 2055 23 0545 oc BEE eee Oe ee BEL eee 5 1 TheShbe ll E yironm nti sarena Sanity seat Gabel odin A Rate E coat 5 3 Changing the Shell Br yirOninient g cscctejtesscewescagancssceateaseduatds dacicsenatcachadeseuakanhnctaeeeg tax 5 4 Built In Shell Commands 22 2 i 22 2iun use aoiendniv tunis anainedatasiunwie 5 6 Shell Command Line Processing 6x25 c5o nave Mares Seager ee eal eae es 5 7 Special Command Line Features 22 338 nee aia Re GG ade 5 8 Execution Modifiers sssini eiie ani iniiae i ania 5 9 Additional Memory Size Modifier 2 0 0 0 ceecceceeccecesececeeeeeceeececseeeeseeeesaeeeeneeeenaeeess 5 9 VO Redirection Modifiers onasin nnn e Aa ec maiden esi ES 5 10 PROCESS Priority Modifi etiaro a a R E E E ER E 5 12 Wildcard Matching sor oisinn daea a peed ae ae ra ea a aS 5 13 Using Professional OS 9 iv Table Of Contents Table Of Contents Command Separators ys scivesacacsisivavasaissavaciavhcvcisalesnserassncadvascevedea ES TANA EE SE EE 5 14 Sequential EXec tOn n n one aaa e Noe ata et lee E a EN 5 15 Multi tasking Concurrent Execution essseseseeesesressrseesressesersrtesseserssrenseseresresseees 5 15 Pipes and PIlters vcccssccccaasvesdeceisseasededs nnno n a A A R E E TE 5 16 Umpam d Pip s nnen E o E E E E EE EES NS 5 17 fatate M eal e Sre EE a EEA E E ES 5 17 Command Grouping ceee n a R ete eal A E ES a EA 5 19 Shell Procedure Piles Senne saa E E E A a Ae edna 5 20 The Login Shell and Two Special Procedu
15. 6 10 Using Professional OS 9 Making Files Example Three A Makefile that Uses Macros Example Three A Makefile that Uses Macros Using these inherent features of make can be especially helpful if you have several object files you want make to check beginning ODIR d0 cmds RDIR rels UTILS attr copy load dir backup dsave SDIR utils sources utils files UTILS touch utils files end make looks in rels for attr r copy r etc and looks in utils sources for attr c copy c etc make then generates the proper commands to compile and or link any of the programs that need to be made If one of the files in UTILS is made the command touch utils files is forked to maintain a current overall date Using Professional OS 9 6 11 Example Four Putting It All Together Making Files Example Four Putting It All Together The following example is a makefile to create make beginning ODIR h0 cmds RDIR rels CFILES domake c doname c dodate c domac c RFILES domake r doname r dodate r PFLAGS p64 nh1 R2 test domac r RFLAGS q make RFILES R2 getfd r linker RFILES defs h R2 defs h cc c r test print file CFILES pr PFLAGS gt p1 touch print file end The makefile in this example looks for the r files listed in RFILES in the directory specified by RDIR rels The only exception is test domac r which has a complete pathlist specified E
16. B 2 Using Professional OS 9 The ROM Debugger Expressions and Register Names Expressions and Register Names In some commands the debugger can accept number expressions shown as lt num gt or lt len gt and address expressions shown as lt addr gt Both types of expressions have the same syntax Expressions can be num bers or a combination of numbers operators and register names Expressions are evaluated from left to right without priority unless parentheses are used All numbers are assumed to be hexadecimal unless preceded with a pound sign character For example 200 is interpreted as a hex number but 200 is interpreted as a decimal number Register names consist of a period followed by the usual assembly language name For example a3 refers to register A3 Register names can be used freely in expressions The operators recognized by the debugger are One Operand Operators negative bit by bit NOT Two Operand Operators add subtract multiply divide gt shift right A gt B shifts A right B bits lt shift left A lt B shifts A left B bits amp bit by bit AND bit by bit OR A bit by bit XOR exclusive OR The debugger has a special internal register called the relocation register This is used to add a constant offset to addresses You can change the value of the relocation register at any time using the r command NOTE The display mode and change memory mode commands for the debu
17. Command returns to the program that called the editor or the OS 9 shell NOTE For the following search and replace commands lt delim gt may be any character The asterisk option indicates that all occurrences of the pattern are searched for and replaced if specified s lt delim gt lt search string gt lt delim gt Search command searches for the occurrences of a pattern For example s and Finds the first occurrence of and s Bob Finds all occurrences of Bob c lt delim gt lt search string gt lt delim gt lt replace string gt lt delim gt Replace command finds and replaces a given string For example c Tuesday Wednesday Replaces the first occurrence of Tuesday with Wednesday c employee employees Replaces all occurrences of employee with employees Using Professional OS 9 43 events The OS 9 Utilities events Display Active System Events SYNTAX events FUNCTION events displays a list of the active events on the system and information about each event The events header line lists the system name and the OS 9 version number Each line in the events display contains six fields event ID Event ID number name Name of the event value Current contents of the event variable W inc Wait increment Assigned when the event is created and does not change S inc Signal increment Assigned when the event is created and does not change links Event use count When the event is created l
18. Default nx Does not abort on error EXAMPLES All commands on the same line have the same effect set x set x x set xp JOE set xp JOE xp JOE Using Professional OS 9 111 setenv The OS 9 Utilities setenv Set Environment Variables SYNTAX setenv lt eparam gt lt evalue gt FUNCTION setenv sets environment variables within a shell for use by the individual shell s child processes lt eparam gt and lt evalue gt are strings stored in the environment list by shell These variables are known to the shell in which they are defined and are passed on to descendent processes from that shell NOTE setenv should not be confused with the shell s set command It has a com pletely different function setenv is a built in shell command Therefore it is not in the CMDS directory EXAMPLES setenv PATH h0 cmds d0 cmds dd cmds setenv TERM abm85 setenv sh 0 setenv As_long_as_you_want long_value 112 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities setime setime Activate and Set the System Clock SYNTAX setime lt opts gt y m d hms am pm FUNCTION _ setime sets the system date and time Once set it activates the system interrupt clock To set the system date and time type setime and enter the year month day hour minute second and am or pm as parameters on the command line setime does not require field delimiters but allows you to use the following delimiter
19. If a procedure file is run in the background it should not contain any ter minal I O Any terminal I O caused by a background procedure file will minimally cause confusion as two or more processes try to control the same I O path Notice the 4 returned by the shell in the example above This is the process number assigned to the shell running procfile You could achieve the same effect by using the lt control gt C interrupt procfile lt control gt C is typed 4 Using lt control gt C to place a procedure in the background only works if the procedure has not yet performed I O to the terminal Another limitation of the lt control gt C interrupt occurs when the shell has not had time to set up the command for execution If the shell has not loaded files from the disk established pipelines etc the lt control gt C causes the shell to abort the operation and return the shell prompt For this reason you should usually use the ampersand to place a procedure in the background 5 20 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Procedure Files OS 9 does not have any limit on the number of procedure files that can be simultaneously executed as long as memory is available NOTE Procedure files themselves can cause sequential or concurrent execution of additional procedure files The Login Shell and Two Special Procedure Files login and logout The login shell is the initial shell created by the login sequence to process
20. In this example only prog2 was copied because the date was more recent in the WORKFILE directory Using Professional OS 9 39 dump The OS 9 Utilities dump Formatted File Data Dump in Hexadecimal and ASCII SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES SAMPLE OUTPUT dump lt opts gt lt path gt lt addr gt dump produces a formatted display of the physical data contents of lt path gt lt path gt may be a mass storage file or any other I O device dump is commonly used to examine the contents of non text files To use this utility type dump and the pathlist of the file to display An address within a file may also be displayed If lt path gt is omitted standard input is used The output is written to standard output When lt addr gt is specified the contents of the file are displayed starting with the appropriate address lt addr gt is presumed to be a hexadecimal number The data is displayed 16 bytes per line in both hexadecimal and ASCII character format Data bytes that have non displayable values are represented by periods in the character area The addresses displayed on the dump are relative to the beginning of the file Because memory modules are position independent and stored in files exactly as they exist in memory the addresses shown on the dump are relative to the load addresses of the memory modules Displays the options function and command syntax of dump C Does not compress
21. Suspend a Process for a Period of Time SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES sleep lt opts gt lt num gt sleep puts your process to sleep for a number of ticks It is generally used to generate time delays in procedure files To use the sleep utility type sleep followed by the number of ticks you want the pro cess to sleep A tick count of one causes the process to give up its current time slice and return immediately A tick count of zero causes the process to sleep indefinitely usually until awakened by a signal The duration of a tick is system dependent sleep is generally used to generate time delays in procedure files Displays the option and command syntax of sleep S Changes count representation to seconds NOTE Only one option may be used on the command line If not specified lt num gt defaults to zero sleep 25 Sleep for 25 ticks sleep s 1000 Sleep for 1000 seconds Using Professional OS 9 127 tape The OS 9 Utilities Tape Controller Manipulation SYNTAX tape lt opts gt lt dev gt FUNCTION _ tape provides a means to access a tape controller from a terminal tape can rewind erase skip forwards and backwards and write tapemarks to a tape If the tape device lt dev gt is not specified on the command line and the z option is not used tape uses the default device mt0 OPTIONS Displays options function and command syntax of tape b lt num gt Sk
22. The device you are restoring from is the source device It then begins an interactive session with you to determine which files and directories in the backup should be restored to the current directory The s option forces frestore to restore all files directories of the backup from the source device without the interactive shell The d option allows you to specify a source device other than mt0 The v option causes frestore to identify the name and volume number of the backup mounted on the source device It also displays the date the backup was made and the group user number of the person who made the backup This option does not restore any files After displaying the appropriate information frestore terminates This is helpful for locating the last volume of the backup if a mix up has occurred The i op tion duplicates the v option and also checks to see if the index is on the volume being checked The e option echoes each file pathlist as the index is read off the source device CAVEATS _ frestore cannot restore a file that requires more than four disks If the backup index requires more than a single volume frestore fails with a header block corrupt error NOTE For a full description of the fsave frestore and tape utilities read the chapter on making backups The information in the chapter on making backups includes work through examples and backup strategies for disk and tape OPTIONS Displays the options function
23. This would make the copy procedure faster for large files To use the b option type copy the original file name the new file name and b lt num gt k For example typing copy gee mine b 20k allocates a 20K buffer for copying the file gee into the file mine NOTE You must have permission to copy the file That is you must be the owner of the file to be copied or the public read permission must be set in order to copy the file You must also have permission to write in the directory you specify In either case if the copy procedure is successful the new file has your group user number unless you are the super user If you are the super user the new file will have the same group user number as the original file For more information concerning copy refer to the OS 9 Utilities section Dsave Copying Files Using Procedure Files Use the dsave utility to copy all files and directories within a specified directory by generating a procedure file The procedure file is either executed later to actually perform the copy or by specifying the e option executed immediately NOTE A procedure file is a special OS 9 file It contains OS 9 commands Each command is specified on a line one command per line When the procedure file is executed the OS 9 commands it contains are executed in the order they are listed in the procedure file Procedure files are discussed in more detail in the chapter on the shell To use the dsave utility type
24. and start each user with a personalized environment The system asks you for your user name and the password the system manager assigned to you The system echoes your user name but for security purposes your password is not echoed You have three chances to enter a valid user name and password An example of the login procedure is given below OS 9 68000 V2 4 Microware Systems P32 90 11 24 14 51 12 User Name smith Password not echoed Process 10 logged on 90 11 24 14 51 20 Welcome Depending on how the system is set up a system wide message of the day may be displayed on your screen You can also automatically run one or more initial programs In addition you are normally set up in your own main working directory To log off simply press the lt escape gt end of file key or type logout any time your main shell is active For more information see the login and tsmon utility descriptions in the OS 9 Utilities section 3 2 Using Professional OS 9 Basic Commands and Functions An Introduction to the Shell An Introduction to the Shell Every operating system has a command interpreter A command interpreter is a translator between the commands you type in and the commands the operating system understands and executes OS 9 s command interpreter is called the shell The shell is normally started as part of the system startup sequence on a single user system or after logging on to a timesharing
25. expand nd file2_comp file2_comp is expanded and then deleted creating file2 with the expanded output Using Professional OS 9 47 fixmod The OS 9 Utilities fixmod Fix Module CRC and Parity SYNTAX FUNCTION fixmod lt opts gt lt modname gt fixmod verifies and updates module parity and module CRC cyclic redundancy check You can also use it to set the access permissions and the group user number of the owner of the module Use fixmod to update the CRC and parity of a module every time a module is patched or modified in any way OS 9 cannot recognize a module with an incorrect CRC You must have write access to the file in order to use fixmod Use the U option to recalculate and update the CRC and parity Without the U option fixmod only verifies the CRC and parity of the module The up lt perm gt option sets the module access permissions to lt perm gt lt perm gt must be specified in hexadecimal You must be the owner of the module or a super user to set the access permissions The permission field of the module header is divided into four sections from right to left owner permissions group permissions public permissions reserved for future use Each of these sections are divided into four fields from right to left read attribute write attribute execute attribute reserved for future use The entire module access permissions field is given as a four digit hexadecimal value For example
26. for another file When the latter profile command is completed the first one will resume A particularly useful application for profile files is within the login and logout files of asystem s users For example if each user includes the following line in their login file system wide commands common environments news bulletins etc can be included in the file dd SYS login_sys profile dd SYS login_sys A similar technique can be used for logout files Using Professional OS 9 105 qsort The OS 9 Utilities qsort SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES In Memory Quick Sort qsort lt opts gt lt path gt qsort is a quick sort algorithm that sorts any number of lines up to the maximum capacity of memory To use qsort type qsort and the pathlist s of the file s to sort qsort sorts the file s by a user specified field or field one by default The field separation character defaults to a space if no separation character is specified If no file names are given on the command line standard input is assumed CAVEAT Miultiple separation characters in a row are counted as a single field separator For example if a comma is specified as the field separation character three commas in a row signify only one field separator If the intent is to create two null fields a space must be inserted between each comma Displays the options function and command syntax of qsort c lt C
27. make The OS 9 Utilities OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of make b Does not use built in rules bo Does not use built in rules for object files d Debug Mode Prints the dates of the files in the makefile dd Double debug mode very verbose f Reads the makefile from standard input f lt path gt Specifies lt path gt as the makefile If lt path gt is specified as a hyphen make commands are read from standard input i Ignores errors N Does not execute commands but does display them S Silent Mode Executes commands without echo t Updates the dates without executing commands u Does the make regardless of the dates on files X Uses the cross compiler assembler Z Reads a list of make targets from standard input z lt path gt Reads a list of make targets from lt path gt Options may be included on the command line when running make or they may be included in the makefile for convenience CAVEAT The make language is highly specific Therefore use caution when using dummy files with names like print CAVEAT make is always case dependent with respect to directory names and file names Unless a file is specifically an object file or the b option is used to turn off the implicit rules use a suffix for your dummy files For example use print file and xxx h for your header files Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities mdir mdir Display Module Directory SYNTAX
28. zero OS 9 does not currently use this field Offset to Installation Name This is the offset to the installation name string CPU Type CPU type 68000 68008 68010 68020 68030 68040 68070 or 683XX The default is 68000 Level Version and Edition This four byte field is divided into three parts level 1 byte version 2 bytes edition 1 byte For example level 1 version 2 4 edition 1 would be 1241 Description 5A 5C 5E 60 M 0S9Rev M SysPri M MinPty M MaxAge Revision Offset This is the offset to the OS 9 level revision string Priority This is the system priority at which the first module usually SysGo or shell is executed This is generally the base priority at which all process es start The default is 128 Minimum Priority This is the initial system minimum executable priority The default is zero M MinPty is discussed later in this chapter and in the OS 9 Technical Manual Maximum Age This is the initial system maximum natural age The default is zero M MaxAge is discussed later in this chapter and in the OS 9 Technical Manual Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module 62 Reserved 66 M Events 68 M Compat Offset Name This field is currently reserved for future use Number of Entries in the Events Table This is the initial number of entries allowed in the events table If the table becomes ful
29. 128 4 00k 0s 0 01 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t2 kill 4 procs Id PId Grp Usr Prior MemSiz Sig S CPU Time Age Module amp I O 2 1 0 0 128 0 25k Ow 0 01 sysgo lt gt gt gt term 3 2 0 0 128 4 75k Ow 4 11 01 13 shell lt gt gt gt term 4 3 0 0 128 8 50k 0 0 08 00 00 procs lt gt gt term 70 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities link link Link a Previously Loaded Module into Memory SYNTAX link lt opts gt lt modname gt FUNCTION link is used to link a previously loaded module into memory To use this utility type link and the name s of the module s to lock into memory The link count of the mod ule specified is incremented by one each time it is linked Use unlink to unlink the mod ule when it is no longer needed OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of link Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES link prog1 prog2 prog3 link z linkfile Links modules from linkfile link z Links modules from standard input Using Professional OS 9 71 list The OS 9 Utilities list List the Contents of a Text File SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES list lt opts gt lt path gt list displays text lines from the specified path s to standard output To use the list utility type list and the pathlist list terminates upon reaching the end of file of the last input path
30. 143 662 39 5 Writes 7723 8065 7342 68 Dir Reads 54048 54048 34526 18387 lt Sctr Zero 63 9 Dir Writes 0 0 Hit compares 63399 1 hit Miss compares 92685 3 miss CAVEATS Caching should only be invoked on devices that are known to the I O system that is the devices should have been initialized with the iniz utility If caching is to be enabled on drives with different sector sizes the device with the larg est sector size should be included in the initial cache enabling Attempting to add a drive with a sector size larger than any currently cached drive to the cache system af ter initial cache startup results in continuous misses for that drive as the sector size is too large 34 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities diskcache OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of diskcache d Disables cache for lt dev gt Enables cache for lt dev gt Displays the cache status for lt dev gt t lt size gt k Specifies the size limit of the total cache Using Professional OS 9 35 dsave The OS 9 Utilities dsave Generate Procedure File to Copy Files SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS dsave lt opts gt lt path gt dsave is used to backup or copy all files in one or more directories It generates a procedure file which is either executed later to actually do the work or is executed immediately using the e option To use dsave type dsave and th
31. 23 Printenv utility 5 4 5 5 Priority Age 5 12 8 27 Definition 5 12 D_MaxAge 8 27 D_MinPty 8 27 Initial 5 12 Manipulating 8 27 Modifier 5 13 Setting 5 9 Procedure files Jogin 5 21 logout 5 21 Applications 5 20 Cfp utility 5 25 5 26 Definition 5 20 Dsave utility 4 22 4 25 Shutdown 8 22 8 23 Startup file 8 17 Process Age 5 12 8 27 Child 5 10 Definition 1 4 Parent 5 10 Priority 5 9 8 27 Scheduling 8 27 8 28 System state 8 28 User state 8 28 Procs utility 5 16 5 28 Profile utility 5 6 5 22 PROMPT environment variable 5 4 1 4 Using Professional OS 9 Index Index RAM disk 8 16 Initializing 8 21 Non volatile 8 16 Volatile 8 16 Redirecting output 5 9 5 10 5 12 Root directory 4 6 Separators Command line 5 7 5 9 Concurrent execution 5 9 Pipes 5 9 Sequential execution 5 9 5 15 Sequential execution 5 9 5 15 Set utility 5 6 Setenv utility 5 4 5 6 Setime utility 2 2 Setpr utility 5 6 SHELL environment variable 5 3 Shell environment variables 5 3 5 5 Shell utility 3 3 5 3 Built in command 5 6 Chd utility 4 17 4 13 4 14 5 3 5 6 Chx utility 4 13 4 14 5 6 Ex utility 5 6 Kill utility 5 6 5 32 Logout utility 5 6 Profile utility 5 6 5 22 Set utility 5 6 Setenv utility 5 4 5 6 Setpr utility 5 6 Unsetenv utility 5 4 5 6 W utility 5 6 5 30 Wait utility 5 6 5 30 Environment 5 3 5 4 Changing 5 4 Function 5 1 Multiple shells 5 27 Options 5 1 5 2 Procedure files 5 20 S contin
32. 4095 00 K bytes Current total free RAM 1392 00 K bytes Free memory map Segment Address Size of Segment 55000 7000 28 00 K bytes 6A000 B000 44 00 K bytes 80000 8A000 552 00 K bytes 10E000 1A000 104 00 K bytes 12F000 1E000 120 00 K bytes 151000 60000 384 00 K bytes 1B5000 2000 8 00 K bytes 1B8000 E000 56 00 K bytes 1DE000 1000 4 00 K bytes 208000 4000 16 00 K bytes 21C000 5000 20 00 K bytes 245000 1000 4 00 K bytes 249000 1000 4 00 K bytes 90 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities moded moded Edit OS 9 Modules SYNTAX moded lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION moded is used to edit individual fields of certain types of OS 9 modules Currently you can use moded to change the Init module and any OS 9 device descriptor module moded can edit modules which exist in their own files and modules which exist among other modules in a single file such as a bootstrap file moded updates the module s CRC and header parity if changes are made Regardless of how you invoke moded you always enter the editor s command mode This is designated by the moded prompt If no parameters are specified on the moded command line no current module is loaded in memory If a file is specified on the command line it is assumed to contain a module of the same name This module is loaded into the editor s buffer and becomes the current module If the f option is used the specified file is loaded in
33. PATH variable setenv PATH d0 setenv PATH h0 cmds n0 jack h0 cmds n0 jill h0 cmds setenv PATH kim kim emds Each directory name is separated by a colon Shell isolates the directory name and appends it to the command name and uses this pathlist to load the command If the load fails the next directory given is used until the command is successfully loaded or all directories are tried Regardless of the error encountered the shell continues with the next directory If a directory given is a relative pathlist the pathlist is relative to the execution directory To assist in determining the directory from which a command was loaded or not loaded turn on the v option to display the shell s progress while searching the directories The login program automatically sets the PATH variable to the execution directory from which login itself was loaded if the password entry gives an execution directory 124 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities shell OPTIONS other than The period tells the shell to use the login s execution directory Example Command Lines The following example displays a numbered listing of the data directory dir is a keyword indicating the dir utility u is a parameter for dir The exclamation point is a pipe that redirects the unformatted output of dir to the standard input of pr pris a keyword indicating the pr utility N is a parameter for pr dir u pr n The following
34. Processing Separators Sequential execution amp Concurrent execution Pipe construction Wildcards Matches any character Matches a single character Execution Modifiers The shell processes execution modifiers before the program is run If an error is detected in any of the modifiers the run is aborted and the error reported Additional Memory Size Modifier Every executable program is converted to machine language for storage During the conversion process a module header is created for the program A module header is part of all executable programs and holds the program s name size memory requirements etc You can find a complete explanation of module headers in the OS 9 Technical Manual When the shell processes an executable program it allocates the minimum amount of working memory specified in the program s module header To increase the default memory size you can assign memory in 1K increments using the pound sign modifier followed by a number of allocated kilobytes 10k or 10 If the specified memory allocation is smaller than would otherwise be used the modifier is ig nored The increase in memory allocation only affects one command If you want to increase the allocation for the next command you must add the modifier again NOTE Programs written in C use the additional memory for stack space only Using Professional OS 9 5 9 Shell Command Line Processing The Shell VO Redirection
35. Professional OS 9 5 5 Built in Shell Commands The Shell Built In Shell Commands The shell has a special set of commands or option switches built in to the shell You can execute these commands without loading a program and creating a new process You can execute them regardless of your current execution directory The built in commands and their functions are Command Description lt text gt Indicates acomment lt text gt is not processed This is especially useful in procedure files chd lt path gt Changes the current data directory to the directory specified by the path chx lt path gt Changes the current execution directory to the directory speci fied by the path ex lt name gt Directly executes the named program This replaces the shell process with a new execution module kill lt proc ID gt Aborts the process specified by lt proc ID gt logout Terminates the current shell If the login shell is to be profile lt path gt set lt options gt setenv lt env var gt lt value gt setpr lt proc ID gt lt priority gt unsetenv lt env var gt w wait terminated the logout file in the home directory is executed and then the login shell is terminated Reads input from a named file and then returns to the shell s original input source Sets options for the shell Sets environment variable to the specified value Changes the process s priority Deletes an environment variable from the
36. Sig Number of any pending signals for the process S Process status w Waiting S Sleeping a Active Currently executing CPU Time Amount of CPU time the process has used Age Elapsed time since the process started Module amp I O Process name and standard I O paths lt Standard input gt Standard output gt gt Standard error output If several of the paths point to the same pathlist the identifiers for the paths are merged Using Professional OS 9 103 procs The OS 9 Utilities procs a displays nine pieces of information the process ID the parent process ID the process name and standard I O paths and six new pieces of information Aging Age of the process based on the initial priority and how long it has waited for processing F calls Number of service request calls made I calls Number of I O requests made Last Last system call made Read Number of bytes read Written Number of bytes written The b option displays both sets of information The e option displays information for all processes in the system Detailed explanation of all information displayed by procs is available in the OS 9 Technical Manual OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of procs a Displays alternate information b Displays regular and alternate procs information Displays all processes of all users EXAMPLES procs Id PId Grp Usr Prior MemSiz Sig S CPU Time Age Module amp I O 2 1 0 0 128 0 25k Ow 0 01 sy
37. The child s standard output and standard error are directed to the terminal s display When a redirection modifier is used on a shell command line the shell opens the corresponding paths and passes them to the new process as its standard I O paths The three redirection modifiers are lt Redirects the standard input path gt Redirects the standard output path gt gt Redirects the standard error path When you use redirection modifiers on a command line they must be immediately followed by a path de scribing the file or device to or from which the I O is to be redirected 5 10 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Command Line Processing Each physical input output device supported by the system must have a unique name Although the device names used on a system are somewhat arbitrary it is customary to use the names Microware assigns to standard devices in OS 9 packages They are Device Description TERM Primary System Terminal t1 t2 etc Other Serial Terminals p Parallel Printer p1 Serial Printer dd Default Disk Drive do Floppy Disk Drive Unit 0 d1 d2 etc Other Floppy Disk Drives hO h1 etc Hard Disk Drives Format inhibited hOfmt hifmt etc Hard Disk Drives Format enabled n0 n1 etc Network Devices mto mt1 Tape Devices rO Ram Disk pipe Pipe Device nil Null Device NOTE The hOfmt hifmt etc device descriptors have a bit set that allows you to use the format an
38. also contain an optional sixth element to describe various standard floppy disk formats These values are defined in the file rofdesc a in the IO directory SCF macros contain two additional elements Parity and BaudRate The driver uses these values to determine the parity word length and baud rate of the device These values are usually standard codes used by device drivers to access device specific index tables These codes are defined in the OS 9 Technical Manual You should place definitions such as control register definitions that are system specific in systype d This allows you to maintain all system specific definitions in a single system specific file Examine the systype d file If it does not accurately describe your system use any text editor to edit the appropriate macro s in the systype d file After editing the macro change your data directory to the IO directory Use the make utility to generate the required descriptors For example the make dO would generate the descriptors dO and dd dO The output files are placed in the CMDS BOOTOBUS directory Include these new descriptors in the bootfile NOTE For more information on the make utility refer to the chapter on making files and the make util ity description in the OS 9 Utilities section 8 12 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Making Booifiles Making Bootfiles A bootfile contains a list of modules to be loaded into memory during the system s
39. and used primarily by high level languages such as C Pascal and BASIC The file is organized as an ordered sequence of records of varying sizes If each record has ex actly the same length its beginning address within the file can be computed to allow records to be accessed in any order OS 9 does not directly deal with records other than providing the basic file manipulation functions high level languages that support random access records require Using Professional OS 9 4 3 OS 9 File Storage The OS 9 File System File Ownership When you create a file or directory a group user ID is automatically stored with it The group user ID is formed from your group number and your user number The group number allows people that work on the same project or work in the same department to share a common group identification The user number identifies a specific user Therefore a group user ID identifies a specific user in a specific group or department The group user ID determines file ownership OS 9 users are divided into two classes e The owner e The public The owner is any user with the same group or user number as the person who created the file This means that any user with the same group number as the person who created the file can access the file in the same way as the creator of the file Likewise any user with the same user number is considered the owner The public is any person with a group user ID that differs from t
40. any source files or relocatable files to complete the dependency lists it looks for them in the specified data directory unless a macro is specified make does a third pass through the list to get the file dates and compare them When make finds a file in a dependency list that is newer than its target file it executes the specified command s If no command entry is specified a command is generated based on the assumptions given in the next section Because OS 9 only stores the time down to the closest minute make remakes a file if its date matches one of its depen dents When a command is executed it is echoed to standard output unless the s or silent option is used or the command line starts with an at sign When the n option is used the command is echoed to standard output but is not actually executed If your system runs out of memory while executing a command you can redirect the output of make into a procedure file and execute the procedure file Using Professional OS 9 81 make The OS 9 Utilities make normally stops if an error code is returned when a command line is executed Errors are ignored if the i option is used or a command line begins with a hyphen Sometimes it is helpful to see the file dependencies and the dates associated with each of the files in the list The d option turns on the make debugger and gives a complete listing of the macro definitions a listing of the files as it checks t
41. b Isolate keyword parameters and execution modifiers c Expand wildcard names if given Using Professional OS 9 123 Shell The OS 9 Utilities If the keyword is a built in command execute the command Otherwise search the following directories until the command is found or the directory search is exhausted a The module directory b The execution directory c Each directory specified by the PATH environment variable If the command could not be found in the above directories return error can t find command f Ifthe command is found load the command into the module directory Y If the load fails execute shell command command is assumed to be a procedure file for the shell If the load succeeds and the module is executable object code execute command If the load succeeds and the module is BASIC I code execute Runb com mand Command is an argument for RunB Tf either of the above command execution fails return error can t execute command Commands and procedure files in the current execution directory must have the e and or pe file attribute set or the file will not be found If the PATH environment variable is set its value is interpreted as a list of directories to search if the initial search of the execution directory fails If an absolute pathlist a path beginning with a slash is given as the command the shell does not perform the PATH directory search The following are examples of setting up the
42. base is specified the base for the numeric value defaults to hexadecimal An explicit base of decimal or hexadecimal can be specified by preceding the numeric value with a qualifier of d or x respectively It also allows entry of some non printing characters such as t Tab character n New line character l Line feed character b Backspace character f Form feed character Example Expressions You can combine any metacharacters and normal characters to create an expression Expression Same as abed abcd ab d abcd abxd ab d etc ab d abd ab d ab d ab d etc abed abcd only if very first characters on a line abcd abcd only if very last characters on a line abcd abcd only if abcd is the complete line Aa bcd abcd Abcd abcd 0 9a zA z abcd followed by any alphanumeric character bed a d bcd followed by any ASCII char except a b C d or new line 62 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities grep OPTIONS C e lt expr gt f lt path gt n S V Z z lt path gt Displays the options function and command syntax of grep Counts the number of matching lines Searches for lt expr gt This is the same as lt expression gt in the com mand line Reads the list of expressions from lt path gt Prints only the names of the files with matching lines Prints the relative line number within the file followed by the matched exp
43. bootstrap sequence The provided bootfiles have been configured to satisfy the majority of users but you may want to add or remove modules from an existing boottfile Bootlist Files Bootfiles are usually created using a bootlist file and the z option of the OS9Gen or TapeGen utilities The boottlist files contain a list of files one file per line to use in creating the bootfile Using a bootlist file is a convenient way to maintain bootfile contents as the bootlist file can easily be edited The bootlist files are usually located in the CMDS BOOTOBUS directory along with the individual files used for constructing the bootfile Bootfile Requirements The contents and module order of a bootfile are usually determined by the end user s system configuration and requirements However note the following points when you construct a bootfile e The kernel MUST be present in the system either in ROM or in the bootfile If the kernel is in the bootfile IT MUST BE THE FIRST MODULE The Init module must be present in the system either in ROM or in the bootfile All other modules are dependent upon the system configuration Making RBF Bootfiles To make a bootfile for an RBF device hard disk or floppy disk you need to edit the bootlist file to match your requirements and then run the OS9Gen utility chd h0 cmds bootobjs lt edit bootlist file gt OS9Gen lt device gt z lt bootlist gt The lt device gt you specify is the disk
44. can also be used to make a disk non bootable without deleting the actual bootfile OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of os9gen b lt num gt Assigns lt num gt k of memory for os9gen Default memory size is 4K Extended Boot Allows you to use large greater than 64K and or non contiguous files NOTE Bootstrap ROMs must support this feature q lt file gt Quick Boot Sets sector zero pointing to lt file gt r Removes the pointer to the boot file This file is not deleted X Searches the execution directory for pathlists Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES This command manually installs a boot file on device d1 which is an exact copy of the OS9Boot file on device d0 os9gen d1 d0 os9boot Using Professional OS 9 97 os9gen The OS 9 Utilities The following three methods manually install a boot file on device d1 The boot file on d1 is a copy of the OS9Boot file on device dO with the addition of modules stored in the files dO tape driver and d2 video driver Method 1 os9gen d1 d0 os9boot d0 tape driver d2 video driver Method 2 os9gen d1 d0 os9boot z d0 tape driver d2 video driver ESCAPE Method 3 os9gen d1 z d0 os9boot d0 tape driver d2 video driver ESCAPE You can automatically install a boot file by building a bootlist file and using the z option to ei
45. defs dir now displays the names of the files in the DEFS directory The name defs is a relative pathlist You can type dir defs because DEFS is in your current data directory You can also use the full pathlist dir nO defs and get the same result To display the contents of your current execution directory type dir x You may also use wildcards with the dir utility and with most other utilities as well OS 9 recognizes two wildcards the asterisk and the question mark An asterisk is replaced by any number of letter s number s or special characters Consequently an asterisk by itself expands to include all of the files in a given directory A question mark is replaced by a single letter number or special character For example the command dir lists the contents of all directories located in the current data directory The command dir hO cmds d lists all files and directories in the CMDS directory that begin with the letter d The command dir prog_ lists all files in your current directory that have a file name with prog_ followed by a single character For more information see the section on wildcards in the chapter on the shell Dir Options dir has several options which are fully documented in the OS 9 Utilities section Some of these options are discussed here Try each of the options and see what information is displayed The e option gives an extended directory listing An extended directory listing displays all
46. device is already attached it is not re initialized but the link count is incre mented For example to increment the link count of modules t2 and t3 type iniz t2 t3 You can read the device names from standard input with the zZ option or from a file with the z lt file gt option To increment the link counts of devices listed in a file called nO add files type iniz z h0 add files Using Professional OS 9 8 17 Loading Utilities Into Memory OS 9 System Management You can use the deiniz utility to close a path to a device deiniz checks the link count before removing the device from storage If the link count is greater than one deiniz lowers the link count If the link count is one deiniz lowers the link count making it zero and removes the device from the system device table The device then becomes unknown to OS 9 To use the deiniz utility type deiniz followed by the name s of the devices s to be removed from the system For example to decrement the link count of module p2 type deiniz p2 deiniz can read the device names from standard input with the Z option or from a file with the z lt file gt option To remove the files listed in a file called nO not needed type deiniz z h0 not needed This initialize de initialize sequence can result in slower execution of programs and could cause memory fragmentation problems To avoid these symptoms Microware recommends that all devices connected
47. duplicate lines m Dumps from a memory resident module S Interprets the starting offset as a sector number This is useful for RBF devices with a sector size not equal to 256 X Indicates that lt path gt is an execution directory You must have execute permission for the pathlist dump Displays keyboard input in hex dump myfile gt P Dumps myfile to printer dump shortfile Dumps shortfile starting data bytes in hexadecimal format data bytes in address ASCII format Addr 0123456789ABCDEF02468ACE 00000000 6d61 696e 2829 0d7b 0d09 696e 7420 783b main int x 00000010 0d09 0d09 6765 745f 7465 726d 5f64 6566 get_term_def 00000020 7328 293b 0d09 783d 6d65 6e75 2829 3b0d s x menu 40 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities echo echo Echo Text to Output Path SYNTAX echo lt opts gt lt text gt FUNCTION echo echoes its parameter to the standard output path echo is typically used to gen erate messages in shell procedure files or to send an initialization character sequence to a terminal To use the echo utility type echo and the text to output echo reads the text until a carriage return is encountered The input then echoes on the output path A hexadecimal number representing a character may be imbedded in a character string but you must precede it with a backslash The shell removes all but one imbedded space from character strings passed to echo Therefore to allow f
48. enter profile and the name of a file profile setmyenviron The specified file in this case setmyenviron may contain any utility or shell commands including commands to set or unset environment variables or to change directories These changes will remain in effect after the command has finished executing This is in contrast to calling a normal procedure file by name only If you call a normal procedure file without using the profile command the changes would not affect the environment of the calling shell Profile commands may be nested That is the file itself may contain a profile command for another file When the latter profile command is completed the first one will resume A particularly useful application for profile files is within a user s login and logout files For example if each user includes the following line in the login file then system wide commands common environments news bulletins etc can be included in the file dd SYS login_sys profile dd SYS login_sys A similar technique can be used for logout files The Login Shell login and logout The login shell is the initial shell created by the login program to process the user input commands after logging in Two special procedure files are extremely useful for per sonalizing the shell environment 120 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities shell e login e logout To make use of these files they must be located in your
49. environment Waits for a child process to terminate Waits for all child processes to terminate Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Command Line Processing Shell Command Line Processing The shell reads and processes command lines one at a time from its input path which is usually your keyboard Each line is first scanned or parsed to identify and process any of the following parts which may be present keyword A name of a program procedure file built in command or pathlist parameters The names of files programs values variables constants etc to pass to the program being executed execution modifiers These modify a program s execution by redirecting I O or changing the priority or memory allocation of a process separators When multiple commands are placed on the same command line sep arators specify whether they should execute sequentially or concur rently The shell can process a command line with only the keyword present Parameters execution modifiers and separators are optional After it identifies the keyword the shell processes any execution modifiers and separators The shell assumes that any text not yet processed are parameters they are passed to the program called The keyword must be the first word in the command line If the keyword is a built in command it is immediately executed If the keyword is not a built in command the shell assumes it is a program name and attempts to locate
50. etc This chapter discusses the following topics of importance to system managers Setting the system defaults using the Init module Adding customization modules Changing system modules Making bootfiles Using a RAM disk Making a startup file Shutting down the system Installing OS 9 on a hard disk Managing processes in a real time environment Using the tmode and xmode utilities Using termcap Using Professional OS 9 8 1 Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module OS 9 System Management Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module The Init module is sometimes referred to as the configuration module It is a non executable module lo cated in memory in the OS9Boot file or in ROM The Init module contains system parameters used to configure OS 9 during startup The parameters set up the initial table sizes and system device names For example the amount of memory to allocate for internal tables the name of the first program to run usually either SysGo or shell an initial directory etc are specified You can examine the system limits in the Init module at any time os NOTE The Init module MUST be present in the system in order for OS 9 to work The values in the Init module s table are the system defaults You can change these defaults in two ways The first method involves editing the CONFIG macro in the systype d file The systype d file is located in the DEFS directory After systype d is edite
51. exception If the shell to be terminated is the login shell logout executes the procedure file logout The login shell is the initial shell created by the login utility when you log on the system In order for logout to execute the logout file logout must be located in the directory specified by the HOME environment variable 3 lac list logout procs wait date echo see you later 3 lac logout 2 lac logout Llac logout Id PId Grp Usr Prior MemSiz Sig S CPU Time Age Module amp I O 2 1 0 0 128 0 25k Ow 0 01 sysgo lt gt gt gt term 3 2 0 0 128 4 75k Ow 4 11 01 13 shell lt gt gt gt term 4 3 0 0 128 8 50k 0 0 08 00 00 procs lt gt gt term 5 0 0 0 128 4 00k 0s 0 02 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t1 July 7 1989 11 59 pm see you later 78 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities makdir makdir Create a Directory File SYNTAX makdir lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION makdir creates a new directory file specified by the given pathlist To create a new directory type makdir and the pathlist specifying the new directory You must have write permission for the new directory s parent directory The new directory is initialized and does not initially contain files except for the pointers to itself and its parent directory All access permissions are enabled except single use or non sharable It is an OS 9 convention to capitalize directory names to distinguish them from lower
52. gt LFLAGS lt opts gt CC lt comp gt RC lt asm gt LC lt link gt make searches the directory specified by lt path gt for all files that have no suffix or relative pathlist If ODIR is not defined in the makefile make searches the current directory by default make searches the directory specified by lt path gt for all source files not specified by a full pathlist If SDIR is not defined in the makefile make searches the current directory by default make searches the directory specified by lt path gt for all relo catable files not specified by a full pathlist If RDIR is not de fined make searches the current directory by default These compiler options are used in any necessary compiler command lines These assembler options are used in any necessary assembler command lines These linker options are used in any necessary linker command lines make uses this compiler when generating command lines The default compiler is Cc make uses this assembler when generating command lines The default assembler is r68 make uses this linker when generating command lines The de fault linker is CC 84 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities make Some reserved macros are expanded when a command line associated with a particular file dependency is forked These macros may only be used on a command line They are useful when you need to be explicit about a command line but have a target program
53. gt r a marks files for restoration del lt path gt g lt gt u lt gt r a unmarks files for restoration dir lt dir names gt e displays a directory or directories chd lt path gt changes directories within the restore file structure pwd gives the pathlist to current dir in the restore file structure cht lt path gt changes directories on target system rest lt path gt f q restores marked files in and below the current dir check f checks validity if marked files in and below the current dir dump lt file gt dumps the contents of a file to stdout forks a shell quit quit frestore program options g lt group gt only mark files with group u lt user gt only mark files with user r mark directories recursively e display directory with extended format f force restoration of already restored files q overwrite already existing files without question a force marking or unmarking of an already restored file or dir matches any string of characters on add or del only matches any single character on add or del only frestore gt The index from the source device sets up a restore file structure that parallels the usual OS 9 file directory structure Use the dir and chd shell commands to display the restore file structure For example frestore gt dir Directory of DIR1 file1 file2 file3 All files to
54. home directory The login and logout files provide a way to execute desired commands when logging on to and leav ing the system The login shell processes login as a command file immediately after successful login This allows you to run a number of initializing commands without remembering each and every command After processing all commands in the login file the shell prompts you for more commands The main difference in handling the login file is that the login shell itself actually executes the commands rather than creating another shell to execute the commands You can issue such commands as set and setenv within the login file and have them affect the login shell This is especially useful for setting up the environment variables PATH PROMPT TERM and _ sh The following is an example login file setenv PATH h0 cmds d0 cmds dd cmds h0 doc spex setenv PROMPT what next setenv _sh 0 setenv TERM abm85h querymail date dir logout is executed when logout is executed to exit the login shell and leave the system The logout file is executed before the login shell terminates Use this to execute any cleaning up procedures that are done on a regular schedule This might be anything from instigating a backup procedure of some sort to printing a reminder of things to do The following is an example logout file procs wait echo all processes terminated basic program to instigate backup if necessary disk
55. in that capability The padding char acters are supplied by tputs after the remainder of the string is transmitted to provide the time delay The time delay may be either an integer or a real The time delay may be followed by an asterisk The asterisk specifies that the padding is proportional to the number of lines affected NOTE It is often useful to specify the time delay using the real format For example the clear screen capability is specified as z with a time delay of 3 5 milliseconds by the following entry cl 3 5 4z Escape sequences may be indicated by an E to indicate the escape character A control character is indicated by a circumflex preceding the character The following special character constants are supported b Backspace 08 f Formfeed 0C n Newline 0A r Return 0D t Tab 09 Backslash 5C Circumflex 5E Characters may be specified as three Octal digits after a backslash For example if a colon must be used in a capability definition it must be specified by 072 If it is necessary to place a null character in a capability definition use 200 C routines using termcap strip the high bits of the output therefore 200 is interpreted as 000 Using Professional OS 9 8 31 Termcap Capabilities OS 9 System Management Termcap Capabilities The following is a list of termcap capabilities recognized by termcap Not all of these capabilities need to be present for most p
56. in the login utility description in the OS 9 Utilities section If login fails because you could not supply a valid user name or password control returns to tsmon For more information on the tsmon utility refer to the OS 9 Utilities section 8 20 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management System Shutdown Procedure System Shutdown Procedure There will be times when for one reason or another you want to bring your system down When you reset or power down your system you may need to do more than just press the reset button Certain programs need to be shut down gracefully For example most network communications print spoolers and inter system processes need special attention These processes may have options or other arrangements that need to be considered before shutting down your system In addition to taking care of processes that require special attention you should prepare the system s users for the shutdown If at all possible allow users enough time to save their files and get off the system One way of alerting users that the system is going down is by echoing a message using the echo and tee utilities However you should realize that messages sent over the system in this manner will not be seen by users who do not press a carriage return after the message has been sent For example if a programmer is sitting at a shell prompt the message will not appear on the terminal screen until a carriage return is entered
57. is specified Uses os9gen to create a bootfile on the specified destination device if a bootfile exists on the source device The default name used for the bootfile is OS9Boot This option is used to create a bootable disk Merely copying OS9Boot to a new disk does not make it bootable Uses os9gen to create a bootfile on a new device using the specified name This option is used to create a bootable disk Merely copying OS9YBoot to a new disk does not make it bootable Writes any source file over a file with the same name in the destination directory Effectively this uses the copy utility with the r option Skips files on error This effectively turns off the prompt to continue the dsave routine when an error occurs Verifies files with the cmp utility Using Professional OS 9 37 dsave The OS 9 Utilities EXAMPLES The first three examples effectively accomplish the same goal copying all files in d0 MYFILES STUFF to d1 BACKUP STUFF Each example highlights a differ ent method of using dsave In the first example no path is specified in the dsave command and a procedure file is generated Therefore you must change data directories before executing the procedure file If the directory is not changed an error message occurs 218 file already ex ists in this directory under the same name chd d0 MYFILES STUFF Selects the directory to be copied dsave gt d0 makecopy Makes the procedure file makecopy
58. it The shell searches for the command in the following sequence The shell checks the memory to see if the program is already loaded into the module directory If it is already in memory there is no need to load another copy The shell then calls the program to be executed i If the program was not in memory your current execution directory is searched If it is found the shell attempts to load the program If this fails the shell tries to execute it as a procedure file If this fails the shell attempts the same procedure using the next directory specified in the PATH environment variable This continues until the command is successfully executed or the list of directories is exhausted The shell searches your current data directory If it finds the specified file it is processed as a procedure file Procedure files are assumed to contain one or more shell command lines These command lines are processed by a newly created or child shell as if they had been typed in manually After all commands from the procedure file execute control returns to the old or parent shell Because the child shell processes the commands all built in commands in the procedure file such as chd and chx only affect the child shell Using Professional OS 9 5 7 Shell Command Line Processing The Shell The shell returns an error if the program is not found If the program is found and executed the shell waits until the program terminates When t
59. itself in any way root directory The directory entered when the user first logs on to the system This directory is specified in the password file SBF The Sequential Block File manager is the OS 9 file manager module that supports sequential access block oriented mass storage devices tape systems SBF can handle any number or type of such systems simultaneously SCF The Sequential Character File manager is the OS 9 manager module that supports sequential ac cess character oriented devices terminals printers SCF can handle any number or type of such systems simultaneously self modifying code Code that alters itself during execution OS 9 code must not be self modifying separator A special character recognized by shell in the command line that specifies the sequential or concurrent execution of more than one process The special characters are a semicolon for sequential execution and an ampersand amp for concurrent execution sequential execution The act of deliberately running programs one at a time in the order specified as opposed to concurrently This is done when it is necessary for one program to be completed before the next one in a sequence is begun See also multi tasking concurrent execution and separator shell OS 9 s command interpreter program This program acts as an interface between your and the op erating system See also command interpreter signal A software interrupt that can be
60. listing all of the standard error codes is included with this manual If a longer description of errors is desired set the e and the v shell options This prints error messages from dd SYS errmsg on standard output Using Professional OS 9 5 33 Running Compiled Intermediate Code Programs The Shell Running Compiled Intermediate Code Programs Before the shell executes a program it checks the program module s language type If its type is not 68000 machine language the shell calls the appropriate run time system for that module Versions of the shell supplied for various systems are capable of calling different run time systems For example if you wanted to run a BASIC I code module called adventure you could type either of the two commands given below they accomplish exactly the same thing BASIC adventure adventure End of Chapter 5 5 34 Using Professional OS 9 6 Making Files The Make Utility Many types of files are dependent on various other files in their creation If the files that make up the final product are updated the final product becomes out of date The make utility is designed to automate the maintenance and re creation of files that change over a period of time make maintains the files by using a special type of procedure file known as a makefile The makefile describes the relationship between the final product and the files that make up the final product For the purpose of this discuss
61. lt opts gt lt devname gt format is used to physically initialize verify and establish an initial file structure on a disk You must format all disks before using them on an OS 9 system format can format almost any type of disk including hard disks To use the format utility type format the name of the device to format and any options format will determine whether the device is autosize for example devices such as SCSI CCS drives or non autosize such as standard floppy disks and many hard disks An autosize device is one which can be queried to determine the capacity of the device format checks a bit in PD_Ctrl to determine whether or not a device is autosize If this bit is zero the device is non autosize If one the media is autosize Format on Non Autosize Devices If format determines that your device is non autosize format reads a description of the disk from the device descriptor module The default values for the number of sides number of tracks sector size and density are determined by the values in the descriptor At this time the default cluster size is set at one format determines the media capacity by multiplying together the number of cylinders PD_CYL tracks PD_TKS and sectors per track PD_SCT PD_TOS Because format calculates the device capacity in this way the t lt num gt and ss ds options can be used to affect the capacity of the device 50 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities
62. macro B followed by the character R Macros may be placed in the makefile for convenience or on the command line for flexibility Macros are allowed in the form of lt macro name gt lt expansion gt The expansion is substituted for the macro name whenever the macro name appears If you define a macro in your makefile and then redefine it on the command line the com mand line definition overrides the definition in the makefile This feature is useful for com piling with special options To increase make s flexibility special macros can be defined in the makefile make uses these macros when assumptions must be made in generating command lines or when searching for unspecified files For example if no source file is specified for program r make searches either the directory specified by SDIR or the current data directory for program a or c p f make recognizes the following special macros Macro Definition ODIR lt path gt make searches the directory specified by lt path gt for all files with no suffix or relative pathlist If ODIR is not defined in the makefile make searches the current directory by default SDIR lt path gt make searches the directory specified by lt path gt for all source files not specified by a full pathlist If SDIR is not defined in the makefile make searches the current directory by default RDIR lt path gt make searches the directory specified by lt path gt for all rel
63. multiple input files specified by lt path gt to standard output merge is commonly used to combine several files into a single output file Data is copied in the order the pathlists are specified on the command line merge does no output line editing such as automatic line feed The standard output is generally re directed to a file or device OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of merge b lt num gt Allocates a lt num gt k buffer size for use by merge The default memory size is 4K X Searches the current execution directory for files to be merged Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES merge compile list asm list gt p merge file1 file2 file3 file4 gt combined file b 32k merge x load link copy gt Utils1 merge z h0 PROGS file1 gt merged_files Using Professional OS 9 89 mfree The OS 9 Utilities mfree Display Free System RAM SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES mfree lt opts gt mfree displays a list of areas in memory not presently in use and available for assignment The address and size of each free memory block are displayed Displays the option function and command syntax of mfree Displays an extended free memory list mfree Current total free RAM 1392 00 K bytes mfree e Minimum allocation size 4 00 K bytes Number of memory segments 25 Total RAM at startup
64. new files could be created even if each had only one sector Displays the option function and command syntax of free b lt num gt Uses the specified buffer size free Tazz H0 Wren V created on Oct 6 1990 Capacity 2347860 sectors 256 byte sectors 8 sector clusters 1508424 free sectors largest block 1380120 sectors 386156544 of 601052160 bytes 368 26 of 573 20 Mb free on media 64 353310720 bytes 336 94 Mb in largest free block 54 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities frestore frestore Directory Backup Restoration SYNTAX frestore lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION _ frestore restores a directory structure from multiple volumes of tape or disk media Typing frestore by itself on the command line attempts to restore a directory structure from the device mt0 to the current directory Specifying the pathlist of a directory on the command line causes the files to be restored in the specified directory fsave cre ates the directory structure and an index of the directory structure If more than one tape disk is involved in the fsave backup each tape disk is considered a different volume The volume count begins at one 1 When you begin a frestore operation you must use the last volume of the backup first The last volume of the backup contains the index of the entire backup frestore first attempts to locate and read in the index of the directory structure from the source device
65. process is submitted for execution all earlier processes s ages are incremented The process with the highest age executes first If you want a program to run at a higher priority use the caret modifier By specifying a higher priority a process is placed higher in the execution queue For example format d1 255 In this example the process format is given the assigned priority of 255 By assigning a lower number you can specify a lower priority 5 12 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Command Line Processing WARNING Specifying too high of a priority for a process can cause all other pro cesses to be locked out until their ages mature For example if you specify a priority of 2000 for a large program and all the other processes have an age of less than 100 your program is the only process executed on the system until either your program ter minates or another process s age reaches 2000 If another process s age reaches 2000 it is run once and entered back in the queue at its initial priority Once again your pro gram either runs until it terminates or until another process s age reaches 2000 Wildcard Matching The shell uses some alternate ways to identify file and directory names It accepts wildcards in the com mand line The two recognized wildcard characters are the asterisk and the question mark and An asterisk matches any group of zero or more characters A question ma
66. regardless of the NX option In all other regards a semicolon and a carriage return act as identical separators The following example copies the contents of oldfile into newfile When the copy command is finished oldfile is deleted Then the contents of newfile are listed copy oldfile newfile del oldfile list newfile In the next example the output from dir is redirected into myfile in the d1 directory The output from list is then redirected to the printer Finally temp is deleted dir gt d1 myfile list temp gt p del temp Multi tasking Concurrent Execution Use the ampersand amp separator to execute programs concurrently This allows programs to run at the same time as other programs including the shell The shell does not wait to complete a process before processing the next command Concurrent execution is how a background program is started Use the concurrent execution separator for multi tasking The number of programs that can run at the same time is not fixed it depends on the amount of free memory in the system and the memory requirements of the specific programs Here is an example dir gt P amp list file1 amp copy file1 file2 del temp The dir list and copy utilities run concurrently because they are separated by an ampersand amp del does not run until Copy terminates because sequential execution was specified If you add an ampersand amp to the end of a command line regardle
67. related timesharing functions to control access to the system and privacy within the system Typical Multi user System Configuration Four terminals on one OS 9 Computer The multi tasking and multi user capabilities tremendously increase OS 9 s versatility OS 9 is often used as a single user multi tasking system on small computers It is also used as a multi user multi tasking system on larger computer systems In either case there is no difference in OS 9 itself the application software or how either works Using Professional OS 9 1 5 The Memory Module and Modular Software An Overview of OS 9 The Memory Module and Modular Software A unique feature of OS 9 is its support of modular software techniques based on memory modules The use of memory modules can e Provide more efficient use of available disk and memory storage e Make the system run faster e Simplify programming jobs e Make it easy to customize and adapt OS 9 itself All OS 9 programs are kept in the form of one or more program modules containing pure program code They do not contain variable storage OS 9 assigns variable storage in a separate block of memory at run time Each module has a unique name and can be loaded into memory or stored on disk or tape OS 9 automatically keeps track of the names and locations of all modules present in memory An important characteristic of memory modules is the shar
68. sent from one process to another or from OS 9 to a process For example the lt control gt E abort key causes an abort signal to be sent to a program single user A mode of operation where only one user utilizes the computer Also a file attribute that allows only one user at a time to access the file Using Professional OS 9 C 7 Glossary Glossary SPU Abbreviation for System Protection Unit SPU is special hardware used to protect system memory from accidental modification If a process tries to access any part of system memory or any other process memory the SPU hardware causes a bus error and the system aborts the process standard I O path The default I O path used by a program for routine input and output Every process has three standard I O paths input output and error output See also path and redirection system call A request from a programming language that causes OS 9 to perform a specific function such as input output system disk A disk which contains the system boot file plus other common system wide files such as the utility command set task See process timesharing See multi user UNIX An operating system similar to OS 9 user name A name used externally to identify each user when logging on to the system Based on the contents of the password file the system converts this name to the corresponding user ID number for sub sequent internal use See also user ID and password file use
69. t4 91 5 ffff1041 003bc120 0000e6b6 sc68560 t5 255 5 ffff8800 00245a50 002458e0 n9026 n0 SEE ALSO F IRQ system state service request in the OS 9 Technical Manual Using Professional OS 9 69 kill The OS 9 Utilities kill Abort a Process SYNTAX FUNCTION EXAMPLES kill lt procID gt kill is a built in shell command It sends a signal to kill the process having the specified process ID number This unconditionally terminates the process To terminate a process type kill and the ID number s of the process es to abort The process must have the same user ID as the user executing the command Use procs to obtain the process ID numbers If a process is waiting for I O it cannot die until it completes the current I O operation Therefore if you kill a process and procs shows it still exists the process is probably waiting for the output buffer to be flushed before it can die The command kill 0 kills all processes owned by the user NOTE Because kill is a built in shell command it does not appear in the CMDS directory kill 6 7 procs Id PId Grp Usr Prior MemSiz Sig S CPU Time Age Module amp I O 2 1 0 0 128 0 25k Ow 0 01 sysgo lt gt gt gt term 3 2 0 0 128 4 75k Ow 4 11 01 13 shell lt gt gt gt term 4 3 0 0 5 400k Oa 12 42 06 00 14 xhog lt gt gt gt term 5 3 0 0 128 8 50k 0 0 08 00 00 procs lt gt gt term 6 0 0 0 128 4 00k Os 0 02 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t1 7 0 0 0
70. temporary file lt int gt is specified in kilobytes 56 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities frestore EXAMPLES The following command restores files and directories from the source device mt0 to the current directory by way of an interactive shell frestore The next command restores files and directories from the source device dO to the current directory using a 32K buffer As each file is read from the index the file s pathlist is echoed to the terminal frestore eb 32 d d0 The next command restores all files directories found on the source device mt1 to the directory BACKUP without using the interactive shell frestore d mt1 s BACKUP The following command displays the backup and the volume number frestore v Backup DOCUMENTATION Made 11 30 90 10 10 By 0 0 Volume 0 This command does not restore the backup Using Professional OS 9 57 fsave The OS 9 Utilities fsave Incremental Directory Backup SYNTAX FUNCTION fsave lt opts gt lt dir gt fsave performs an incremental backup of a directory structure to tape s or disk s Typing fsave by itself on the command line makes a level 0 backup of the current directory onto the target device mt0 Use the l option to specify different backup levels A higher level backup only saves files changed since the most recent backup with the next lower number For example a level 1 backup saves all files changed since th
71. that follows the header from OS 9 memory modules ident also checks for incomplete module headers ident displays the following information in this order module size owner CRC bytes with verification header parity with verification edition type language and attributes revision access permission For program modules it also includes execution offset data size stack size initialized data offset offset to the data reference lists ident prints the interpretation of the type language and attribute revision bytes at the bottom of the display With the exception of the access permission data all of the above fields are self explan atory The access permissions are divided into four sections from right to left owner permissions group permissions public permissions reserved for future use Each of these sections are divided into four fields from right to left read attribute write attribute execute attribute reserved for future use If the attribute is turned on the first letter of the attribute r w e is displayed Using Professional OS 9 65 ident The OS 9 Utilities All reserved fields are displayed as dashes unless the fields are turned on In that case the fields are represented with question marks In any case the kernel ignores these fields as they are reserved for future use Owner permissions allow the owner to access the module Group permissions allow anyone with the same group numbe
72. that you wish to install the bootfile on If this device is a hard disk specify the format enabled device name Using Professional OS 9 8 13 Making Booifiles OS 9 System Management For example to make a floppy disk bootfile type OS9Gen d0 z bootlist d0 To make a hard disk bootfile type OS9Gen h0fmt z bootlist h0 NOTE Some systems may not support boot files that are greater than 64K in length and or non contig uous Making Tape Bootfiles To make a bootfile for an SBF device tape you need to edit the bootlist file to match your requirements and then run the TapeGen utility chd h0 cmds bootobjs lt edit bootlist file gt TapeGen mt0 bz bootlist tape 8 14 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Using the RAM Disk Using the RAM Disk OS 9 provides support for RAM disks These disks reside solely in Random Access Memory RAM The information stored on a RAM disk can be accessed significantly faster than the same information stored on a hard or floppy disk Any files may be stored and accessed on a RAM disk To use a RAM disk you must have a device descriptor a RAM disk driver and the RBF file manager You may use multiple RAM disks as long as each RAM disk has a different port address The only real limitation to the number of RAM disks is the size of the memory However some practical considerations exist For example using one large RAM disk is more efficient than using many small
73. the command fixmod up 555 specifies the following module access permissions field r T r The uo lt g gt lt u gt option allows the super user to change the ownership of a module by setting the module owner s group user number 48 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities fixmod OPTIONS U ua lt att rev gt ub up lt perm gt U0 lt g gt lt U gt X Z z lt file gt EXAMPLES fixmod dt fixmod dt u Displays the options function and command syntax of fixmod Updates an invalid module CRC or parity Changes the module s attribute revision level Fixes the sys rev field in BASIC packed subroutine modules Sets the module access permissions to lt perm gt lt perm gt must be specified in hexadecimal Sets the module owner s group user number to lt g gt lt Uu gt Only the super user is allowed to use this option Looks for the module in the execution directory Reads the module names from standard input Reads the module names from lt file gt Checks parity and CRC for module dt Checks parity and CRC for module dt and updates them if necessary SEE ALSO Refer to the OS 9 Technical Manual for more information concerning CRC and parity For a full explanation of module header fields see the ident utility Using Professional OS 9 49 format The OS 9 Utilities format Initialize Disk Media SYNTAX FUNCTION format
74. the copy procedure For example if you are copying large C programs you may want to increase the memory allocation to speed up the process You could allocate the additional memory on the cfp com mand line cfp s copy b100 progms c misc junk c Using Professional OS 9 5 25 Creating a Temporary Procedure File The Shell You can use the z and z lt file gt options to read the file names from either standard input or a file The Z option is used to read the file names from standard input For example if you have a procedure file called count em that contains the command count and you want to count the lines in each program to see how large the programs are before you copy them you could type the following command line cfp z count em The command line prompt does not appear because the cfp utility is waiting for input Type in the file names on separate command lines For example cfp z count em progms c mise junk c When you have finished typing the file names press the carriage return a second time to get the shell prompt If you have a file containing a list of the files that you want copied you could type cfp z files s copy For more information read the cfp utility discussion in the OS 9 Utilities section 5 26 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Multiple Shells Multiple Shells Like all OS 9 utilities the shell can be simultaneously executed by more tha
75. the device is already attached If the device is not already attached an initialization routine is called to link the device to the system If the device is already attached it is not re initialized but the link count is incremented The device names may be listed on the command line read from standard input or read from a specified pathlist NOTE Do not iniz non sharable device modules as they become busy forever OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of iniz Z Reads the device names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the device names from lt file gt EXAMPLES iniz h0 term Increments the link counts of modules hO and term iniz z Increments the link count of any modules with names read from standard input iniz z h0 file Increments the link count of all modules whose names are supplied in hO file Using Professional OS 9 67 irqs The OS 9 Utilities irqs Display System s IRQ Polling Table SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTION irqs irqs displays a list of the system s IRQ polling table The IRQ polling table contains a list of the service routines for each interrupt handler known by the system The irqs display header lists the system name the OS 9 version number the maximum number of devices allowed in the device table and the maximum number of entries in the IRQ table Each line in the irqs display contains seven fields vector Exception vector num
76. the directory names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the directory names from lt file gt EXAMPLES The first example displays the current data directory dir Directory of 12 12 54 BK BKII RELS ed10 c ed11 c ed2 c In the second example the parent of the working data directory is displayed dir This example displays the NEWSTUFF directory dir NEWSTUFF 32 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities dir The next example displays the entire description of the current data directory dir e Directory of 13 54 44 Owner Last modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 1 78 90 11 28 0357 d ewrewr 383C8 160 NOTES 1 78 90 11 28 0357 d ewrewr 383E8 608 PROGRAMS 1 78 90 11 28 0357 d ewrewr 383D8 160 TEXT 1 78 90 11 14 0841 wr F4058 438 arrayex c 1 78 90 11 12 0859 wr F4068 538 arrayex r 1 78 90 11 09 0852 wr F2ABO 312 asciiinfo 0 0 90 04 27 1719 r wr 71EC8 4626 atari doc 1 78 90 11 14 0911 wr B4548 636 bobble c 1 78 90 11 14 0910 wr B4AA8 815 bobble r 1 78 90 10 18 1259 wr BD418 619 cd order 1 78 90 06 06 1009 wr wr 82B8 5420 cdichanges 1 78 90 11 28 1102 wr E0C68 1478 checks c 1 78 90 11 28 1102 wr E1D08 1075 checks r 1 78 90 09 07 0848 wr 708B8 274 datafile 0 78 90 04 12 1206 wr wr 70EE8 1065 drvr a 1 78 90 11 13 1544 wr B1650 112 exloop To display the execution directory type dir x To display the entire description of the execut
77. the following shell environment variables Pro grams can examine these environment variables to determine various characteristics of the user s environment Name Description 76 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities login HOME Initial data directory pathlist SHELL Name of the initial program executed USER User name PATH Login process initial execution directory If a period is specified PATH is not set NOTE Environment variables are case sensitive To show how login uses the password file to set up environment variables examine the previous sample password file Assume login s data and execution directories are hO and h0 CMDS respectively logging in as mean_joe executes a shell with the data directory of nO Joe and the execution directory of n0 CMDS Joe The environment variables passed to the shell are set as follows HOME h0 Joe SHELL shell USER mean_joe PATH H0 Cmds OPTION Displays the function and command syntax of login Using Professional OS 9 77 logout The OS 9 Utilities logout Timesharing System Logout SYNTAX FUNCTION EXAMPLE logout logout terminates the current shell If the shell to terminate is the login shell logout executes the logout procedure file before terminating the shell To terminate the current shell type logout and a carriage return This terminates the current shell in the same manner as an end of file character with one
78. the new shell is exited the original shell will prompt As you can see the two methods accomplish the same function They are both provided for your convenience You should use the method that is clearer to you 5 2 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell The Shell Environment The Shell Environment The shell maintains a unique list of environment variables for each user on an OS 9 system These variables affect the operation of the shell or other programs subsequently executed and can be set according to your preference You can access all environment variables by any process called by the environment s shell or by descendant shells This essentially allows you to use the environment variables as global variables If a subsequent shell redefines an environment variable the variable is only redefined for that shell and its descendents The environment variable is not redefined for the parent shell Four environment variables are automatically set up when you log on to a time sharing system Variable Description PORT This specifies the name of the terminal An example of a valid name is t1 PORT is automatically set up by the tsmon utility HOME This specifies your home directory The home directory is specified in your pass word file entry and is your current data directory when you first log on the system This is also the directory used when the command chd with no parameters is exe cuted SHELL This i
79. the size of the file Figure 4d The next write operation adds a new component to the file and moves the file pointer to the new end of file 4 2 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System OS 9 File Storage Reading up to the last byte of the file causes the next read operation to return an end of file status see Figure 4c Trying to read past the end of file mark causes an error To expand a file simply write past the previous end of the file see Figure 4d Because all OS 9 files have the same physical organization you can generally use file manipulation utilities on any file regardless of its logical usage The main logical types of files used by OS 9 are e Text files e Executable program module files e Data files e Directories Directory files are an exception and are discussed separately Text Files Text files contain variable length lines of ASCII characters Each line is terminated by a carriage return hex OD Text files typically contain documentation procedure files program source code etc You can create text files with any text editor or the build utility Executable Program Module Files Executable program modules store programs generated by assemblers and compilers Each file may con tain one or more modules with standard OS 9 module format See the OS 9 Technical Manual for more information on modules Random Access Data Files A random access data file is created
80. the type of terminal being used TERM allows word processors screen editors and other screen dependent programs to know what type of terminal configuration to use NOTE Environment variables are case sensitive OS 9 does not recognize a variable if you do not use the proper case Changing the Shell Environment Three utility programs are available to use with environment variables setenv unsetenv and printenv setenv Declares the variable and sets the value of the variable unsetenv Clears the value and removes the variable from storage printenv Prints the variables and their values to standard output setenv declares the variable and sets its value The variable is put in an environment storage area accessed by the shell For example setenv PATH h0 cmds d0 cmds dd emds setenv sh 0 These variables are only known to the shell in which they are defined and any descendant processes from that shell This command does not change the environment of the parent process of the shell which issued setenv 5 4 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell The Shell Environment unsetenv clears the value of the variable and removes it from storage For example unsetenv PATH unsetenv _sh printenv prints the variables and their values to standard output For example printenv PATH h0 cmds d0 cmds dd cmds PROMPT howdy _sh 0 These three commands are described in the OS 9 Utilities section Using
81. time of the creation of new files The clock must be running for multi tasking to take place The clock may be started by the Init module refer to the chapter on OS 9 system management for more information If it is not started and you have a system with a battery backed clock type the following command to start the system clock setime s Otherwise execute setime by typing setime setime prompts with the following yy mm dd hh mm ss am pm Time At the prompt enter the year month day hour minutes seconds and optionally am or pm Unless am or pm is specified setime uses the 24 hour clock For example 15 20 is the same as 3 20 pm The input is one or two digit numbers with a space colon semicolon comma or slash used as a field delimiter If a semicolon is used the entire date string must be within quotes For example to set the time on May 14 1991 at 1 24 pm type 91 5 14 1 24 pm or 910514124 pm or 91 5 14 13 24 or 91 5 14 13 24 or 91 5 14 13 24 or 9135314313324 To find out if the system clock is running or if the date and time was set correctly use the date command For example date July 2 1990 Monday 1 25 26pm Once the time and date have been properly set the system displays the following prompt The prompt means the operating system is active and waiting for you to enter a command line This prompt is the default system prompt This manual uses the prompt for all examples For informatio
82. tmode touch tr unsetenv Group 3 System Management Utilities break dcheck deiniz devs diskcache events fixmod ident iniz irqs link login mdir moded os9gen romseplit setpr sleep tapegen tsmon unlink xmode Using Professional OS 9 The Help Utility and the Option Basic Commands and Functions The Help Utility and the Option The most important command to learn when beginning to use the OS 9 utilities is help The help utility is an on line quick reference manual To use this utility type help a utility name and a carriage return The utility function syntax and available options are listed For example if you cannot remember the function or syntax of the backup utility you could type help backup after the prompt help backup Syntax backup lt opts gt lt srcpath gt lt dstpath gt lt opts gt Function backup disks Options b lt size gt use larger buffer default is 4k r don t exit if read error occurs V do not verify The descriptions are short and precise Try it This is a quick way to find information without looking up the utility in the documentation Typing help by itself displays the syntax and use of the help utility The same information is also available by typing the utility name followed by a question mark Each utility has the option 3 8 Using Professional OS 9 Basic Commands and Functions Free and Mfree Free and Mfree During the format proc
83. to change the terminal s operating characteristics The change remains in effect until the path is closed To effect a permanent change to a device characteristic you must change the device descriptor You may alter the device descriptor to set a device s initial operating parameters using the xmode utility 8 28 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Using the Tmode and Xmode Utilities Five parameters need driver support in order to be changed by tmode type par cs stop and baud If you try to change these parameters without driver support tmode has no effect The tmode parameters are documented in the OS 9 Utilities section Using the Xmode Utility To use the xmode utility type xmode and any parameter s to change If you give no parameters the present values for each parameter are displayed Otherwise the parameter s given on the command line are processed You can give any number of parameters on a command line Use spaces or commas to separate each parameter You must specify a device name if the given parameter s are to be processed Like tmode if a parameter is set to zero the device no longer uses the parameter until it is re set to a rec ognizable code To re set the values of parameters to their default specify the parameter with no value This re sets the parameter to the default value as given in this manual Five parameters require further explanation type par cS stop and baud xmode changes the
84. to the allocation map stored on the disk Any differences are reported in messages Sector xxxxxx byte nn bit n not in file structure Sector xxxxxx byte nn bit n not in bit map The first message indicates sector number XXXXXX was not found as part of the file system but is marked as allocated in the disk s allocation map In addition to the causes previously mentioned some sectors may have been excluded from the allocation map by the format program because they were defective They could be the last sectors of the disk whose sum is too small to comprise a cluster The second message indicates that the cluster starting at sector XXXXXX is part of the file structure but is not marked as allocated in the disk s allocation map This type of disk error could cause problems later It is possible that this cluster may later be allocated to another file This would overwrite the current contents of the cluster with data from the newly allocated file All current data located in this cluster would be lost Any clusters reported as previously allocated by dcheck have this problem Repairing the Bitmap dcheck is capable of repairing two types of disk problems using the r and the y options If a cluster was found in the file structure but not in the bitmap the bit may be turned on in the bitmap to include the cluster If the cluster was marked in the bitmap but not in the file structure the bit in the bitmap may be turned off WARNING Do no
85. utility 8 24 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Test Booting from the Hard Disk The OS9Boot file is distributed with your system software An OS9Boot h0 bootfile may also be includ ed The only difference between these files is the default system device name string in the Init module OS9Boot refers to d0 while OS9Boot h0O refers to h0 Assuming that these files have been copied on to the hard disk do the following to make the hard disk bootable Change your current data directory to h0 chd hO Rename OS9Boot to retain a copy to use with a floppy system rename OS9Boot OS9Boot d0 Make the hard disk bootable with the correct bootfile NOTE You must specify hOfmt as the device os9gen h0fmt OS9Boot h0 Test Booting from the Hard Disk Once you have completed the above steps test that the system actually boots from the hard disk If the system fails to boot correctly reboot the system Carefully examine the results of the actions previously described Using Professional OS 9 8 25 Managing Processes in a Real time Environment OS 9 System Management Managing Processes in a Real time Environment The ability to manage processes in a real time environment is one of OS 9 s advantages OS 9 has three main methods by which system managers can manage processes in a real time environment e Manipulating process priority e Using D_MinPty and D_MaxAge to alter the system s process sch
86. utility type make followed by the name of the file s to be created and any options desired make processes the makefile three times During the first pass make examines the makefile and sets up a table of dependencies This table of dependencies stores the target file and the dependency files exactly as they are listed in the makefile When make encounters a name on the left side of a colon it first checks to see if it has encountered the name before If it has make connects the lists and continues After reading the makefile make determines the target file on the list It then makes a second pass through the dependency table During this pass make tries to resolve any existing implicit dependencies Implicit dependencies are discussed below make does a third pass through the list to get and compare the file dates When make finds a file in a dependency list that is newer than its target file it executes the specified command s If no command entry is specified make generates a command based on the assumptions given in the next section Because OS 9 only stores the time down to the closest minute make re makes a file if its date matches one of its dependents When a command is executed it is echoed to standard output make normally stops if an error code is returned when a command line is executed To understand the relationship of the target file its dependents and the commands necessary to update the target file the s
87. verbose f Reads the makefile from standard input f lt path gt Specifies lt path gt as the makefile If lt path gt is specified as a hyphen make commands are read from standard input i Ignores errors N Does not execute commands but does display them S Silent Mode executes commands without echo t Updates the dates without executing commands u Does the make regardless of the dates on files X Uses the cross compiler assembler Z Reads a list of make targets from standard input z lt path gt Reads a list of make targets from lt path gt Examples of the Make Utility The rest of this chapter is designed to show you different ways to maintain programs with make These examples are not meant to be totally inclusive of the ways in which make can be used Using Professional OS 9 6 7 Example One Updating a Document Making Files Example One Updating a Document The following example shows how make can be used to maintain current documentation that is made up of different sections utils man chap1 chap2 apdx del utils man old rename utils man utils man old merge chap1 chap2 apdx gt utils man chap1 cla clb cle cld del chap1 old rename chap1 chap1 old list cla clb cle cld Ixfilter gt chap1 chap2 c2a c2b c2c del chap2 old rename chap2 chap2 old list cla clb cle cld Ixfilter gt chap1 apdx functions header footer del apdx old rename apdx apdx old qsort functions gt pipe func list h
88. wait built in shell command a W waits for a child process to be executed to finish wait waits for all child processes running in the background to finish REMINDER A child process is a process that the current shell or a child of the shell is executing For example if a document needs to be created from three different files and each file has to be sorted by different fields the following procedure files can be used to create the same result start of first procedure file qsort f 1 file1 amp qsort f 2 file2 amp qsort f 3 file3 amp wait merge file1 file2 file3 gt report start of second procedure file qsort f 1 file1 qsort f 2 file2 qsort f 3 file3 merge file1 file2 file3 gt report The first procedure file is much quicker because each of the files are processed concurrently 5 30 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Stopping Procedures Stopping Procedures You can use two methods to stop a procedure The first method involves the lt control gt C or lt control gt E signals The second method uses the kill utility The shell handles these keyboard generated signals in the following manner If either of these signals are received while the shell is waiting for keyboard input the following messages are issued Read I O error Error 000 002 E typed Read I O error Error 000 003 C typed These are the standard messages given whenever an I O error occurs when reading command
89. with programs that use Cstart Macro Recognition make recognizes a macro by the dollar sign character in front of the name If a macro name is longer than a single character the entire name must be surrounded by parentheses For example R refers to the macro R PFLAGS refers to the macro PFLAGS B and B refer to the macro B and BR is interpreted as the value for the macro B followed by the character R Macros may be placed in the makefile for convenience or on the command line for flexibility Everywhere the macro name appears the expansion is substituted for it Macros are allowed in the form of lt macro name gt lt expansion gt NOTE Ifa macro is defined in your makefile and then redefined on the command line the command line definition overrides the definition in the makefile This feature is useful for compiling with special options Using Professional OS 9 83 make The OS 9 Utilities In order for make to be more flexible you can define special macros in the makefile make uses these macros when assumptions must be made in generating command lines or searching for unspecified files For example if no source file is specified for pro gram r make searches the specified directory SDIR or for program a or c p f make recognizes the following special macros Macro Definition ODIR lt path gt SDIR lt path gt RDIR lt path gt CFLAGS lt opts gt RFLAGS lt opts
90. with several dependencies In practice these reserved macros are wildcards with the following meanings Macro Definition Expands to the name of the file made by the command Expands to the prefix of the file made Expands to the list of files found to be newer than the target on a given dependency line Make Generated Command Lines make is capable of generating three types of command lines b Compiler Command Lines These are generated if a source file with a suffix of c f or p needs to be recompiled The compiler command line generated by make has the following syntax CC CFLAGS r RDIR SDIR lt file gt c f or p Assembler Command Lines These are generated if an assembly language source file needs to be re assembled The assembler command line gener ated by make has the following syntax RC RFLAGS SDIR lt file gt a o RDIR lt file gt r Linker Command Lines These are generated if an object file needs to be relinked in order to re make the program module The linker command line generated by make has the following syntax LC LFLAGS RDIR lt file gt r f ODIR lt file gt WARNING When make is generating a command line for the linker it looks at its list and uses the first relocatable file it finds but only the first one For example prog xr y r zr would generate ce xr NOt ce xr y r z r OF cc prog r Using Professional OS 9 85
91. working directory is the root directory of the disk dsave creates a file that backups the entire disk file by file This is useful when you need to copy many files from different format disks or from a floppy disk or a hard disk If an error occurs during the dsave process the following prompt is displayed continue y n a q A y indicates that you wish to continue with dsave An n indicates that you do not wish to continue with dsave An a indicates that all possible files should be copied and the prompt should not be displayed on error A q indicates that you want to exit the dsave procedure If for any reason you do not wish to be bothered by the prompt the S option is available This skips any file which cannot be copied and continues the dsave routine without the error prompt 4 24 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Del and Deldir Deleting Files and Directories When you copy several subdirectories you can use the i option to indent for directory levels This helps to keep track of which files are located in which directories You can use dsave to keep current directory backups Use the d or d lt date gt options to compare the date of the file to be copied with a file of the same name in the directory where it is to be copied The d option copies any file with a more recent date The d lt date gt option copies any file with a date more recent than that specified The following example shows the use of dSave
92. 1 81 121 51 Q 1010010 82 122 52 R 1010011 83 123 53 S 1010100 84 124 54 T 1010101 85 125 55 U Using Professional OS 9 A 3 ASCII Conversion Chart ASCII Conversion Chart Binary Decimal Octal Hex ASCII 1010110 86 126 56 V 1010111 87 127 57 W 1011000 88 130 58 X 1011001 89 131 59 Y 1011010 90 132 5A Z 1011011 91 133 5B 1011100 92 134 5C 1011101 93 135 5D 1011110 94 136 5E i 1011111 95 137 5F 1100000 96 140 60 1100001 97 141 61 a 1100010 98 142 62 b 1100011 99 143 63 c 1100100 100 144 64 d 1100101 101 145 65 e 1100110 102 146 66 f 1100111 103 147 67 g 1101000 104 150 68 h 1101001 105 151 69 i 1101010 106 152 6A j 1101011 107 153 6B k 1101100 108 154 6C l 1101101 109 155 6D m 1101110 110 156 6E n 1101111 111 157 6F o 1110000 112 160 70 p 1110001 113 161 71 q 1110010 114 162 72 r 1110011 115 163 73 S 1110100 116 164 74 t 1110101 117 165 75 u 1110110 118 166 76 v 1110111 119 167 77 Ww 1111000 120 170 78 X 1111001 121 171 79 y 1111010 122 172 7A Z 1111011 123 173 7B 1111100 124 174 7C 1111101 125 175 7D 1111110 126 176 7E S 1111111 127 177 7F DEL A 4 Using Professional OS 9 B The ROM Debugger This appendix documents the debug version of the ROM debugger A new ROM debugger RomBug is also available RomBug is documented in the OS 9 ROM Debugger s User s Manual The ROM Debugger The ROM debugger is an optional part of the Professional OS 9 package The ROM debugger is not a conven
93. 3 3 45 pm Same as above setime s For systems with a battery backup clock setime No parameters are specified therefore a yy mm dd hh mm ss am pm prompt is given Time 114 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities setpr setpr Set Process CPU Priority SYNTAX _ setpr lt procID gt lt number gt FUNCTION _ setpr changes the CPU priority of a process To use setpr type setpr the process ID and the new priority number of the process to change setpr may only be used with a process having your ID The priority number is a decimal number in the range of 1 lowest to 65535 hex FFFF Use procs to obtain the ID number and present priority of any current process NOTE This command does not appear in the CMDS directory as it is a built in shell command EXAMPLE _ setpr 8 250 Changes the priority of process number 8 to 250 Using Professional OS 9 115 shell The OS 9 Utilities shell OS 9 Command Interpreter SYNTAX FUNCTION shell set lt arglist gt shell is OS 9 s command interpreter program It reads data from its standard input which is usually the keyboard or a file and interprets the data as a sequence of com mands The basic function of shell is to initiate and control execution of other OS 9 programs Usually you enter the shell automatically upon logging into OS 9 The shell displays a dollar sign prompt to show that it is ready and waiting for a command line You can create a
94. 6 Setpr utility 5 6 Unsetenv utility 5 4 5 6 W utility 5 6 5 30 Wait utility 5 6 5 30 Using Professional OS 9 Index Index Cfp utility 5 25 5 26 Chd utility 4 7 4 13 4 14 5 3 5 6 5 8 Chx utility 4 13 4 14 5 6 5 8 Command interpreter 3 3 Command line 3 3 5 7 Concurrent execution 5 9 5 15 Execution modifiers 5 7 5 12 Function 3 3 Grouping 5 19 Keyword 5 7 5 8 Parameters 5 7 5 8 Processing 5 7 5 8 5 16 Separators 5 7 5 9 5 14 Sequential execution 5 9 5 15 Wildcards 5 9 5 13 5 14 Command separators 5 7 5 9 5 14 Concurrent execution 5 9 5 15 CONFIG macro 8 2 8 10 Control keys 3 5 3 6 Copy a file 4 20 4 25 Copy utility 4 20 4 22 Dsave utility 4 22 4 25 Copy utility 4 20 4 22 Current data directory 4 7 4 9 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 16 Current execution directory 4 7 4 9 4 12 4 13 4 14 Data files 4 3 Date utility 2 2 Decimal conversion chart Apdx A Default device descriptor 8 20 Deiniz utility 8 19 Del utility 4 25 4 26 Deldir utility 4 25 4 26 Delete a file directory 4 25 4 26 Destination disk 2 5 Dir utility 4 11 4 13 D continued Directory Accessing 4 9 4 15 Attributes 4 8 4 18 4 19 Changing 4 14 5 3 Characteristics 4 8 Creating 4 16 Current data 4 7 4 9 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 16 Current execution 4 7 4 9 4 12 4 13 4 14 Deldir utility 4 25 4 26 Deleting 4 25 4 26 Dir utility 4 11 4 13 Displaying 4 11 4 13 Extended listing 4 12 Function 1 3 4 1 H
95. 9 Utilities 148 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities NOTES Using Professional OS 9 149 NOTES The OS 9 Utilities 150 Using Professional OS 9 A ASCII Conversion Chart ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange It consists of 96 printable and 32 unprintable characters The following conversion table includes Binary Decimal Octal Hexadecimal and ASCII The unprintable characters are defined below ASCII Symbol Definitions Symbol Definition Symbol Definition ACK acknowledge FS file separator BEL bell GS group separator BS backspace HT horizontal tabulation CAN cancel LF line feed CR carriage return NAK negative acknowledgement DC device control NUL null DEL delete RS record shipment DLE data link escape SI shift in EM end of medium SO shift out ENQ enquiry SOH start of heading EOT end of transmission SP space ESC escape STX start of text ETB end of transmission SUB substitute ETX end of text SYN synchronous idle FF form feed US unit separator VT vertical tabulation Using Professional OS 9 ASCII Conversion Chart ASCII Conversion Chart Binary Decimal Octal Hex ASCII 0000000 0 0 0 NUL 0000001 1 1 1 SOH 0000010 2 2 2 STX 0000011 3 3 3 ETX 0000100 4 4 4 EOT 0000101 5 5 5 ENQ 0000110 6 6 6 ACK 0000111 7 7 7 BEL 0001000 8 10 8 BS 0001001 9 11 9 HT 0001010 10 12 A LF 0001011 11 13 B VT 0001100 12 14 C FF 0001101 13 15 D CR 0001110 14 16 E
96. Displays the options function and command syntax of tsmon d Displays statistics when a character control backslash or hex 1C is typed on a monitored terminal 140 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tsmon EXAMPLES l lt prog gt Forks lt prog gt an alternate login program p Displays an online prompt to each timesharing terminal being moni tored by tsmon r lt prog gt Forks an alternate shell program Z Reads the device names from standard input z lt path gt Reads the device names from lt path gt This command starts timesharing on term and t1 printing a welcome message to each A similar command might be used as the last line of a system startup file tsmon dp term t1 amp 2 devices online confirmation by tsmon The d option causes tsmon to print various statistics about the devices being moni tored whenever control backslash is typed on either terminal The statistics might look something like this tsmon started 12 11 90 20 38 15 with 2 devices 0 36 06 term quiet at 0 08 07 cumulative time 3 29 30 logins 1 9 t1 quiet at 0 36 03 cumulative time 3 57 46 logins 2 4 NOTE The standard input device shown for tsmon by the procs utility always indicates the last device to gain tsmon s attention You must implement the SS_SSig I SetStat function send signal on data ready on any device to be monitored by tsmon Because this function is used for example in
97. If more than one path is specified the first path is copied to standard output the second path is copied next etc Each path is copied to standard output in the order specified on the command line list is most commonly used to examine or print text files Displays the options function and command syntax of list Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt To redirect the startup listing to the printer and place the entire command in the back ground enter list d0 startup gt P amp The following example lists text from files to standard output in the same order as the command line list D1 user5 document d0 myfile d0 Bob text To list all files in the current data directory enter list The following example reads the name s of the file s to list from namefile and lists their contents list z namefile 72 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities load load Load Module s from File into Memory SYNTAX load lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION load loads one or more modules specified by lt path gt into memory Unless a full pathlist is specified lt path gt is relative to your current execution directory Consequently if the module to load is in your execution directory you only need to enter its name load lt file gt If lt file gt is not in your execution directory and if the shell environment variable PATH is de
98. Individual pipes are created for each exclamation point present For example update lt master_file sort write_report gt p In this example the input for the program update is redirected from master_file update s standard out put becomes the standard input for the program sort sort s output in turn becomes the standard input for the program write_report write_report s standard output is redirected to the printer Named Pipes Named pipes are similar to un named pipes with one exception a named pipe works as a holding buffer that can be opened by another process at a different time Create named pipes by re directing output to pipe lt file gt where lt file gt is any legal OS 9 file name For example list letters gt pipe letters The output from the list command is redirected into a named pipe pipe letters The information remains in the pipe until it is listed copied deleted or used in some other manner merge this that gt pipe these G pipe these The output from the merge command is redirected to the named pipe pipe these pipe these remains open until the contents are used in some way In this example another user could later grep for a word in the file pipe these grep newone pipe these nc Once the file has been used the named pipe is deleted pipe these grep newone pipe thse nc Using Professional OS 9 5 17 Shell Command Line Processing The Shell
99. M allows memory protection The SSM uses the mem ory management unit MMU hardware to grant and deny users permission to access memory 8 8 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Changing System Modules Changing System Modules The provided system modules are configured to satisfy the needs of the majority of users However you may wish to alter the existing modules or create new modules You can make new system modules and alterations to existing system modules by either using the moded utility or changing the defaults in the systype d file The system modules most commonly altered are the device descriptors and the Init module Using the Moded Utility Use the moded utility to edit individual fields of certain types of OS 9 modules You can change the Init module and any OS 9 device descriptor modules with moded To use the moded utility type moded the name of the desired device descriptor and any options The moded prompt shows that the editor s command mode has been entered When moded is invoked it attempts to read the moded fields file moded fields contains module field information for each type of module to edit Without this file moded cannot function The provided moded fields file comes with module descriptions for standard RBF SBF SCF PIPE NETWORK UCM and GFM module descriptors It also includes a description for the Init module To edit the current module use the e command If there is no curre
100. Modifiers Redirection modifiers redirect the program s standard I O paths to alternate files or devices Usually pro grams do not use specific file or device names This makes the redirection of standard I O to any file or device fairly simple without altering the program Programs which normally receive input from a terminal or send output to a terminal use one or more of these standard I O paths Standard Input Path Normally passes data from a terminal s keyboard to a program e Standard Output Path Normally passes output data from a program to a terminal s display e Standard Error Path Can be used for either input or output depending on the nature of the program using it This path is commonly used to output routine status messages such as prompts and errors to the terminal s display By default the standard error path uses the same device as the standard output path A new process can only be created by an existing process The new process is known as the child process The process that created the child process is known as the parent process Each child process inherits the parent process s standard I O paths When the shell creates a new process it inherits the shell s standard I O paths Upon startup or logging in the shell s standard input is the terminal keyboard The standard output and standard error are directed to the terminal s display Consequently the child s standard input is the terminal keyboard
101. O misc my_dates is used as the backup log file fsave l 2 d mt1 m h0 misc my_dates The next command specifies a level 0 backup of all files owned by the super user in the CMDS directory assuming CMDS is in your current directory d2 is the target device used for this backup The backup log file used is nO sys backup_ dates The mount volume prompt is not generated for the first volume and a 32K buffer is used to read the files from the CMDS directory fsave pb 32 g 0 u 0 d d2 CMDS 60 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities grep grep Search a File for a Pattern SYNTAX grep lt opts gt lt expression gt lt path gt FUNCTION grep searches the input pathlist s for lines matching lt expression gt To use the grep utility type grep the expression to search for and the pathlist of the file to search If no lt path gt is specified grep searches standard input If grep finds a line that matches lt expression gt the line is written to the standard output with an optional line number of where it is located within the file When multiple files are searched the output has the name of the file preceding the occurrence of the matched expression Expressions An lt expression gt is used to specify a set of characters A string which is a member of this set is said to match the expression To facilitate the creation of expressions some metacharacters are defined to create complex sets of ch
102. OPTIONS EXAMPLE deiniz lt opts gt lt modname gt When a device is no longer needed use deiniz to remove the device from the system device table deiniz uses the I Detach system call to accomplish this Information concerning I Detach is located in the OS 9 Technical Manual To remove a device from the system device table type deiniz followed by the name of the module s to detach lt modname gt may begin with a slash The module names may be read from standard input or from a specified pathlist if the Z option is used WARNING Do not deiniz a module unless you have explicitly iniz ed it If you do deiniz a device that you have not iniz ed you could cause problems for other users who may be using the module Displays the options function and command syntax of deiniz Z Reads the module names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the module names from lt file gt deiniz t1 t2 t3 26 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities del del Delete a File SYNTAX del lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION del deletes the file s specified by the pathlist s You must have write permission for the file s to be deleted You cannot delete directory files with this utility unless their attribute is changed to non directory OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of del Erases the disk space that the file occupied f Delete files with no write permission p
103. Procs set 64 initial process table size divisible by 64 Paths set 64 initial path table size divisible by 64 Slice set2 ticks per time slice SysPri set 128 initial system priority For more information on the Init module see the OS 9 Technical Manual Using Professional OS 9 8 7 Customization Modules OS 9 System Management Customization Modules Customization modules can be attached to OS 9 during the system s cold start procedure to increase OS 9 s functionality and to allow hardware customization such as special bus arbitration modes While customization modules extend its capabilities OS 9 itself is not changed NOTE A customization module may only alter the dO d1 and ccr registers In the Init module the M Extens offset points to a list of module names By default the name of the list is OS9P2 If the modules are found during cold start they are called If an error is returned the system stops Two of these modules are listed here e Syscache The syscache module allows the system to enable and control any hardware caches present The default syscache module supplied by Microware controls the on chip cache s for the 68020 and 68030 You can customize this module to take advantage of any external off chip cache hardware the system may have The syscache module installs the F CCtl system call routines If the syscache module is not installed no system caching takes place e SSM The system security module SS
104. Professional OS 9 143 xmode The OS 9 Utilities Examine or Change Device Initialization Mode SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS xmode lt opts gt lt devname gt lt arglist gt lt devname gt xmode displays or changes the initialization parameters of any SCF type device such as a video display printer RS 232 port etc Some common uses are to change the baud rates and control key definitions NOTE xmode can only be used for SCF or GFM devices To use the xmode utility type xmode and any parameters to change If no parameters are given the present values for each parameter are displayed Otherwise the param eter s given in the parameter list are processed You can give any number of parame ters separated by spaces or commas You must specify a device name to process the parameter s given in the parameter list If a parameter is set to zero the device no longer uses the parameter until it is re set to a recognizable code For example set xon and xoff to zero xmode term xon 0 xoff 0 term will not recognize xon and xoff until the values are re set To re set the values of a parameter to its default type xmode and specify the parameter with no value This re sets the parameter to the default value given in this manual xmode is similar to the tmode utility tmode only operates on open paths so it has a temporary effect xmode actually updates the device descriptor The change persists as long as the comput
105. Prompts for each file to be deleted with the following prompt delete lt filename gt y n a q y yes N no a delete all specified files without further prompts q quit the deleting process X Looks for the file in the current execution directory Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES These examples use the following directory structure dir Directory of D1 14 29 46 junk myfile newfile number five old_test_program test_program del newfile Deletes newfile del _ Deletes all files in the current data directory with an underscore character in their name After executing the preceding two examples the directory has the following files dir Directory of D1 14 30 37 junk myfile To delete all files in the current directory type dir u del z SEE ALSO The attr and deldir utility descriptions Using Professional OS 9 27 deldir The OS 9 Utilities deldir Delete All Files in a Directory SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS deldir lt opts gt lt path gt deldir deletes directories and the files they contain one file at a time deldir is only used to delete all files in the directory When deldir is run it prints a prompt message deldir OLDFILES Deleting directory OLDFILES Delete List or Quit d l or q A d response initiates the process of deleting files An response causes dir e to run so y
106. RAM disks In many system configurations a RAM disk is used as the default system device When the RAM disk is used as the default system device it is known as device dd instead of rO The name of the device descrip tor is dd rO Using this descriptor allows compilers to use the RAM disk as a fast access device for tem porary files etc The RAM disk is usually initialized at startup with definition and library files if it is to be used as the default system device The init ramdisk procedure file provided in the root directory ac complishes this 4 RAM disks may be volatile or non volatile A volatile RAM disk disappears when the sys tem is reset or the power is shut off A non volatile RAM disk resides in a place such as battery backed up RAM and does not disappear when the system is reset or powered down Volatile RAM disks may be allocated memory either from free system memory or from outside free sys tem memory The number of volatile RAM disks allocated from free system memory is governed by the port address There can be up to 1024 different disks with each disk having a unique address from 0 to 1023 Volatile RAM disks not allocated from the free system memory must not be part of the system memory list and they must have a port address greater than or equal to 1024 This port address indicates the actual start address of the RAM disk A non volatile RAM disk may not be located in any memory search list known to t
107. SO 0001111 15 17 F SI 0010000 16 20 10 DLE 0010001 17 21 11 DC1 0010010 18 22 12 DC2 0010011 19 23 13 DC3 0010100 20 24 14 DC4 0010101 21 25 15 NAK 0010110 22 26 16 SYN 0010111 23 27 17 ETB 0011000 24 30 18 CAN 0011001 25 31 19 EM 0011010 26 32 1A SUB 0011011 27 33 1B ESC 0011100 28 34 1C FS 0011101 29 35 1D GS 0011110 30 36 1E RS 0011111 31 37 1F US 0100000 32 40 20 SP 0100001 33 41 21 0100010 34 42 22 i 0100011 35 43 23 0100100 36 44 24 0100101 37 45 25 0100110 38 46 26 amp 0100111 39 47 27 0101000 40 50 28 0101001 41 51 29 0101010 42 52 2A 3 Using Professional OS 9 ASCII Conversion Chart ASCII Conversion Chart Binary Decimal Octal Hex ASCII 0101011 43 53 2B 0101100 44 54 2C 0101101 45 55 2D 0101110 46 56 2E 0101111 47 57 2F 0110000 48 60 30 0 0110001 49 61 31 1 0110010 50 62 32 2 0110011 51 63 33 3 0110100 52 64 34 4 0110101 53 65 35 5 0110110 54 66 36 6 0110111 55 67 37 7 0111000 56 70 38 8 0111001 57 71 39 9 0111010 58 72 3A 0111011 59 73 3B 0111100 60 74 3C lt 0111101 61 75 3D 0111110 62 76 3E gt 0111111 63 77 3F 1000000 64 100 40 1000001 65 101 41 A 1000010 66 102 42 B 1000011 67 103 43 C 1000100 68 104 44 D 1000101 69 105 45 E 1000110 70 106 46 F 1000111 71 107 47 G 1001000 72 110 48 H 1001001 73 111 49 l 1001010 74 112 4A J 1001011 75 113 4B K 1001100 76 114 4C L 1001101 77 115 4D M 1001110 78 116 4E N 1001111 79 117 4F O 1010000 80 120 50 P 101000
108. TIONS Print Files pr lt opts gt lt path gt pr produces a formatted listing of one or more files to the standard output To use the pr utility type pr and the pathlist s of the files to list The listing is sepa rated into pages Each page has the page number the name of the listing and the date and time printed at the top pr can produce multi column output When printing multiple output columns with the M option if an output line exceeds the column width the output line is truncated pr can also print files simultaneously one per column If no files are specified on the command line and the Z option is used standard input is assumed to be a list of file names one file name per input line to print out If no files are specified on the command line and the zZ option is not used standard input is displayed on standard output Files and options may be intermixed A typical page of output consists of 66 lines of output Consequently pr uses the following default parameters 61 lines of output with 5 blank lines as a trailer The 61 lines of output contain one line for the title 5 blank lines for a header and 55 lines of text The trailer can be reduced or eliminated by expanding the number of lines per page An equal sign in an option specification is optional Displays the options function and command syntax of pr c lt char gt Uses lt char gt as the specified column separator A lt Space gt is
109. USING PROFESSIONAL OS 9 COPYRIGHT AND REVISION HISTORY Copyright 1991 Microware Systems Corporation All Rights Reserved Reproduction of this document in part or whole by any means electrical mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise is prohibited without written permission from Microware Systems Corporation This manual reflects Version 2 4 of the OS 9 operating system Publication Editor Walden Miller Kathie Flood Ellen Grant Revision D Publication date March 1991 Product Number UPR 68 NA 68 MO DISCLAIMER The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication However Microware will not be liable for any damages including indirect or consequential from use of the OS 9 operating system Microware provided software or reliance on the accuracy of this documentation The information contained herein is subject to change without notice REPRODUCTION NOTICE The software described in this document is intended to be used on a single computer system Microware expressly prohibits any reproduction of the software on tape disk or any other medium except for backup purposes Distribution of this software in part or whole to any other party or on any other system may constitute copyright infringements and misappropriation of trade secrets and confidential processes which are the property of Microware and or other par ties Unauthorized distribution of software may cause d
110. Using Professional OS 9 An Overview of OS 9 Storing Information Storing Information Another basic function of any operating system is storing information Without some way to store and organize your programs data and text working on a computer would be extremely complicated OS 9 stores information in files and directories located on mass storage devices such as floppy disks OS 9 provides easy access methods for updating storing and retrieving files and directories through standard utilities OS 9 organizes all files into organizational structures called directories A directory is actually a special file containing the names and locations of each file it contains Directories can contain files and subdirec tories In turn these subdirectories may contain other files and subdirectories This is called a tree struc ture or hierarchical organization for file storage For more information refer to the chapter on the OS 9 file system Using Professional OS 9 1 3 Multi tasking and Multi user Features An Overview of OS 9 Multi tasking and Multi user Features OS 9 is a multi tasking and multi user operating system Multi tasking or multi processing allows the computer to run many different programs at the same time By rapidly switching from one program to the next many times per second programs appear to be running at the same time Each program running on the system is called a task or process OS 9 al
111. You can also create named pipes by writing to the named pipe from a program Named pipes are similar to mass storage files Named pipes have attributes and owners They may be deleted copied or listed using the same syntax one would use to delete copy or list a file You may change the attributes of a named pipe just as you would change the attributes of a file dir works with pipe This displays all named pipes in existence A dir e command may be deceiving If any utility other than copy creates a named pipe the pipe size equals 90 bytes Copy expands the size of the pipe to the size of the file This indicates that the first 90 bytes of the output are in the named pipe However if the procs utility is executed you will see that a path remains open to pipe If you were to copy or list the pipe for example the pipe would continue to receive input and pass it to its output path until the input process is finished When the pipe is empty the named pipe is deleted automatically Some of the most useful applications of pipelines are character set conversion data compression decompression and text file formatting Programs which are designed to process data as components of a pipeline are often called filters 5 18 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Command Grouping Command Grouping You can enclose sections of shell input lines in parentheses This allows you to apply modifiers and separators to an entire set of programs The s
112. _backup echo backup complete Using Professional OS 9 121 shell The OS 9 Utilities Shell Command Line Syntax The shell command line consists of a keyword and optionally any of the parts listed be low The keyword must appear first on a command line The order of the optional parts depends on the nature of the command and the desired effect The command line con sists of Command Line Description Unit Keyword A name of a program or procedure file a pathlist or built in shell command The shell s built in commands are ex Executes a process as overlay chd Changes your data directory chx Changes your execution directory kill Aborts a specified process logout Terminates the current shell and executes the logout procedure file if the login shell is termi nated profile Causes the current shell to read its input from the named file and returns to the original input source set Sets shell options setenv Sets environment variables setpr Sets process priority unsetenv Clears environment variables Ww Waits for any one process to finish wait Waits for all immediate child processes to fin ish Parameter File or directory names values variables constants options etc to be passed to the program Wildcards may be used to identify parameter names The recognized wildcards are Matches any character Matches any single character 122 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities shell Executio
113. ackup each tape disk is considered to be a different volume The volume count begins at one 1 When you begin an frestore operation you must use the last volume of the backup first because it contains the index of the entire backup frestore first attempts to locate and read the index of the directory structure of the source device frestore then begins an interactive session with you to determine which files and directories in the backup should be restored to the current directory During the discussion of the actual frestore procedure references are made to frestore s options The options are Option Description Displays the use of frestore a Forces access permission for overwriting an existing file You must be the owner of the file or a super user to use this option b lt int gt Specifies the buffer size used to restore the files C Checks the validity of files without using the interactive shell d lt path gt Specifies the source device The default is mt0 Displays the pathlists of all files in the index as the index is read from the source device f lt path gt Restores from a file i Displays the backup name creation date group user number of the owner of the backup volume number of the disk or tape and whether the index is on the vol ume This option will not cause any files to be restored The information is dis played and frestore is terminated j lt int gt Sets the minimum syste
114. acters Using Professional OS 9 5 13 Shell Command Line Processing The Shell Wildcards may also be used together For example the command list lists any files that end in a period followed by any letter number or special character regardless of what comes before the period In this case list lists the contents of the file setime c The shell only attempts to expand a character string containing a wildcard if the character string could be a pathlist The shell does not expand wildcards used in the keyword of a command line For example the shell does not expand the asterisk in the following d forms NOTE The shell disregards wildcard characters enclosed in double quotes For example echo This echoes an asterisk to standard output which is usually the terminal If you left out the double quotes around the asterisk the shell would expand the wildcard to include every file name in the current directory and output each name to the terminal Try it WARNING You must be careful when using wildcards with utilities such as del and deldir You should not use wildcards with the x or Z options of most utilities Command Separators A single shell input line can include more than one command line These command lines may be executed sequentially or concurrently Sequential execution causes one program to complete its function and ter minate before the next program is allowed to begin execution Concurre
115. aeeesaeenes 8 2 Extension Mod le Sneen nian E A ane Aue Gee eae eee 8 8 Changing System Modules ere sch csoad saevcneestavgledacqetuadategubes sheet e i E EEE aAA O ECESE 8 9 Using the Moded Utility siisceiiiscagsedtavsicastaseesisilessacivssacaesascecsdedeenacdeladendentsavastisdesnconns 8 9 Editing the Systype d Pile siinne oa a I T E 8 10 IIIS Bootless Ianni a a aa 8 14 Bootlist FileS sssnusedensnenasiinanun ane a aies 8 14 Bootfile ReguirementS nerina nesae e E s S ei 8 14 IVa R P ERO OUT eS a e E NEES 8 14 Making Tape Bootfiles mrn iente ena ee ead ee ae ag eee ae 8 15 sine The RAM DIRE Senape en e aan Gut aa hes aondwas ees is as Ree 8 16 Making a Startup Pile neiere sinisen otedadavensbacdaanadad ea lesdganasastaavouaisens 8 17 nitian Devices 5 240 ole a Pic R EEEE Sint uid det aula eae eave 8 18 Loading Utilities Into Memory ii 2i cee eee KG ee ad 8 20 Loading the Default Device Descriptor eis ic1 c0s 2022hiiveedisieien dena nieninseecnenie 8 20 Initializing the RAM Disk sasiasecesaspaleatensucsstis tice saga dung Ges teeneandaen eke Oaakanthavsaneeeaede 8 21 M lti ser Sy SUC TING cater occas uncon ueccaecuasdent apceatansyaetnesuaccascoremeaat enaeseesaveaatenneanaans 8 21 System Shutdown Procedure oaser a E vdl neg ERE Seadoo ce 8 22 Installing OS 9 On a Hard Disk viccecciisvecesceavevesscageeasaeaysuavsaveshesacnanosseedquastuee vecenteesedaens 8 24 Checking the Hard Disk Device Descriptor s ssessssssesssesessseessresserseessee
116. al number of each track is displayed as each track is verified to see if any sectors are bad If any bad sectors are found an error message is displayed along with the number of the bad sector The number of good sectors the number of unusable sectors and the total number of verified sectors is also displayed WARNING Never backup a system disk to a disk that has any bad sectors reported by format The Backup Procedure After a disk is formatted you can run backup The backup utility makes an exact copy of the OS 9 sys tem disk There are other ways to make a copy of a disk but this method is the least complicated The backup process involves copying everything from your system disk to a formatted disk During the backup procedure the system disk is referred to as the source disk The backup disk is called the destination disk NOTE This procedure makes copies of any disk not just the system disk ea lt Write Protect Tab NOTE You may wish to write protect your source disk with a write protect tab when using the backup procedure This prevents any accidental confusion in exchanging the source and destination disks backup makes two passes The first pass reads a portion of the source disk into a buffer in memory and writes it to the destination disk The second pass verifies that everything was copied to the new disk cor rectly If an error occurs on the first pass something is wrong with the source dis
117. all characters lexico graphically greater than the preceding character and less than the following character For example a z is equivalent to the string abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz m pa f is equivalent to the string mnopabcdef 0 7 is equivalent to the string 01234567 See the ASCII chart in Appendix A for character values Char Name Description ESCAPE The backslash removes special significance from special characters It is followed by a base and a numeric value or a special charac ter If no base is specified the base for the numeric value defaults to hexa decimal An explicit base of decimal or hexadecimal can be specified by preceding the numeric value with a qualifier of d or x respectively It also allows entry of some non printing characters such as t Tab character n New line character l Line feed character b Backspace character f Form feed character Using Professional OS 9 137 tr The OS 9 Utilities OPTIONS EXAMPLES NOTE Do not confuse lt str1 gt and lt str2 gt with the character class regular expres sion lt Str1 gt and lt str2 gt do not need surrounding brackets Brackets are merely treated as characters in the character class Displays the options function and command syntax of tr C Transliterates all ASCH characters 1 through 7F to lt str2 gt except for the set of characters in lt str1 gt d Deletes all matching input characters and ex
118. amages far in excess of the value of the copies involved For additional copies of this software and or documentation or if you have questions concerning the above notice the documentation and or software please contact your OS 9 supplier TRADEMARKS OS 9 and Microware are registered trademarks of Microware Systems Corp UNIX is a trademark of Bell Laboratories Microware Systems Corporation 1900 N W 114th Street Des Moines lowa 50325 7077 Phone 515 224 1929 Table Of Contents An Overview of OS 9 What Isan Operating S ystems GS Aa a S 1 1 Using OS 9 as Your Operating System scssccssescccesssccestiseesedeassaccavs beceesseasesacevanscvssttadesncenes 1 2 Using OS 29 Ss FUNUN Si enn does ety Sess a 20s sures Sans tae ds cule nee ante a tema emaasen beeen 1 2 STOPS Infra OM coires a e at an TE T oa ated e T atanlesoudcat aaae 1 3 Multi tasking and Multi user Features sssnssessseeeseeeesseesseesseesseresseeesseesseesseesseeesseeessesse 1 4 The Memory Module and Modular Software 00 ec eeeeeceeeeesneecsseceeeseeeesaeceseeeseeeeneeeas 1 6 Starting OS 9 Booting QS 9 i sssasiscs peecdivnshanci cig edeiatsseiets sipiad au adaataed stag chant cdaaa E E anes 2 1 Backing Up the System DiS Eernisse tiio a e n manasa 2 3 REIN TAG TIN G sed DUS OEE E E A E E AE E 2 3 The Backup Procedure isisccnon or E geen ete S eas 2 5 Directories Contained on the System Disk scjs c20 honctadeesstdiecl eects ae 2 8 Basic Comman
119. and command syntax of frestore Using Professional OS 9 55 frestore The OS 9 Utilities a Forces access permission for overwriting an existing file You must be the owner of the file or a super user 0 n to use this option b lt int gt Specifies the buffer size used to restore the files C Checks the validity of files without the interactive shell d lt path gt Specifies the source device The default source device is mtO Displays the pathlists of all files in the index as the index is read from the source device f lt path gt Restores from a file i Displays the backup name creation date group user number of the owner of the backup volume number of the disk or tape and wheth er the index is on the volume This option will not restore any files The information is displayed and frestore is terminated j lt int gt Sets the minimum system memory request p Suppresses the prompt for the first volume q Overwrites already existing files when used with the S option S Forces frestore to restore all files from the source device without an interactive shell t lt dirpath gt Specifies an alternate location for the temporary index file V Displays the backup name creation date group user number of the owner of the backup and volume number of the disk or tape This option will not restore any files The information is displayed and frestore is terminated x lt int gt Pre extends a
120. and on If this does not re initialize the terminal consult your terminal operating manual Copying Files Use the copy utility to make a duplicate of a file To copy a file type copy followed by the name of the file to be copied followed by the name of the duplicate file For example copy test newtest If you list the file newtest it is an exact copy of test The file you are copying and the duplicate file may be located in any directory they do not have to be in your current data directory For files located outside of your current data directory you may use full or relative pathlists The following example uses Figure 4h The first command copies the file gee in the PAUL directory to a file named new info in the TEXT directory copy h0 usr paul gee h0 usr chris text new info Assuming your data directory is USR the following commands would have the same effect copy h0 usr paul gee chris text new info copy paul gee chris text new info 4 20 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Copying Files gee is copied from PAUL gee to CHRIS TEXT new info using the command copy paul gee chris text new info ki pood od od DEFS CMDS SYSMODS C startup USR SYS IO MACROS LIB rr e list copy etc CHRIS PAUL ELLEN ets ft TEXT letter PROG map gee _ ick c fall ice green mMm new info manual funct main Figure 4h If you try to copy the contents of one file in
121. and syntax of date j Displays the Julian date and time m Displays the military time 24 hour clock after the date date December 18 1990 Tuesday 2 20 20 pm date m December 18 1990 Tuesday 14 20 24 The following example redirects the current date and time to the printer date gt p 22 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities dcheck dcheck Check the Disk File Structure SYNTAX dcheck lt opts gt lt devname gt FUNCTION dcheck is a diagnostic tool used to detect the condition and the general integrity of the directory file linkages of a disk device To use dcheck type dcheck the option s desired and the name of the disk device to check dcheck first verifies and prints some of the vital file structure parameters It moves down the tree file system to all directories and files on the disk As it moves down the tree file system the integrity of the file descriptor sectors FDs is verified Any discrepancies in the directory file linkages are reported From the segment list associated with each file dcheck builds a sector allocation map This map is created in memory If any FDs describe a segment with a cluster not within the file structure of the disk a message is reported Bad FD segment xxxxxx yyyyyy This indicates that a segment starting at sector XXXXXX hexadecimal and ending at sector yyyyyy cannot be used on this disk The entire FD is probably bad if any of its segmen
122. ape Using Professional OS 9 129 tapegen The OS 9 Utilities tapegen Put Files on a Tape SYNTAX tapegen lt opts gt lt filename gt lt filename gt FUNCTION _ tapegen creates the bootable tape tapegen is a standard utility that performs a function similar to the os9gen utility Both utilities place the bootstrap file on the me dia and mark the media identification block with information regarding the bootstrap file In addition tapegen can optionally place initialized data on the tape for applica tion specific purposes To use the tapegen utility type tapegen followed by any desired options OPTION Displays the options function and command syntax of tapegen b lt boottile gt Installs an OS 9 boot file bz Reads boot module names from standard input bz lt bootlist gt Reads boot module names from the specified bootlist file C Checks and displays header information d lt dev gt Specifies the tape device name The default is mtO O Takes the tape drive off line when finished t lt target gt Specifies the name of the target system i lt file gt Installs an initialized data file on the tape This is usually a RAM disk image v lt volume gt Specifies the name of the tape volume Z Reads filenames from standard input z lt file gt Reads filenames from the specified file EXAMPLES The following example makes a bootable tape The disk image is derived from the dd device tapeg
123. aracters These special characters are Char Name Description ANY The period is defined to match any ASCII character except new line x BOL or NEGATE The tilde is defined to modify a character class as de scribed above when located between square brackets At the beginning of an entire expression it requires the expression to compare and match the string at only the beginning of the line The NEGATE character modifies the character class so it matches any ASCII character not in the given class or newline CHARACTER CLASS The square brackets define a group of characters which match any single character in the compare string grep recognizes cer tain abbreviations to aid the entry of ranges of strings a z Equivalent to the string abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz m pa f Equivalent to the string mnopabcdef 0 7 Equivalent to the string 01234567 Using Professional OS 9 61 grep The OS 9 Utilities Char Name Description CLOSURE The asterisk modifies the preceding single character expres sion so it matches zero or more occurrences of the single character If a choice is available the longest such group is chosen EOL The dollar sign requires the expression to compare and match the string only when located at the end of line ESCAPE The backslash removes special significance from special characters It is followed by a base and a numeric value or a special character If no
124. are unmarked in the allocation map and are available for use by other files Within a text file each byte contains one character Data is written to a file in the order it is provided Data is read from a file exactly as it is stored in the file When a file is created or opened a file pointer is also created and maintained for it The file pointer holds the address of the next byte to be written or read see Figure 4a As data in the file is read or written the file pointer is automatically moved Therefore successive read or write operations transfer data sequen tially see Figure 4b Using Professional OS 9 4 1 OS 9 File Storage The OS 9 File System You can directly access any part of a file by positioning the file pointer to any location in the file using an OS 9 system call seek You can access the seek system call through the various languages available for OS 9 or directly with the macro assembler command I SEEK I SEEK is described in the OS 9 Technical Manual Figure 4a When creating or opening a file the file pointer is positioned to read from or write to the first component Figure 4b After reading or writing the first component of a file the file pointer points to the second component Figure 4c The file pointer is pointing to the current end of file Attempting another read operation causes an error Another write operation increases
125. at n0 SYS backup_dates is used as the backup log file for this backup The following command specifies a level 2 backup of the current directory using the mt1 device h0 misc my_dates is used as the backup log file fsave l 2 d mt1 m h0 misc my_dates 7 4 Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The fsave Procedure The following command specifies a level 0 backup of all files owned by user 0 0 in the CMDS directory if CMDS is in your current directory fsave pb 32 g 0 u 0 d d2 CMDS This backup uses d2 as the target device and h0 sys backup_dates as the backup log file The mount volume prompt is not generated for the first volume A 32K buffer is used to read the files from the CMDS directory Using Professional OS 9 7 5 Restoring Incremental Backups The frestore Utility Making Backups Restoring Incremental Backups The frestore Utility The frestore utility restores a directory structure from multiple volumes of tape or disk media The syntax for the frestore utility is frestore lt opts gt lt path gt lt opts gt Typing frestore by itself on the command line attempts to restore a directory structure from the mtO device to the current directory Specifying the pathlist of a directory on the command line causes the files to be restored in that directory fsave creates the directory structure and an index of the directory structure If more than one tape disk is involved in the fsave b
126. at changes the default execution of the command Modifiers are used to change the memory size process priority and standard I O paths gt lt gt gt FPCP An abbreviation for a Floating Point Co Processor for example 68881 68882 file An ordered sequence of bytes used for mass storage A file may contain a program text a list of commands etc file pointer An indicator of where the next access in a file will occur file system The logical organization of mass storage and all other I O devices into a common and compatible system based on paths files and directories filter A special type of utility command program specially designed for use with pipes A filter typically performs some useful function on the data flowing through it such as sorting editing etc See also pipe Using Professional OS 9 C 3 Glossary Glossary format A utility provided in OS 9 to initialize a disk before it is used New disks must be formatted prior to being used Also refers to the physical division of a disk into sectors clusters etc group user ID This number is used for file system security purposes Files have owner and public access permis sions If no public access permissions are set only the owner of a file may access it There are two types of file ownership by the group and by the user Each file is stored with a group user ID Any user with the same user ID as the file is considered an owner Any
127. aths to and from a terminal This offset should contain zero if no console device is in use Description 44 M Extens Customization Module Name Offset This is the offset to a name string of a list of customization modules if any A customization module is intended to complement or change OS 9 s existing standard system calls These modules are searched for during startup Typically these modules are found in the bootfile They are exe cuted in system state if found Modules listed in the name string are sep arated by spaces The default name string to be searched for is OS9P2 If there are no customization modules set this value to zero NOTE A customization module may only alter the d0 d1 and ccr reg isters NOTE Refer to the following section for more information on customi zation modules Using Professional OS 9 Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module OS 9 System Management 46 48 4A 4C 50 52 56 Offset M Clock M Slice Reserved M Site M Instal M CPUTyp M OS9Lvl Name Clock Module Name Offset This is the offset to the clock module name string If there is no clock module name string set this value to zero Timeslice The number of clock ticks per timeslice The number of clock ticks per timeslice defaults to two This field is currently reserved for future use This is the offset to the installation site code This value is usually set to
128. ay not begin with a number a period or an underscore but these characters may be used elsewhere in the name If this field is empty any name matches i Password This field may contain up to 32 characters including spaces If this field is omitted no password is required for the specified user Group User ID number This field allows 0 to 65535 groups and 0 to 65535 users 0 n is the super user The file security system uses this number as the system wide user ID to identify all processes initiated by the user The system manager should assign a unique ID to each potential user D Initial process priority The initial process priority can be from 1 to 65535 f Initial execution directory pathlist The initial execution directory is usually dO CMDS Specifying a period for this field defaults the initial execution directory to the CMDS file located in the current directory usually hO or dO Y Initial data directory pathlist This is the specific user directory Speci fying a period for this field defaults to the current directory y Initial Program The name and parameters of the program to initially execute This is usually shell Sample Password File superuser secret 0 0 255 shell p howdy brian open sesame 3 7 128 d1 STEVE shell sara jane 3 10 100 d0 BUSINESS d1 LETTERS wordprocessor robert 4 0 128 d1 ROBERT Basic mean_joe midori 12 97 100 Joe Joe shell Using password file entries login sets
129. bc h tabs n normal Setting character length changes the type value This value is not affected by xmode normal This value is not changed until the specified device is iniz ed Sets the number of stop bits used n 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits Setting the stop bit value affects the type value This value is not affected by xmode normal This value is not changed until the specified device is iniz ed Baud rate The baud rate may currently be set to the following values n 50 134 5 600 2000 4800 19200 75 150 1200 2400 7200 38400 110 300 1800 3600 9600 extern This value is not affected by xmode normal and is not changed until the specified device is iniz ed DC1 resume output character normally lt control gt Q default 11 Nu meric value of character in hexadecimal DC2 suspend output character normally lt control gt S default 13 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal Tab character normally lt control gt l default 09 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal Number of characters between tab stops The number is in decimal By default there are four characters between tab stops Set the terminal back to its default characteristics This does not affect the following values type baud rate parity character length and stop bits xmode term noupc If null 4 bse 1F pause xmode t1 pag 24 pause bsl noecho bsp 8 bsl C NOTES End of Chapter Using Professional OS 9 147 NOTES The OS
130. be backed up on to the source device appear in the restore file structure regardless of what volume they appear in Information concerning the file structure is available using the e option with the dir command frestore gt dir e Directory of Owner Last modified Attributes Volume Block Offset Size Name 1 23 89 08 22 16 14 r wr 1 0 O CF12 filel 1 23 89 08 25 11 00 r wr 1 2 0 A356 file2 1 23 89 08 21 11 12 r wr 1 4 0 45F0 file3 1 23 89 08 24 10 57 d ewrewr 0 5 0 120 DIRI 7 8 Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The Interactive Restore Process The interactive shell allows you to mark the files you want restored with the add command You can mark groups of files using the options of the add command g Marks files by group number u Marks files by user number You can mark all directories within a specified directory using the r option a e Files may be marked one at a time by specifying relative or complete pathlists within the restore file structure e Entire directories may be marked by specifying a pathlist of a directory Marking files does not restore them It merely marks them as to be restored You can see this when you use the dir command Each file added to the to be restored list is marked by a plus sign by its filename For example the following directory has file1 and file2 marked for restoration but file3 is not marked The directories DIR1 and DIR2 also have marked files
131. ber as lt path1 gt If lt path2 gt is omitted the destination file has the same name as the source file It is copied into the current data directory Consequently the following two copy com mands have the same effect copy h0 cmds file1 file1 copy h0 cmds file1 copy is also capable of copying one or more files to the same directory by using the w lt dir gt option The following command copies file1 and file2 into the BACKUP directory copy file1 file2 w backup If used with wildcards the w lt dir gt option becomes a selective dSave The following command copies all files in the current data directory that have names ending with lp into the LP directory copy lp w Ip Data is transferred using large block reads and writes until an end of file occurs on the input path Because block transfers are used normal output processing of data does not occur on character oriented devices such as terminals printers etc Therefore the list utility is preferred over copy when a file consisting of text is sent to a terminal or printer Using Professional OS 9 19 copy The OS 9 Utilities NOTE copy always runs faster if you specify additional memory with the b option This allows copy to transfer data with a minimum number of I O requests OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of Copy a Aborts the Copy routine if an error occurs This option effectively can cels the continue y n
132. ber used by the device A second number the hardware interrupt level is displayed for auto vectored inter rupts prior Software polling priority port addr Base address of the interrupt generating hardware The operating system does not use this value but passes it to the interrupt service routine data addr Address of the device driver s static storage irq svc Interrupt service routine s entry point driver Name of the module which contains the interrupt service routine usually a device driver device Name of the device descriptor NOTE If no device name is displayed the entries relate to IRQ handlers that support anonymous devices for example the clock ticker DMA devices associated with other peripherals Displays the function and command syntax of irqs 68 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities irqs EXAMPLE The following example displays the IRQ polling table for a system named Calvin irgs Calvin OS 9 68K V2 4 max devs 32 max irqs 32 vector prior port addr data addr irq svc driver device 68 0 fffe1800 00230b90 00215084 am7990 69 5 fffe4000 003bd560 00012ad2 scsi147 70 5 fffe4000 003bd560 00012ad2 scsi147 72 0 fffe1000 00000000 0000ccda tk147 88 5 fffe3002 003be3f0 0000dacc sc8x30 term 88 5 fffe3000 003bd300 0000dacc sc8x30 tl 89 5 fffe3800 002044a0 0000dacc sc8x30 t3 89 5 fffe3802 003bbeb0 0000dacc sc8x30 t2 90 5 ffff1001 003bc560 0000e6b6 sc68560
133. bugger The debugger g o command resumes execution of OS 9 You should only call break from the system s console device because the debugger only communicates with that device If break is invoked from another terminal you must still use the system s console device to communicate with the debugger Only super users can execute break NOTE break is used only for system debugging It should not be included with or run on a production system NOTE If there is no debugger in ROM or if the debugger is disabled break will reset the system CAVEAT You must be aware of any open network paths when you use the break utility as all timesharing is stopped Displays the function and command syntax of break 10 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities build build Build a Text File from Standard Input SYNTAX build lt path gt FUNCTION build creates a file specified by a given pathlist To use the build utility type build and a pathlist A question mark prompt is dis played This requests an input line Each line entered is written to the output file En tering a line consisting of only a carriage return causes build to terminate The build utility also terminates when you enter an end of file character at the beginning of an in put line The end of file character is typically lt escape gt OPTION Displays the function and command syntax of build EXAMPLE _ build newfile Build should only be u
134. c ified on the command line and standard input is used n Creates an output file Z Reads file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads file names from lt file gt In the first example file1 is compressed file1_Comp is created and file1 is deleted compress file1 dn In this example file2 is compressed file3 is created from the redirected standard out put and file2 is deleted compress file2 d gt file3 18 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities copy Copy Copy Data from One File to Another SYNTAX copy lt opts gt lt path1 gt lt path2 gt FUNCTION copy copies data from lt path1 gt to lt path2 gt If lt path2 gt already exists the contents of lt path1 gt overwrites the existing file If lt path2 gt does not exist it is created If no files are given on the command line and the Z option is not specified an error is re turned You can copy any type of file It is not modified in any way as it is copied The attributes of lt path1 gt are also copied exactly NOTE You must have permission to copy the file You must be the owner of the file specified by lt path1 gt or have public read permission in order to copy the file You must also be able to write to the specified directory In either case if the copy proce dure is successful lt path2 gt has your group user number unless you are the super user If you are the super user lt path2 gt has the same group user num
135. case file names This is not required it is just a convention OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of makdir X Creates the directory in the execution directory Z Reads the directory names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the directory names from lt file gt EXAMPLES makdir d1 STEVE PROJECT makdir DATAFILES makdir SAVEFILES makdir RED GREEN BLUE PURPLE Using Professional OS 9 79 make The OS 9 Utilities Maintain Update and Regenerate Groups of Programs SYNTAX FUNCTION make lt opts gt lt target gt lt target gt lt macros gt make determines whether a file needs to be updated It examines the dates of the target file and the files used to create the target file If make determines that the file must be updated it executes specified commands to re create the file make has several built in assumptions specifically designed for compiling high level language programs however you may use make to maintain any files dependent on updated files make executes commands from a special type of procedure file called a makefile The makefile describes the dependent relationships between files used to create the lt target gt file s A makefile may describe the commands to create many files If make is invoked without a target file on the command line make attempts to make the first target file described in the makefile If one or more target file s a
136. check for the proper OS 9 module headers or CRC check value required to actually load the binary file You can use ident to check the validity of the modules if they are to be loaded or run exbin converts any of the S record types mentioned above Using either command standard input and output are assumed if both paths are omitted If the second path is omitted standard output is assumed Displays the options function and command syntax of binex exbin Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities binex exbin a lt num gt Specifies the load address in hex This is for binex only S lt num gt Specifies which type of S record format is to generate This is for binex only X binex searches for lt path1 gt in the execution directory This is for binex only EXAMPLES The following example downloads a program to T1 This type of command downloads programs to devices such as PROM programmers binex scanner S1 gt T1 The next example generates prog S1 in S1 format from the binary file prog binex s1 prog prog S1 The following example generates CMDS prog in OS 9 binary format from the S1 type file program S1 exbin prog S1 cmds prog Using Professional OS 9 9 break The OS 9 Utilities break Invoke Sytem Level Debugger or Reset System SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTION break break executes an F SysDbg system call This call stops OS 9 and all user processes and returns control to the ROM de
137. cm entry ma string Arrow key map mi boolean OK to move while in insert mode ml string Memory lock on above cursor ms boolean OK to move while in standout and underline mode mu string Turn off memory lock ne boolean Carriage return down not work nd string Non destructive space nl string P Newline character ns boolean Terminal is a non scrolling CRT os boolean Terminal overstrikes pc string Pad character rather than null pt boolean Has hardware tabs se string End stand out mode sf string P Scroll forwards sg numeric Number of blank characters left by se or SO so string P Begin stand out mode sr string P Scroll reverse ta string Tab other than I or without padding tc string Entry of terminal similar to last termcap entry te string String to end programs that use cm ti string String to begin programs that use cm uc string Underscore one character and move past it ue string End underscore mode ug numeric Number of blank characters left by us or ue ul boolean Terminal underlines but doesn t overstrike up string Upline cursor up us string Start underscore mode 8 34 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Termcap Capabilities Name Type Padding Description vb string Visible bell ve string Sequence to end open visual mode VS string Sequence to start open visual mode xb boolean Beehive terminal f1 lt esc gt f2 C xn boolean Hewline is ignored after wrap xr boolean Return acts like ce r n XS boolean Sta
138. command line lists all files in the current data directory that have names beginning with s list is the keyword s identifies the parameters list s update uses master as standard input in this next example The output from update is used as input for sort The output from sort is redirected to the printer update lt master sort gt p1 Displays the options function and command syntax of shell e lt file gt Prints error messages from lt file gt If no file is specified the default file used is dd sys errmsg Without the e option shell prints only error numbers with no message description ne Prints no error messages This is the default The logout built in command is required to terminate the login shell lt eof gt does not terminate the shell nl lt eof gt terminates the login shell The lt Esc gt key normally sends an lt eof gt to the shell p Displays prompt The default prompt is np Does not display prompt Using Professional OS 9 125 shell The OS 9 Utilities p lt string gt Sets current shell prompt equal to lt string gt t Echoes input lines nt Does not echo input lines This is the default V Verbose mode Displays a message for each directory searched when executing a command nV Turns off verbose mode X Aborts process upon error This is the default NX Does not abort on error 126 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities sleep c 1 0
139. control gt C Sends an interrupt signal to the most recent program This functions differently from pro gram to program If a program does not make specific interrupt provisions it aborts the program Ifa program has provisions for interrupts lt control gt C usually provides a way to stop the current function and return to a master menu or command mode In the shell lt control gt C can be used to convert the foreground program to a background program if the program has not begun I O to the terminal lt control gt E Sends a program abort signal to the program presently running In most cases this key prematurely aborts the current program and returns you to the shell The control keys described above are the key assignments commonly used in most OS 9 systems The correspondence between control keys and their functions is changeable so your keys may be different You can use the tmode utility to redefine the function of control keys This command allows you to cus tomize OS 9 to the specific computer s keyboard layout NOTE For more information about tmode see the chapter on OS 9 system management and the OS 9 Utilities section The Page Pause Feature The page pause feature eliminates the annoyance of having output scroll off the screen before you can read it OS 9 counts output lines until a full screen has been displayed It then halts output until you press any key This is repeated for each screen of output Page pause can be fool
140. copied and continues the dsave routine with no prompt dsave helps keep up to date directory backups When the d or d lt date gt options are used dSave compares the date of the file to copy with a file of the same name in the directory it is to be copied to The d option copies any file with a more recent date To copy a file with a date more recent than that specified use the d lt date gt option A common error occurs when using dsave if the destination directory has files with the same name as the source directory Because a file name must be unique within a directory this produces an error Use the r option to prevent this error Displays the options function and command syntax of dsave 36 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities dsave a b lt n gt k d d lt date gt O lt name gt S Does not copy any file that has a name beginning with a period Allocates lt n gt k bytes of memory for copy and cmp if needed Compares dates with files of the same name and copies files with more recent dates Compares the specified date with the date of files with the same name and copies any file with a more recent date than that specified Executes the output immediately Uses copy s f option to force the writing of files Indents for directory levels Does not save directories below the current level Does not include makdir commands in the procedure file Does not load copy or cmp if v
141. cute permission for the specified file dir Directory of 16 22 53 blue myfile rename blue purple dir Directory of 16 23 22 myfile purple rename h0 HARRY test1 test2 rename x screenclear clearscreen Using Professional OS 9 107 romsplit The OS 9 Utilities romsplit Split File SYNTAX _ romsplit lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION romsplit splits the input file specified by lt path gt into two or four files romsplit converts a ROM object image into an 8 bit wide file This is useful when a PROM programmer cannot burn more than one PROM at a time and the system has the ROMs addressed as 16 bit or 32 bit wide memory If the q option is not specified romsplit copies the even bytes of data to a new file with the same name with a 0 extension The odd bytes are copied to a new file with the same name with a 1 extension If the q option is specified the following copying scheme is used Byte Number Destination File 0 4 8 12 etc lt path gt 0 1 5 9 13 etc lt path gt 1 2 6 10 14 etc lt path gt 2 3 7 11 15 etc lt path gt 3 OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of romsplit q Splits the input file into four files X Reads the input file from execution directory 108 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities save save Save Memory Module s to a File SYNTAX save lt opts gt lt modname gt FUNCTION save copie
142. d Public Write Public Execute Single user Directory r pr pw pe The owner can read the file When off this denies any access to the file The owner can write to the file When off this attribute can be used to protect files from accidentally being deleted or modified The owner can execute the file The public can read the file The public can write the file The public can execute the file When set only one user at a time can open the file When set indicates a directory Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System The OS 9 File System The OS 9 File System OS 9 uses a tree structured or hierarchical organization for its file system on mass storage devices such as disk systems see Figure 4e Each mass storage device has a master directory called the root directory The root directory is created automatically when a new disk is formatted It contains the names of the files and the sub directories on the disk Every file is listed in a directory by name and each file has a unique name within a directory An OS 9 directory can contain both files and sub directories Each sub directory can contain more files and sub directories This allows subdirectories to be imbedded within other subdirectories The only limit to this division is the amount of available disk space ROOT DIRECTORY file1 SUB DIRECTORY 1 SUB DIRECTORY2 ETC file2 SUB DIRECTORY3 file3 file4 SUB DIRECTORY4 file5 ETC ETC
143. d below This strategy is ideal for small microcomputer systems backed up by floppy disks Mounting disks is much easier and faster than tapes Each daily backup can usually be kept on one disk to make warehousing sim ple This strategy is perfect for small timely backups with little redundancy in the backups One major disadvantage of this scheme is the restore time necessary in case of a major system failure such as a hard disk being formatted erased or corrupted Because of the lack of redundancy more frestore operations are necessary to re create the systems file structure On large systems with tape backups this is a major consideration Level Oo v ArANWOH AID N OC SMT WTFMTWTFMTWTFMT WT F Day of Backup Small Daily Backup Strategy 7 12 Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The Single Tape Backup Strategy The Single Tape Backup Strategy While most strategies rely on scheduled backup level changes the single tape backup strategy depends on the size of the backup The idea behind this strategy is to increase the level of the backup only when the backup cannot fit on a single tape The only scheduled level backup is the level 0 backup The level 0 backup occurs only when a higher level backup would not fit on a single tape or once a month whichever occurs first An example month s schedule is graphically presented below Level
144. d os9gen utilities on them To prevent accidentally formatting a hard disk you should normally use the device names h0 h1 etc You may only use device names as the first name of a pathlist The device name must be preceded by a slash to indicate that the name is an I O device If the device is not a mass storage multi file device like a disk drive the device name must be the only name in the path This restriction is true for devices such as terminals and printers For example you can redirect the standard output of list to write to the system printer instead of the terminal list correspondence gt p The shell automatically opens or creates and closes as appropriate files referenced by I O redirection modifiers In the next example the output of dir is redirected to the path d1 savelisting dir gt d1 savelisting If list is used on the path d1 savelisting output from dir is displayed as follows List d1 savelisting directory of 10 15 00 filel myfile savelisting Using Professional OS 9 5 11 Shell Command Line Processing The Shell You can use redirection modifiers before and or after the program s parameters but you can use each mod ifier only once in a given command line You can use redirection modifiers together to cause more than one redirection of the standard paths For example shell lt gt gt gt t1 causes redirection of all three standard paths to t1 The addition and hyphen characters
145. d the Init module is remade and placed in the new boot file The second method involves modifying the Init module with the moded utility Both methods are discussed later in this chapter Regardless of the method you use the changes become the system defaults The following is a list of the system defaults listed in the Init module The term offset refers to the location of a module field relative to the starting address of the module Module offsets are resolved in assembly code by using the names shown here and linking the module with the relocatable library sys l or usr Offset Name Description 30 Reserved This field is currently reserved for future use 34 M PollSz Number of Entries in the IRQ Polling Table This is the number of entries in the IRQ polling table One entry is re quired for each interrupt generating device control register The IRQ poll ing table has 32 entries by default Each entry in the IRQ polling table is 18 bytes long 36 M DevCnt Device Table Size This is the number of entries in the system device table One entry is re quired for each device in the system The system device table has 32 en tries by default Each entry in this table is 18 bytes long Offset Name Description 38 M Procs Initial Process Table Size This indicates the initial number of active processes allowed in the system If this table becomes full it automatically expands as needed By default 64 active processes are allowed Each
146. d for the execution of a specific operation Also sometimes re fers to one of the utilities provided with OS 9 command interpreter Software that translates input commands into machine language commands causing the computer to perform the requested actions The name of OS 9 s command interpreter program is shell command line A single line of input including a keyword that the operating system can understand and act upon A command line may also include an object and the parameters of the command concurrent execution The act of deliberately running a program at the same time as another program also the effect mul titasking has on programs See also multi tasking sequential execution cross development This refers to programs developed on one computer for the purpose of translating instructions for to another computer data directory A directory used by OS 9 to locate data files used by programs You can change which directory is the current data directory See also directory data module A type of module used for shared variable storage by two or more tasks See also memory module default system device This refers to the system device disk RAM etc used for information and program storage used by a computer The OS 9 mnemonic for this device is dd device descriptor module A type of module which contains the identification and initialization values for a specific I O de vice The name of the device descriptor
147. d in tmode for informational purposes only You can only change these by altering the device descriptor and using iniz See xmode for more information tmode can work only if a path to the file device has already been opened The OS 9 Technical Manual contains full information on device descriptors Tmode Parameter Names Name Function upc Upper case only Lower case characters are converted automatically to 132 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tmode upper case noupc Upper and lower case characters permitted Default bsb Erase on backspace Backspace characters are echoed as a backspace space backspace sequence Default nobsb No erase on backspace Echoes single backspace only bsl Backspace over line Lines are deleted by sending backspace space backspace sequences to erase the same line for video terminals Default nobsl No backspace over line Lines are deleted by printing a new line se quence for hard copy terminals echo Input characters echoed back to terminal Default noecho No echo If Auto line feed on Line feeds are automatically echoed to terminal on input and output carriage returns Default nolf Auto line feed off null n Set null count Number of null 00 characters transmitted after carriage returns for return delay The number is decimal The default null count is 0 pause Screen pause on Output suspended upon full screen See pag param eter for definition of screen size Out
148. d list of the field names and their values The Moded fields File The moded fields file consists of descriptions of specific types of modules Each module description consists of three parts the module type the field descriptor and the description lines Comments may be interspersed throughout the file by preceding the comment line with an asterisk For example this is a comment line it may appear anywhere in the moded fields file The Module Type This is a single line consisting of the module type as specified in M Type in the module header and the device type as specified in PD_DTP in the device descriptor Both values are specified as decimals and are separated from each other by acomma The module type line is the only line which begins with a pound sign The following example line describes an RBF device descriptor module 15 1 Two module type values are accepted Value Description 12 System Module Init module only 15 Device Descriptor Module The device type value is only used when a device descriptor module is being described The following device type values are accepted Value Description SCF RBF PIPE SBF NET UCM GFM OFWNMO _ Using Professional OS 9 93 moded The OS 9 Utilities The Field Descriptor This consists of two lines The first is a textual description of the module field the baud rate parity and descriptor name moded uses this description as a prompt to chang
149. d the ASCII character for each byte are displayed The comparison ends when an end of file is encountered on either file A summary of the number of bytes compared and the number of differences found is displayed To execute cmp type cmp and the pathlists of the files to be compared OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of cmp b lt num gt k Assigns lt num gt k of memory for cmp to use cmp uses a 4K memory by default S Silent mode Stops the comparison when the first mismatch occurs and prints an error message X Searches the current execution directory for both of the specified files EXAMPLES The following example uses an 8K buffer to compare file1 with file2 cmp file1 file2 b 8k Differences hex ascii byte 1 2 1 2 00000019 72 6e r n 000000la 73 61 s a 0000001b 74 6c t 1 Bytes compared 0000002d Bytes different 00000003 file1 is longer The following example compares file1 with itself cmp filel file1 Bytes compared 0000002f Bytes different 00000000 16 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities code code Print Hex Value of Input Character SYNTAX code FUNCTION code prints the input character followed by the hex value of the input character Unprintable characters print as a period The keys specified by tmode quit and tmode abort terminate code tmode quit is normally lt control gt E and tmode abort is normally lt control gt C The most co
150. d0 DIRECTORY_3 DIR_8 This makes your current directory DIR_8 but you can return to DIR_9 by pressing the lt escape gt Esc key By this method you may use any directory as a base directory and fork a shell out to any other directory You may continue to imbed as many shells as you like Each time you press the lt EScape gt key you are taken to the previous shell In this fashion you could conceivably escape from DIRECTORY_2 to DIR_8 to DIR_6 to DIR_Y REMINDER Because of the nature of jumping from shell to shell it is easy to get lost pd displays a complete pathlist from the root directory to your current data directory Likewise when running multiple shells it is easy to forget how many shells are running If the _sh environment variable is set to 1 and the shell prompt includes an at sign the number of shells replaces the in the prompt For example if three shells are run under each other the prompt might look like this 3 what next You should experiment with the multiple shell aspects to fully use OS 9 The Procs Utility Because of OS 9 s multi tasking abilities you often have more than one process executing at a time You may become confused as to which processes are still running and which processes have run to completion The procs utility displays a list of processes running on the system that are owned by the user running procs This allows the user to keep track of their current processes
151. de actually updates the device descriptor The change persists as long as the computer is running even if paths to the device are repetitively opened and closed Some common uses of xmode are to change the baud rates and control definitions In SSM systems you must have write permission for the descriptor module in order for xmode to work You can use the fixmod utility to change the permissions NOTE tmode and xmode work only on SCF and GFM devices Using the Tmode Utility To use the tmode utility type tmode and any parameter s to change If you give no parameters the present values for each parameter are displayed Otherwise the parameter s given on the command line are processed You can give any number of parameters on a command line Use spaces or commas to separate each parameter If a parameter is set to zero OS 9 no longer uses the parameter until it is re set to a code OS 9 recognizes For example the following command sets xon and xoff to zero tmode xon 0 xoff 0 Consequently OS 9 will not recognize xon and xoff until the values are re set To re set the values of a parameter to their default as given in this manual specify the parameter with no value Use the w lt path gt option to specify the path number affected If a path number is not provided standard input is affected NOTE If you use tmode in a shell procedure file you must use the w lt path gt option to specify one of the standard paths 0 1 or 2
152. definitions macros and built in assumptions to facilitate program compilation to generate its own commands Refining the C Compiler Example Knowing how make works and understanding the implicit rules can simplify coding immensely program xxx r yyy r cc xxx r yyy r xf program xxx r yyy r d0 defs oskdefs The above makefile now exploits make s awareness of file dependencies No mention is made of the C language files therefore make looks in the directory specified by the macro definition SDIR lt path gt and adjusts the dependency list accordingly In this case make looks in the current directory by default make also generates a command line to compile xxx r and yyy r if one or both needs to be updated Further simplification would be possible if program was made up of only one source file program make assumes the following from this simple command e program has no suffix It is an object file and therefore needs to rely on relocatable files to be made e No dependency list is given therefore make creates an entry in the table for program r Using Professional OS 9 6 9 Refining Example Two Making Files e After creating an entry for program r make creates the entry for a source file connected to the relocatable file Assuming it found program a it checks the dates on the various files and generates one or both of the following commands if required r68 program a o program r cc program r f program
153. descriptor and the Init module These macros contain basic memory map information exception vector methods for example vectors in RAM or ROM I O device controller memory addresses and initialization data etc for each device descriptor and the init module The systype d file consists of five main sections that are used when installing OS 9 e Init module CONFIG macro SCF Device Descriptor macros and definitions e RBF Device Descriptor macros and definitions e ROM configuration values e Target system specific definitions The CONFIG macro is used when creating the Init module to determine six or more system dependent variables Name Description MainFram MainFram is a character string programs such as login use to print a banner which identifies the system You can modify this string SysStart SysStart is a character string the OS 9 kernel uses to locate the initial process for the system This process is usually stored in a module called SysGo Two general versions of SysGo have been provided in the files SysGo a for disk based OS 9 and SysGo_nodisk a for ROM based OS 9 SysParam SysParam is a character string that is passed to the initial process This usually consists of a single carriage return 8 10 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Editing the Systype d File Name Description SysDev SysDev is a character string containing the name of the path to the initial system disk The kernel coldstar
154. directory is nO and you want your current data directory to be USR you would type chd and the pathlist of USR For example with a relative pathlist type chd usr With a full pathlist type chd h0 usr Your current data directory is now USR If you type dir you will see the contents of USR directory of 14 04 32 CHRIS ELLEN PAUL If you want to see which files are in the CHRIS directory type dir chris Or change directories by typing chd chris and after the new prompt type dir If you want to return to your home directory which in this case is hO type chd without a pathlist After changing directories dir displays the contents of h0 Using Professional OS 9 4 13 Climbing Directory Trees The OS 9 File System The chx command allows you to redefine an existing directory as a personal execution directory This may be important if you have programs you do not want other people to execute To use this command type chx followed by a full or relative pathlist to the directory When using a relative pathlist with chx the pathlist is relative to your current execution directory If your current data directory is USR and you want to change your current execution directory from CMDS to PAUL you could type the relative pathlist chx usr paul or the full pathlist chx nO usr paul When you type a command after you have changed your current execution directory PAUL is searched instead of CMDS Typing dir x displays the co
155. ds and Functions Learning the BASICS weeds oroe oea a isa eaeentenencdasesaceisunacden te E A AET 3 1 Logging on to a Timesharing System ssesssseseseessesrrssrereesresseserssresstserssresseseresressesseese 3 2 An Introduction to the Shell s nneeeseeseeesseesseeeseseesseesseesseessersseessseesseesseesseeeseeessseessesees 3 3 Usine the Keyboard e iE E E ee ee 3 5 Th Pase Paatse FEatUTE inde ieee e ee eA E E ES aos EA N Eit 3 6 Basic Utte Svcs detects teeta nee ieee sda tgs Racha a ETEESI En hae teste eae a 3 7 iji Using Professional OS 9 Table Of Contents Table Of Contents The Help Utility and the Option s siccissscccsassevssvaivesdacesiedvedtasvecaceessaccesashovastehagenetensneeancs 3 8 PMCS ANC IT Pee ise oie atin alert a Siete tte tale aed nN teat al Moan 3 9 The OS 9 File System OS OIE Stora ect e SNe Be Sl OSes teal ete oly Se Sa 4 1 TSR UNS SA ine e a AE E he Rated a adsl Scaled Aa agdk 4 3 Executable Program Module Pilessciccesjansersessagaatssccateasaciesuadcccsasnncs pedi Week nena ice 4 3 Random Access Data Piles cc c2intsineeginhdien aiid a iaeiidteaianeeeh ageless 4 3 Bile Ow mers Hip cis ss eles cas eee See ee nae oe Bees Bae ee 4 4 Attributes and the File Security System csscccsseceseescereecceseencensescenteeceseee 4 4 The OS 9 File System sie a eE tae E retinas lua panes a eo 4 6 C rr nt Dir ct ties serei iia a a a e pac Deel A oars shire ek Aad dd 4 7 TheHome Directo yrres
156. dsave followed by the pathlist of the directory into which the files are copied followed by any options you wish to use If no pathlist is specified for the destination the files are copied to the current data directory at the time the procedure file is executed If you do not specify the e option or redirect the output to a file dsave sends the output to the terminal 4 22 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Dsave Copying Files Using Procedure Files The example below uses the following directory structure hO NOTES prog names PROGMS CONVERSION MY PROJ J temp c _ tally c prog1 test c If PROGMS is your current data directory and you type dsave notes the following appears on your screen dsave notes t chd notes tmode w 1 nopause load copy Makdir MY PROJ Chd MY PROJ Copy b 10 h0 PROGMS MY PROJ prog1 Copy b 10 h0 PROGMS MY PROJ test c Chd Makdir CONVERSION Chd CONVERSION Copy b 10 h0 PROGMS CONVERSION temp c Copy b 10 h0 PROGMS CONVERSION tally c Chd unlink copy tmode w 1 pause Because the output was not redirected to a procedure file and the e option was not used the above com mands were not executed They were just echoed to your screen If you now type dsave notes e the commands are again echoed to the screen However the contents of the PROGMS directory are copied into the NOTES directory You can also redi
157. dure Making Backups At the end of the backup fsave prints the following information fsave Saving the index structure Logical backup name Date of backup Backup made by Data bytes written Number of files Number of volumes Index is on volume The index to the backup is saved on the last volume used fsave performs recursive backups for each pathlist if one or more directories are specified on the com mand line You can specify a maximum of 32 directories on the command line The following options are provided d Specifies an alternate target device The default device is mt0 m Specifies an alternative backup log file The default pathlist is nO sys backup_dates Specifies different levels of backups A higher level backup only saves files that have changed since the most recent backup with the next lower number For example a level 1 backup saves all files changed since the last level 0 backup WARNING When using disks for backup purposes fsave does not use an RBF file structure to save the files on the target disk It creates its own file structure This makes the backup disk unusable for any purpose other than fsave and frestore without reformatting the disk Any data stored on the disk before using fsave is destroyed by the backup Example fsave Commands Typing fsave by itself on a command line specifies a level 0 backup of the current directory This assumes the mtO device is used and th
158. e disabled Breakpoints and Caching The debugger uses traps to set up breakpoints Consequently systems such as 68020 systems that contain instruction caches may have occasional problems with missed breakpoints This occurs when a breakpoint is set at an instruction location that is currently cached The debugger sets an illegal instruction trap in the code location specified but the CPU executes the cached version of the instruction causing the break point to be missed To avoid this problem Microware recommends that all cache resources for the system be disabled while using the ROM debugger if possible B 4 Using Professional OS 9 The ROM Debugger The Talk Through Command The Talk Through Command The second communications port on the target system is used for communications with the host system to provide download and talk through functions You can make versions of the debugger that omit the download or both download and talk through functions in order to save ROM space Talk through mode makes the debugger transparently pass data between the target system s terminal and the communications port to the host system This effectively makes the target system terminal act as a host system terminal The target system s terminal can be used to edit assemble etc on the host system This eliminates the need for two terminals Use the following command to enter talk through mode tm lt EscChar gt This mode is exited w
159. e last level O backup The backup log file nO sys backup_dates is updated each time an fsave is executed The backup log keeps track of the name of the backup and the date it was created More importantly it keeps track of the level of the backup When fsave is executed this backup log is examined for the specified level of the current backup and the previous backups with the same name Once the backup is finished a new entry is entered in the file indicating the date name level etc of the current backup fsave does not accept a device name as a directory For example if fsave ho is entered error 216 is returned The Fsave Procedure Upon starting an fsave procedure fsave first builds the directory structure You are then prompted to mount the first volume to use fsave please mount volume press return when mounted If a disk is used as the backup medium fSave verifies the disk and displays the following information verifying disk Bytes held on this disk 546816 Total data bytes left 62431 Number of Disks needed 1 NOTE The numbers above are used as an example If a tape is used as the backup medium the backup begins at this point As each file is saved to the backup device its pathlist is echoed to the terminal If this is a long backup use the e option to turn off the echoing of pathlists 58 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities fsave If fsave receives an error when trying to bac
160. e path of the new directory When dsave is executed it writes commands on standard output to copy files from the current data directory to the directory specified by lt path gt If no lt path gt is specified the copies are directed to the current data directory when the procedure file is executed dsave s standard output should be redirected to a procedure file that can be executed at a later time or the e option should be used to execute dSave s output immediately If dsave encounters a directory file it automatically includes makdir and chd commands in the output before generating copy commands for files in the subdirectory The procedure file duplicates all levels of the file system connected downward from the current data directory If the current working directory happens to be the root directory of the disk dsave cre ates a procedure file to backup the entire disk file by file This is useful when you need to copy many files from different format disks or from a floppy disk or a hard disk If an error occurs the following prompt is displayed continue y n a q A y indicates you want to continue An N indicates you do not want to continue Ana indicates you want to copy all possible files and you do not want dsave to display the prompt on error A q indicates you want to quit the dsave procedure If for any reason you do not wish to be bothered by this prompt the S option is available This skips any file which cannot be
161. e programs to be run at the same time multi user A function of the operating system which allows multiple users to use the system at the same time provides security for the system and each user s files Sometimes referred to as timesharing C 4 Using Professional OS 9 Glossary Glossary NFM The Network File Manager is the OS 9 network file manager module that supports networking NFM is responsible for maintaining accurate communication between device drivers across a net work operating system The master control program that manages the operation of the computer and provides commonly used functions such as I O for other programs owner attributes Owner read owner write and owner execute An owner of a file is a user with the same group number or user ID associated with the file If set the owner attributes allow access to the file by the owner See public attributes parameters A character or symbol recognized by the shell in a command line that specifies additional condi tions for the execution of the command password A user unique code word used to log on to a timesharing system that validates identity for security password file A file that contains a list of all valid user names and passwords for users on the system path The routing of input or output between a program and a file or I O device path descriptor A data structure used by file managers and device drivers to perform I O functions A pa
162. e separated by space charac ters The shell follows a special searching sequence to locate the command in memory or on disk If it cannot find the command you specified the error 000 216 file not found is generally reported Using Professional OS 9 3 3 The Shell and Command Lines Basic Commands and Functions Here is an example of a simple shell command line list myfile The name of the program is list The file name myfile is passed to the program 3 4 Using Professional OS 9 Basic Commands and Functions Using the Keyboard Using the Keyboard Most input to OS 9 programming languages and application programs is line oriented This means that as you type the characters are collected but not sent to the program until you press the lt return gt key This gives you a chance to correct typing errors before they are sent to the program OS 9 has several features to make data entry and error correction simple These are called line editing features Each of these features use control keys generated by simultaneously pressing the lt control gt key and some other character key The line editing control keys are Key Function lt control gt A Repeats the previous input line The last line entered is redisplayed but not executed The cursor is positioned at the end of the line You may enter the line as it is or you can add more characters to it You can edit the line by backspacing and typing over old charac t
163. e this field s value The second line has the following format lt type gt lt offset gt lt base gt lt value gt lt name gt lt type gt specifies the field size in bytes This is a decimal value The following values are accepted 1 byte 2 word 3 3 byte value 4 long word 5 long word offset to a string 6 word offset to a string lt offset gt specifies the offset of the field from the beginning of the module This is a hexadecimal value NOTE For device specific fields see lt name gt below this offset is the offset of the field within the DevCon section of the descriptor and not the module start lt base gt specifies the numeric base in which the field value is displayed in moded The following bases are supported 0 ASCII 8 Octal 10 Decimal 16 Hexadecimal lt value gt specifies the default value of the field This is currently unused set it to Zero lt name gt specifies the driver name for this and each field description that follows until a new lt name gt is specified or a module type line is encountered This field is optional For example lt name gt allows descriptors with DevCon sections specific to certain drivers to be edited The following lines describe a descriptor name field descriptor name 5 c 0 0 The field consists of a long word offset to a string It is offset 12 bytes from the beginning of the module The display base is in ASCII 94 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilitie
164. each a abcd_efgh b c and d toj jiij_efgh 138 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tr tr a d k Transliterates standard input converting each abc_abcd efgh character contained in the expression abcd to k kkk_kkkk efgh tr abcd Transliterates standard input deleting each a b abcd_efgh c and d _efgh tr d abcd Transliterates standard input deleting each a b abcdefg c and d efg tr s dcba eocd Transliterates standard input converting d to e C to edenbeada o b to c anda tod Consecutively repeated output encoded characters the matching eocd are squeezed into a single character tr c a zA Z n Transliterates standard input converting all one word per line non alphabetic characters to newline characters one word per line Using Professional OS 9 139 tsmon The OS 9 Utilities Supervise Idle Terminals and Initiate the Login Command SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS tsmon lt opts gt lt dev gt tsmon supervises idle terminals and starts the login utility in a timesharing application Typically tsmon is executed as part of the start up procedure when the system is first brought up and remains active until the system shuts down The parameter lt dev gt specifies a terminal to monitor This is generally an SCF device You can specify up to 28 device name pathlists for tsmon to monitor When you type a carriage return on any of the specified paths tsmon automatically fork
165. eader pipe func footer lxfilter gt apdx The above makefile creates the file utils man utils man is created from three files chap1 chap2 and apdx Each of these files is in turn created from the files listed in their dependency lists If chap1 chap2 and or apdx have dependencies with a more recent date the commands following their respective dependency entries are executed If chap1 chap2 and or apdx are re created the commands following the initial dependency entry are executed 6 8 Using Professional OS 9 Making Files Example Two Compiling C Programs Example Two Compiling C Programs In this example make is used to compile high level language modules Each command and dependency is specified program xxx r yyy r cc Xxx r yyy r xf program xxx r xxx c d0 defs oskdefs h CC XXX C r yyy r yyy c d0 defs oskdefs h cc yyy c r This makefile specifies that program is made up of two r files xxx r and yyy r These files are dependent upon XXx C and yyy c respectively and both are dependent on the oskdefs h file If either xxx c or dO defs oskdefs h has a date more recent than xxx r the command CC XXX C r is executed If yyy c or dO defs oskdefs h is newer than yyy r then Cc yyy c r is executed If either of the former commands are executed the command Cc xxx r yyy r xf program is also executed In this example make specifies each command it must execute Often this is unnecessary as make uses specific
166. ed by lines longer than the physical width of the screen These long lines wrap around to the next line The system does not distinguish this and consequently does not count them prop erly tmode may be used to turn this feature on and off or to change the number of lines per screen Key Function tmode pause Turns the page pause mode on tmode nopause Turns the page pause mode off tmode pag 10 Sets the page length to ten lines 3 6 Using Professional OS 9 Basic Commands and Functions Basic Utilities Basic Utilities OS 9 provides over seventy standard utilities and built in shell commands The majority of them are used rarely if ever by casual users You will frequently use less than a dozen of them and less frequently use about a dozen more The utilities have been broken down into three groups to give you an idea of what you should and should not bother learning immediately You should get acquainted with the first group now and the second group as time permits If you plan to do advanced programming or systems level work you can study the third group at your convenience Group 1 Basic Utilities attr backup build chd chx copy date del deldir dir dsave echo edt format free help kill list makdir merge mfree pd pr procs rename set setime shell w wait Group 2 Programmer Utilities binex cfp cmp code compress count dump ex exbin expand frestore fsave grep load logout make printenv profile qsort save setenv tape tee
167. eduling e Having system state processes and user state processes Manipulating Process Priority When you execute processes on the command line you can change their initial priorities using the process priority modifiers discussed in the chapter on the shell This allows you to set the priority on crucial tasks higher so that they run sooner and more often than processes that are less crucial NOTE The initial priority is also a parameter for the fork and chain system calls Using D_MinPty and D_MaxAge to Alter the System s Process Scheduling The way OS 9 schedules processes can be affected by the D_MinPty and D_MaxAge system global vari ables D_MinPty and D_MaxAge are available to super users through the F SetSys system call These system variables can be used to effect the aging of processes Remember A process initial priority is aged each time it is passed by for execution while it is waiting for CPU time D_MinPty defines a minimum priority below which processes are neither aged nor considered candidates for execution Processes with priorities less than D_MinPty remain in the waiting queue and continue to hold any system resources that they held before D_MinPty was set 4 D_MinPty is usually set to zero All processes are eligible for aging and execution when this value is set to zero because all processes have an initial priority greater than zero If you have a critical process that needs to be run and several oth
168. edure a disk is divided into data sectors of a pre defined number of bytes These sectors in turn are allocated into groups called clusters The number of sectors per cluster is dependent on the storage capacity and physical characteristics of the given device This means that small amounts of free space given in sectors may not be divisible into the same number of files free displays the amount of unused disk space in the number of sectors and in the number of bytes It also displays the disk name its creation date and the cluster size of the device For example free Tazz H0 Wren V created on Oct 6 1989 Capacity 2347860 sectors 256 byte sectors 8 sector clusters 1477296 free sectors largest block 1356000 sectors 378187776 of 601052160 bytes 360 66 of 573 20 Mb free on media 62 347136000 bytes 331 05 Mb in largest free block free uses a 4K buffer by default To increase the buffer size use the b option For example to use a 10K buffer you could type free b 10 or free b10 mfree displays the address and size of unused memory available for allocation For example mfree Current total free RAM 164 00 K bytes Using Professional OS 9 3 9 Free and Mfree Basic Commands and Functions For even more information concerning the unused memory the e option may be used with mfree For example mfree e Minimum allocation size 4 00 K bytes Number of memory segments 6 Total RAM at sta
169. en b OS9Boot tape i dd v OS 9 68K Boot Tape t MySystem This example makes a bootable tape with no initialized data file The header information is displayed after writing the tape tapegen b OS9Boot h0 c 130 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tee tee Copy Standard Input to Multiple Output Paths SYNTAX tee lt path gt FUNCTION tee isa filter that copies all text lines from its standard input to its standard output and any other additional pathlists given as parameters To use the tee utility type tee and the pathlist s to which standard input is to be redirected This utility is generally used with input redirected through a pipe OPTION Displays the function and command syntax of tee EXAMPLES The example below uses a pipeline and tee to simultaneously send the output listing of dir to the terminal printer and a disk file dir e tee printer d0 dir listing This example sends the output of an assembler listing to a disk file and the printer asm pgm src tee pgm list gt printer This example broadcasts a message to three terminals echo WARNING System down in 10 minutes tee t1 t2 t3 Using Professional OS 9 131 tmode The OS 9 Utilities tmode Change Terminal Operating Mode SYNTAX FUNCTION tmode lt opts gt lt arglist gt tmode displays or changes the operating parameters of your terminal NOTE tmode can only be used for SCF or GFM dev
170. en more than 28 devices are to be monitored Multiple tsmon processes can be useful for other reasons For example you may want to keep modems or terminals suspected of hardware trouble isolated from other devices in the system Here is a sample procedure file for a timesharing system with terminals named T1 T2 T3 and T71 system startup procedure file echo Please Enter the Date and Time setime tsmon t1 t2 t3 amp tsmon t71 This terminal has been mis behaving NOTE This login procedure will not work until a file called d0 SYS Password with the appropriate entries has been created NOTE For more information on tsmon see the OS 9 Utilities section Using Professional OS 9 5 23 The Password File The Shell The Password File A password file is found in the SYS directory Each line in the password file is a login entry for a user The line has several fields separated by acomma The fields are User name The user name may contain up to 32 characters including spaces If this field is empty any name will match i Password The password may contain a maximum of 32 characters including spaces If this field is omitted no password is required for the specified user Group user ID number Both the group and the user portion of this number may be from 0 to 65535 0 0 is the super user The file security system uses this number as the system wide user ID to identify all processes initiated by the user The
171. ent than the other attributes It could be dangerous to be able to change directory files to normal files or a normal file to a directory For this reason you cannot use attr to turn the directory d attribute on use makdir to turn this attribute on Furthermore you can only use attr to turn the directory attribute off if the directory is empty Listing Files Use the list utility to display the contents of files By default list displays the lines of text on your terminal screen To examine a file type list followed by the name of the file For example list test Some programmers have been known to howl at full moons It is important to remember that you cannot list a directory If you type the command list USR the fol lowing error message and error number are returned list can t open USR Error 000 214 This means that you cannot access USR because it is a directory Using Professional OS 9 4 19 Copying Files The OS 9 File System list displays text files All distributed files in CMDS are executable program module files If you try to list the contents of a random access data file or an executable program module file you see what appears to be random data displayed on your screen This may also include unprintable characters such as escape or delete that could change your terminal s operating parameters If the operating characteristics of your terminal are affected first try turning the terminal off
172. ented The lt esc gt and H are transmitted unchanged VT100 cm E This terminal uses rows and columns offset by a blank character ABM85H Example Termcap Entries kalabm85 kimtron abm835 ce ET cm E cl Z se Ek so Ej up K sg 1 If two entries in the same termcap file are very similar one can be defined as identical to the other with certain exceptions To do this tc is used with the name of the similar terminal This capability must be the last in the entry All exceptions to the other terminal must appear before the tc listing If a capability must be cancelled use lt cap gt For example this might be a complete entry khlabm85hlkimtron abm85h se EG0 so EG4 tc abm8s35 End of Chapter 8 8 36 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management NOTES NOTES Using Professional OS 9 8 37 The OS 9 Utilities System Command Descriptions This chapter contains descriptions and examples of each of the OS 9 command programs While you gen erally execute these programs from a shell command line you can also call them from most other OS 9 programs At the time of this edition OS 9 supports 78 utilities and built in shell commands They range from com monly used functions such as dir chd and copy to advanced system management tools such as dcheck and iniz For quick reference purposes the format of the information on the utilities is standardized Each utility has a section concern
173. entions OS 9 uses is located in the chapter on the shell Formatting a Disk The format of OS 9 system disks vary by the type of disk drive and by manufacturer Usually the format is set to be the maximum capacity of the disk drive You can place several parameters on the command line with the format command sd for single density disks dd for double density disks SS for single sided disks ds for double sided disks Refer to your hardware documentation for the maximum capacity of your drives Refer also to the label of your system disk for the proper format of your backup copy Consult the format utility description in the OS 9 Utilities section for other available parameters Using Professional OS 9 2 3 Formatting a Disk Starting OS 9 Multiple Drive Format If your system has two disk drives place the system disk in the first drive and the new disk in the second drive The second drive is usually called d1 At the prompt type format the drive name of the new disk any desired options and press the lt return gt key to enter the command line format d1 This command line specifies that the disk in the second drive will be formatted as a double sided double density disk If your disk is different your options will be different Single Drive Format If your system has only one disk drive you will need to load the format utility into memory The load utility puts a copy of a program into the memory of
174. entry in the initial process table requires 4 bytes 8 2 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module 3A 3C 3E 40 42 Offset M Paths M SParam M SysGo M SysDev M Consol Name Initial Path Table Size This is the initial number of open paths in the system If this table becomes full it automatically expands as needed By default 64 open paths are allowed Each entry in the initial path table requires 4 bytes Offset to Parameter String for Startup Module This is the offset to the parameter string if any to be passed to the first executable module An offset of zero indicates that no parameter string is required The parameter string itself is located elsewhere usually near the end of the Init module First Executable Module Name Offset This is the offset to the name string of the first executable module usually SysGo or shell Default Directory Name Offset This is the offset to the initial default directory name string usually dO or nO The kernel does a chd and chx to this device prior to forking the ini tial device If the system does not use disks this offset must be zero Initial O Pathlist Name Offset This is the offset to the initial I O pathlist string This offset usually points to the TERM string This pathlist is opened as the standard I O path for the initial process It is generally used to set up the initial I O p
175. er is running even if paths to the device are repetitively opened and closed Five parameters need further explanation type par cs stop and baud These parameters are changed by xmode only if the device is iniz ed directly after the xmode changes are made This is usually done in the startup file or by first deiniz ing a file For example the following command sequence changes the baud rate of t1 to 9600 deiniz t1 xmode baud 9600 iniz t1 This type of command sequence changes the device descriptor and initializes it on the system Only the five parameters mentioned above need this special sequence changed All other xmode parameters are changed immediately Display the options function and command syntax of xmode 144 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities xmode Z z lt file gt Reads device names from standard input Reads device names from lt file gt Xmode Parameter Names Name Function upc noupc bsb nobsb bsl nobsl echo noecho If nolf null n pause nopause pag n Name Upper case only Lower case characters are converted automatically to upper case Upper and lower case characters are permitted Default Erase on backspace Backspace characters are echoed as a backspace space backspace sequence Default No erase on backspace Echoes single backspace only Backspace over line Lines are deleted by sending backspace space backs
176. er of characters in a file and optionally prints a breakdown consisting of each unique character found and the number of times it occurred To count the number of characters in a file enter count and the pathlist of the file to examine If no pathlist is specified count examines lines from standard input count recognizes the tab line feed and form feed characters as line delimiters By using the w option count counts the number of words in a file A word is defined as a sequence of nonblank non carriage return characters By using the l option the number of lines in a file is displayed A line is defined by zero or more characters ending in a carriage return OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of count b Counts characters and gives a breakdown of their occurrence C Counts characters Counts lines W Counts words Z Reads file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads file names from lt file gt EXAMPLE _ list filel first line second line third line count clw file1 file1 contains 34 characters file1 contains 6 words file1 contains 3 lines Using Professional OS 9 21 date The OS 9 Utilities date Display System Date and Time SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES date lt opts gt date displays the current system date and system time The system date and time are set by the setime utility Displays the options function and comm
177. er users have processes that they want to run use the process priority modifier to increase the priority of the critical process Then set D_MinPty to a value that is less than the priority you assigned to the critical process but greater than the priority of the other processes The critical process now continues using the CPU until another process with a priority greater than D_MinPty is entered into the waiting queue or the critical process is finished For example if D_MinPty is set to 500 and you set the priority of your process at 600 your process con tinues to use the CPU while processes with priorities less than 500 cannot run until D_MinPty is reset 8 26 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Using System State Processes and User State Processes CAVEAT D_MinPty is potentially dangerous If the minimum system priority is set above the priority of all running tasks the system will completely shut down and can only be recovered by a reset It is cru cial to restore D_MinPty to zero when the critical task finishes or to reset D_MinPty or a process priority in an interrupt service routine ok D_MaxAge defines a maximum age over which processes are not allowed to mature By default this value is set to zero When D_MaxAge is set to zero it has no effect on the processes waiting to use the CPU When set D_MaxAge essentially divides tasks into two classes low priority and high priority A low priority tas
178. ers lt control gt D Redisplays the current input line This is mainly used for hardcopy terminals that cannot erase deleted characters lt control gt H Backspaces to erase previous characters Most keyboards have a special lt backspace gt key that can be used directly without using the lt control gt key lt control gt Q Resumes the input and output previously stopped by lt control gt S The lt control gt Q function is known as X on lt control gt S Halts input and output until lt control gt Q is entered The lt control gt S function is known as X off This is a function used by many serial I O devices such as printers to control output speed lt control gt W Temporarily halts output so you can read the screen before data scrolls off Output re sumes when any other key is pressed See the section on the page pause feature lt control gt X Deletes line erases the entire current line ESCAPE or Indicates the end of file all OS 9 I O devices including terminals are lt control gt accessed as files This simulates the effect of reaching the end of a disk file Using Professional OS 9 3 5 The Page Pause Feature Basic Commands and Functions There are also two important control keys called interrupt keys They work differently than the line edit ing keys because they can be used at any time not just when a program has requested input They are normally used to halt or alter a running program Key Function lt
179. es etc C CMDS DEFS LIB MACROS SYS SYSMODS Contains Cstart source code and an example of trap handlers for user education Contains all the system utilities such as backup load setime etc Many of the utilities are discussed in the following chapters The OS 9 Utilities section con tains descriptions of each utility distributed with Professional OS 9 Contains several files of symbolic definitions that are useful when using programming languages Contains the device descriptor source for system customization For more information on changing device descriptors refer to the chapter on OS 9 system management Contains system library files Contains general macros used in driver development etc Contains system files including Errmsg Contains text for descriptions of error messages An appendix listing the error messages is included with this manual set password Contains a sample password file for timesharing systems The pass word file contains information such as the user name password initial process etc for each user For more information on the password file refer to the chapter on the shell in this manual and the login utility in the OS 9 Utilities section termcap Contains descriptions of your terminal characteristics For more in formation on the termcap file refer to the chapter on OS 9 system management Contains the source for SysGo and init for system customization For more information on SysG
180. escription ne Prints no error messages This is the default option The logout built in command is required to terminate the login shell lt eof gt does not cause the shell to terminate nl lt eof gt terminates the login shell lt eof gt is normally caused by pressing the lt Esc gt key This is the default option p Displays prompt The default prompt is a dollar sign p lt string gt Sets the current shell prompt equal to lt string gt np Does not display the prompt t Echoes input lines nt Does not echo input lines This is the default option V Verbose mode displays a message for each directory searched when executing a command NV Turns off verbose mode This is the default option X Aborts process upon error This is the default option NX Does not abort process upon error np shell np You can change shell options with either of two methods The first method involves typing the option on the command line or after the shell command For example Turns off the shell prompt Creates a new shell that does not prompt When the new shell is exited the original shell will prompt The second method uses set a special shell command To set shell options type set followed by the op tions desired When using the set command a hyphen is unnecessary before the letter option For ex ample set np Turns off the shell prompt shell setnp Creates a new shell that does not prompt When
181. essional OS 9 5 The Shell The Function of the Shell The shell is the OS 9 command interpreter program The shell translates the commands you enter into commands the operating system understands and executes This allows you to use commands such as dir copy and procs without knowing the complex machine language OS 9 understands The shell also provides a user configurable environment to personalize the way OS 9 works on your system You can use the shell to change the shell prompt send error messages to a file or backup your disk before you log out The shell command starts the shell program This command is automatically executed following system startup or after logging on to a timesharing terminal When the shell is ready for commands it displays the prompt This prompt indicates that the shell is active and waiting for a command from your keyboard You can now type a command line followed by a carriage return A number of options are available to the shell By default some are automatically turned on following startup or log on The available shell options are Option Description e lt file gt Prints error messages from lt file gt If no file is specified dd sys errmsg is used Without this option the shell prints only error numbers with a brief message description Each error is described in the appendix on error codes Using Professional OS 9 5 1 The Function of the Shell The Shell Option D
182. essresseessee 8 24 Formatting the Hard Disk areetan n aen a A E 8 24 Copying the Distribution Software onto the Hard Disk eeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeerereenn 8 25 Making the Hard Disk the System Boot Disk esseeeeesseeseeeeesisesssresseserssresseseresresss 8 26 Test Booting from the Hard Disk s scincs coescsesdaccadedanes Seaesudediws gees sanedonandyes tccendaeanas ans 8 26 Managing Processes in a Real time Environment ssssssesssessesseseseetesseesseesseesseesseee 8 27 Manipulating Process Priority seiricsucinean eni T E R 8 27 Using D_MinPty and D_MaxAge to Alter the System s Process Scheduling snasnnnnn pn E N R E 8 27 Using System State Processes and User State Processes 8 28 Using the Tmode and Xmode Utilities 42245 52 2 se syesseesoyesssGoudazscecactaceed xcanncoas esadons aasdewes 8 29 Using the Tmode Utility nnise e sodas EE a i E EE 8 29 Using the Xmode Utility esie aaa n a REE T aa E Tasa 8 30 The ernie ae File Formate caty2 So ccasesa ieacon r n a a E 8 31 Termcap Capabilities Troiae a E E ER E slag ie aah vaca Seen eaa tat esavauNeye 8 33 Example Termeap ENIES iarrtas eee e ee enar ea rte a tons EE ES ES 8 37 Using Professional OS 9 vi Preface Appendices A ASCII Conversion Chart B The ROM Debugger C Glossary OS 9 isa powerful and versatile operating system that can help you fully use your 68000 system s capa bilities OS 9 offers a wide selection of functions because it was designed to se
183. estriction if the mod ule group ID is zero super group then the module can be loaded only if the process group ID and the file s group ID is also zero If you are not the owner of a module and not a super user the public execute and or read access permissions must be set The module access permissions are divided into three Using Professional OS 9 73 load The OS 9 Utilities groups the owner the group and the public Only the owner of the module or a super user can set the module access permissions OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of load d Loads the file from your current data directory instead of your current execution directory Prints the pathlist of the file to be loaded Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLE mdir Module Directory at 14 44 35 kernel init p32cdlk rbf p32hd h0 p32fd d0 d1 ram r0 dd mdir load edit mdir Module Directory at 14 44 35 kernel init p32cl kk rbf p32hd h0 p32fd d0 d1 ram r0 dd edit mdir 74 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities login login Timesharing System Login SYNTAX FUNCTION login lt name gt lt password gt login is used in timesharing systems to provide login security It is automatically called by the timesharing monitor tsmon or you can explicitly invoke it after the initial login to change a terminal s user login reques
184. existence of system state processes System state processes are processes running in a supervisor or protected mode System state processes basically have unlimited access to system memory and other resources When a process in sys tem state wants to use the CPU it waits until it has the highest age Once it is available to use the CPU a process in system state runs until it finishes instead of running for a specified timeslice Processes that are in user state do not have access to all points in memory and do not have access to all of the commands When a process in user state gains time in the CPU it runs only for the time specified by the timeslice When it finishes using its timeslice it is entered back in the waiting queue according to its initial priority Using Professional OS 9 8 27 Using the Tmode and Xmode Utilities OS 9 System Management Using the Tmode and Xmode Utilities The tmode and xmode utilities are also available to help you customize OS 9 Use the tmode utility to display or change the operating parameters of the user s terminal tmode affects open paths not the device descriptor itself so the changes made by it are temporary The changes made by tmode are inherited if the paths are duplicated but not if the paths are opened explicitly The xmode utility is similar to tmode Use xmode to display or change the initialization parameters of any SCF type device such as a video display printer RS 232 port etc xmo
185. file1 attr npwpr attr Ip Displays the current attributes of myfile Turns off the public read and public write permissions Turns on both the public and owner read write and execute permissions Displays the attributes of the file names read from standard input Displays the attributes of the file names read from file1 Turns off public write and turns on public read for all files in the directory Lists the attributes of all files that have names ending in Ip Using Professional OS 9 backup The OS 9 Utilities backup Make a Backup Copy of a Disk SYNTAX FUNCTION ERRORS backup lt opts gt lt srcpath gt lt destpath gt backup physically copies all data from one device to another A physical copy is performed sector by sector without regard to file structures In most cases the devices specified must have the same format and must not have defective sectors In the following discussions the source disk is the disk you are backing up The destination disk is the disk to which you are copying Single Drive Backup A single drive backup requires exchanging disks in and out of the disk drive NOTE Before backing up a disk you should write protect the source disk with the appropriate write protect mechanism to prevent accidentally confusing the source disk and the destination disk during exchanges To begin the backup procedure put the source disk in the drive and type bac
186. files within the specified directory with their attributes the size of the file and the sector where the file is stored The following example uses the file structure shown in Figure 4f dir usr chris e Directory of USER CHRIS 12 30 00 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 89 06 17 1601 wr 3458 5744 letter 12 4 89 07 03 1148 d wr 104A0 15944 PROG 12 4 89 05 13 1417 d wr DODO 11113 TEXT 4 12 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Chd and Chx Moving Around in the File System The r option displays the contents of the specified directory and any files contained within its subdirectories Using Figure 4f as an example typing dir usr chris r lists the following Directory of 12 30 15 PROG TEXT letter Directory of PROG 12 30 15 funct main Directory of TEXT 12 30 15 manual You can use the dir options with each other Typing dir er displays all files within the current data directory all files within its sub directories and provides an extended listing of their attributes sizes etc Chd and Chx Moving Around in the File System The chd and chx utilities allow you to travel around the file system e The chd utility allows you to change your current data directory e The chx utility allows you to change your current execution directory To change your current data directory type chd followed by a full or relative pathlist For example if your current data
187. fined load searches each directory specified by PATH until lt file gt is successfully loaded from a directory This corresponds to the shell execution search method using the PATH environment variable By using the l option load prints the pathlist of the successfully loaded file The names of the modules are added to the module directory If a module is loaded with the same name as a module already in memory the module having the highest revision level is kept File Security The OS 9 file security mechanism enforces certain requirements regarding owner and access permissions when loading modules into the module directory You must have file access permission to the file to be loaded If the file is loaded from an execution directory the execute permission must be set If the file is loaded from a directory other than the execution directory and the d option is specified only the read permission r is required NOTE Unless the file has public execute and or public read permission only the own er of the file or a super user can load the file Use the dir e command to examine a file s owner and access permissions You must have module access permission to the file being loaded This is not to be con fused with the file access permission The module owner and access permissions are stored in the module header use ident to examine them To prevent ordinary users from loading super user programs OS 9 enforces the following r
188. for each active device known to OS 9 devs does not display information for uninitialized devices The devs display header lists the system name the OS 9 version number and the max imum number of devices allowed in the device table Each line in the devs display contains five fields Name Description Device Name of the device descriptor Driver Name of the device driver File Mgr Name of the file manager Data Ptr Address of the device driver s static storage Links Device use count NOTE Each time a user executes a chd to an RBF device the use count of that device is incremented by one Consequently the Links field may be artificially high OPTION Displays the function and command syntax of devs Using Professional OS 9 29 devs The OS 9 Utilities EXAMPLE The following example displays the device table for a system named Tazz devs TAZZ_VME147 OS 9 68030 V2 4 x82 128 devices max Device Driver File Mgr Data Ptr Links term sc8x30 scf 007fda40 7 ho rbscces rbf 007fcbe0 31175 d0 rb320 rbf 007e94a0 1 dd rbscces rbf 007fcbe0 23 t10 sc335 scf 006d3a70 5 tll sc335 scf 006d3850 5 t12 sc335 scf 006d3630 5 t13 sc335 scf 006d3410 5 t20 sc335 scf 006d31f0 5 t21 sc335 scf 006d2fd0 5 t22 sc335 scf 006d2db0 5 t23 sc335 scf 006d2b90 5 5803 rb320 rbf 007e94a0 20 3803 rb320 rbf 007e94a0 1 mt2 sbgiga sbf 006d9640 1 nd n9026 nfm 006d63a0 372 nil null scf 006d6340 10 socket sockdv
189. format The following information is displayed before formatting begins Disk Formatter OS 9 68K V2 4 Delta MVME147 68030 Format Data Fixed values Physical floppy size 5 1 4 Universal Format Sector size 256 Sectors track 16 Track zero sect trk 16 Sector offset 1 Track offset 1 LSN offset 000000 Total physical cylinders 80 Minimum sect allocation 8 Variables Recording format MFM all tracks Track density in TPI 96 Number of log cylinders 79 Number of surfaces 2 Sector interleave offset 1 Formatting device d0 proceed You can change the values in the variables section when formatting floppy disks by command line options or by answering n to the prompt format asks for any required options not given on the command line When formatting hard disks answering N to the prompt returns control to the shell You can change hard disk parameters only by command line options or by changing the device descriptor The values in the Fixed values section can only be changed by altering the device de scriptor module of the specific unit Format on Autosize Devices If format determines that the device has the autosize feature format performs an SS_DSize SetStat call to the drive to request the capacity of the device Typically the driver then queries the actual drive The value returned to format is the capacity of the device Because format performs no calculations when determining t
190. gger Basic Debugger Commands r lt num gt Set relocation register to lt num gt End of Appendix B Using Professional OS 9 Basic Debugger Commands The ROM Debugger B 10 Using Professional OS 9 C Glossary application program A program that needs an operating system environment to execute For example word processing accounting or spreadsheet programs ASCII The standard code of symbols including alphanumerics used in a computer environment ASCII stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange attributes A set of status codes that control access to a file for security Also indicates if a file is a directory or not bit An abbreviation for binary digit This is the most basic unit of information used by a computer It is capable of two values one and zero bit map A binary table in which each bit represents a specific location of memory accessable to the central processing unit CPU backup A utility provided with OS 9 that allows you to create a duplicate copy of an existing disk Also the copied disk boot bootstrap or cold start A startup function that initially loads the operating system into memory and starts it after the com puter is first turned on or after it is reset Using Professional OS 9 C 1 Glossary Glossary byte Unit of memory consisting of 8 binary on off switches bits cold start see boot command A request made from the keyboar
191. gger are not affected by the relocation register offset It is often convenient to set the relocation register to the beginning physical address of a program code section or data area Subsequent address commands can use the same offsets printed on assembler listings Any address expression consisting of only a number no operator automatically has the relocation value added The value of the relocation register can also be used in expressions or changed by referring to the register as r Using Professional OS 9 B 3 The Debugger and Traps The ROM Debugger The Debugger and Traps Many of the debugger functions are implemented using traps In particular breakpoints cannot be used in ROM because breakpoints work by transparently replacing the existing instruction opcodes with opcodes that cause an illegal instruction trap Obviously instructions in ROM cannot be replaced in this manner The e command alternately enables and disables the debugger When the debugger is enabled it handles all address errors bus errors illegal instructions and trace traps The level 7 autovector trap is also re served for use with an optional abort switch Before the OS 9 kernel is started traps not deliberately set by the debugger cause appropriate diagnostic messages to be displayed on the console When the debugger is disabled all traps are passed to OS 9 To run the OS 9 user debug utility after the system is up the ROM debugger must b
192. har acter is typed in the first character position edt tries to process the character as an edt command edt command format is very similar to BASIC s editor edt determines the size of the file to edit and uses the returned size plus 2K as the edit buffer If the file does not already exist the edit buffer is initialized to 2K When the end of the edit buffer is reached a message is displayed Displays the options function and command syntax for edt b lt num gt k_ Allocates a buffer area equal to the size of the file plus lt num gt k bytes If the file does not exist a buffer of the indicated size is assigned for the new file 42 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities edt EDT COMMANDS All edt commands begin in the first character position of a line lt num gt lt esc gt lt cr gt lt num gt lt num gt lt space gt d lt num gt l lt num gt Moves the cursor to line number lt num gt Closes the file and exits q also does this Moves the cursor down one line carriage return Moves the cursor down lt num gt lines Default is one Moves the cursor up lt num gt lines Default is one Inserts lines Deletes lt num gt lines If lt num gt is not specified the default value of lt num gt is one Lists lt num gt lines lt num gt may be positive or negative The default value of lt nuUM gt is one Lists all lines in the entire file Quits the editing session
193. har gt Specifies the field separation character If an asterisk question mark or comma are used as field separation characters the option and the character must be enclosed by quotation marks f lt num gt Specifies the sort field NOTE Only one f field is allowed on a com mand line Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt qsort file1 file2 file3 Sorts files and displays dir ue qsort f 7 Sorts extended directory listing by entry name field 2 qsort file f 2 c Sorts file by field 2 using an asterisk as the field separation character qsort file f 2 c Sorts file by field 2 using a comma as the field separation character qsort z Reads file names from standard input 106 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities rename rename Change File Name SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES rename lt opts gt lt path gt lt new name gt rename assigns a new name to the mass storage file specified in the pathlist To rename a file type rename followed by the name of the file to rename followed by the new name You must have write permission for the file to change its name You cannot use the names or for lt path gt Displays the option function and command syntax of rename X Indicates that lt path gt starts at the current execution directory You must have exe
194. he capacity the t and ss ds options do not affect the capacity of the device Using Professional OS 9 51 format The OS 9 Utilities The following information is displayed before formatting commences Disk Formatter OS 9 68K V2 4 Delta MVME147 68030 Format Data Fixed values Disk type hard Sector size 512 Disk capacity 208936 sectors 106975232 bytes Sector offset 0 Track offset 0 LSN offset 000000 Minimum sect allocation 8 Variables Sector interleave offset 1 Formatting device h1 proceed When formatting hard disks answering N to the prompt returns control to the shell You can only change the sector interleave offset The other values cannot be changed by the format utility The values in the Fixed values section can only be changed by altering the device de scriptor module of the specific unit Continuing the Format Procedure The formatting process works as follows i The disk surface is physically initialized and sectored i Each sector is read back and verified If the sector fails to verify after sev eral attempts the offending sector is excluded from the initial free space on the disk As the verification is performed track numbers are displayed on the standard output device for non autosize devices logical sector numbers are displayed for autosize devices The disk allocation map root directory and identification sector are written to the first few
195. he dependency list and all the file modification dates If it cannot find a file to examine its date it assumes a date of 1 00 00 00 00 indicating the necessity to update the file To update the date on a file without remaking it use the t option make merely opens the file for update and then closes it thus making the date current If you are quite explicit about your makefile dependencies and do not want make to assume anything use the b option to turn off the built in rules governing implicit file dependencies 82 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities make Implicit Rules Definitions and Assumptions Any time a command line is generated make assumes the target file is a program to compile Therefore if the target file is not a program to compile make sure the command entries are included for each dependency list make uses the following definitions and rules when forced to create a command line Object Files Files with no suffixes An object file is made from a relocatable file and is linked when it needs to be made Relocatable Files Files appended by the suffix r Relocatable files are made from source files and are assembled or compiled if they need to be made Source Files Files having one of the following suffixes a c f or p Default Compiler cc Default Assembler r68 Default Linker CC Default Directory for All Files current data directory NOTE Only use the default linker
196. he parent directory dir text directory of text 14 06 47 manual The following command changes the current data directory from PROG to ELLEN chd ellen ELLEN is accessed from PROG using the relative path ellen hO li 4 DEFS CMDS SYSMODS C startup USR SYS IO MACROS LIB list copy etc CHRIS PAUL ELLEN Yo ed TEXT letter PROG map gee ick c fall ice green m manual funct main Figure 4g Accessing Directories Using a Relative Path You can use any number of periods to access higher directories One period is added for each additional level An error is not returned if you specify a greater number of directory levels above your current data directory than actually exist Instead this indicates the root directory on your system For example this command displays the contents of the root directory Using Professional OS 9 4 15 Using the Pd Utility The OS 9 File System This may be helpful if you are not sure how far down you are in the directory structure The next example changes your current data directory from PROG to MACROS chd macros Using the Pd Utility When the file system becomes complex you may become confused as to where the directory you are cur rently working in is located in relation to the overall file system The pd utility displays the complete pathlist from the root directory to your cur
197. he person who created the file J A user with a group user ID of 0 0 is referred to as a super user A super user can access and manipulate any file or directory on the system regardless of the file s ownership On multi user systems the system manager generally assigns the group user ID for each user This number is stored in a special file called a password file A super user on a multi user system is generally the system manager although other people such as group managers or project leaders may also be super users NOTE Password files are discussed in the chapter on the shell On single user systems users have super user status by default Attributes and the File Security System File use and security are based on file attributes Each file has eight attributes These attributes are displayed in an eight character listing The term permission is used when one of the eight possible attribute characters is set Permission determines who can access a file or directory and how it can be used If a permission is not valid for the file or directory being examined a hyphen is in its position 4 4 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System OS 9 File Storage Here is an attribute listing for a directory in which all permissions are valid dsewrewr By convention attributes are read from right to left They are Attribute Abbreviation Description Owner Read Owner Write Owner Execute Public Rea
198. he process to kill from procs kill is used in the following manner Using Professional OS 9 5 31 Stopping Procedures The Shell kill lt proc num gt For example if you want to terminate a process called xhog you would first execute a procs procs Id PId Grp Usr Prior MemSiz Sig S CPU Time Age Module amp I O 3 2 7 03 128 4 75k Ow 4 11 01 13 shell lt gt gt gt term 43 7 03 5 4 00k Oa 12 42 06 00 14 xhog lt gt gt gt term 5 3 7 03 128 850k 0 0 08 00 00 procs lt gt gt term From procs you can see that the process number for xhog is 4 You then type kill 4 When you execute procs again xhog is no longer shown a To use the kill utility Get the process number using the procs utility e Type kill lt proc num gt Either of these methods terminate any process running in the background with one exception if a process is waiting for I O it may not die until the current I O operation is complete Therefore if you terminate a process and procs shows it still exists it is probably waiting for the output buffer to be flushed before it can die NOTE You must either own the procedure or be the super user to kill a specified process 5 32 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Error Reporting Error Reporting Many programs including the shell use OS 9 s standard error reporting function This displays a brief description of the error and an error number on the standard error path An appendix
199. he program terminates it reports any errors returned If there are more input lines the shell gets the next line and the process is repeated This sample command line calls a program prog 12K sourcefile l j gt p In this example prog Is the keyword 12K Is a modifier which requests that an alternate memory size be assigned to this process In this case 12K is used as memory sourcefile l j Are parameters passed to prog gt Is a modifier which redirects output to a file or device In this case gt redirects the output to the printer p p Is the system s printer Special Command Line Features In addition to basic command line processing the shell facilitates e Memory allocation e I O redirection including filters e Process priority e Wildcard pattern matching e Multi tasking concurrent execution These functions are accessed through the use of execution modifiers separators and wildcards There are virtually unlimited combinations of ways to use these capabilities Characters which comprise execution modifiers separators and wildcards are stripped from the part s of the command line passed to a program as parameters These characters cannot be passed as parameters to programs unless contained in quotes Modifiers Additional memory size A Process priority gt Redirect output lt Redirect input gt gt Redirect error output 5 8 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Command Line
200. he system s general memory lists That is the RAM disk must be outside the system s knowledge If it is located in a mem ory search list known to the system s general memory lists the RAM disk may be wiped out because the memory is assumed to be un allocated and may later be given to another module In addition the format protect bit must be set for non volatile RAM disks and the port address must be greater than or equal to 1024 Using Professional OS 9 8 15 Making a Startup File OS 9 System Management Making a Startup File Using bootfiles is not the only way of loading modules and devices into memory at the time of startup A startup procedure is executed each time OS 9 is booted and the standard SysGo is used On disk based systems the startup procedure executes a Startup file The startup file is located in the root directory of the system disk 4 The startup file is an OS 9 procedure file It contains OS 9 commands to be executed immediately after booting the system While some modules and devices such as the kernel should be loaded from the boottlist file loading most modules and devices from the startup file can be advantageous For example it is easier to upgrade a system by adding modules to the startup file or the files contained in the startup file To change these files you simply use a text editor and make the changes To change the bootlist file you must also use the os9gen utility Reme
201. hell processes them by calling itself recursively as a new process to execute the enclosed program list For example the following commands produce the same result dir d0 dir d1 gt p dir d0 gt p dir d1 gt p However one subtle difference exists The printer is continuously controlled by one user in the first ex ample while in the second case another user could conceivably use the printer in between the dir com mands Command grouping can be used to cause a group of programs to be executed sequentially with respect to each other and concurrently with respect to the shell that initiated them For example del backup list stuff_ gt p amp This command begins to sequentially delete all files ending in backup and then list to the printer the contents of any files that start with stuff_ At the same time a prompt will appear indicating that the shell is waiting for a new command A useful extension of this form is to construct pipelines consisting of sequential and or concurrent programs For example dir CMDS dir SYS makeuppercase transmit This command line outputs the dir listings of CMDS and SYS in that order through a pipe to the program makeuppercase The total output from makeuppercase is then piped to the program transmit It is important to remember that OS 9 processes commands from left to right In the following example the dir command is executed first instead of the procs and del co
202. hen the specified escape character is typed Obviously you should select the escape character carefully so it will not be the same as one used in normal communications with the host Infrequently used characters such as the tilde are recommended The Download Command The download command passes a command to the host system which causes it to send program data to the target system via the communications link The program is loaded into RAM memory The program must be in the industry standard Motorola S record format Only S1 S2 S3 S7 S8 and S9 record formats are recognized The binex utility must be used to convert the OS 9 linker output from its normal binary format to S record format binex is a standard utility on professional OS 9 systems li censed OS 9 distribution packages and Port Paks A Unix version is included in the distribution packages for VAX systems NOTE Refer to the OS 9 Utilities section for more information on the binex utility The S record format has data records that include a load address that specifies where to load the program in memory OS 9 programs are position independent so the load address always starts at address zero As S records are received the load addresses are added to the debugger s relocation register value to de termine the actual address in RAM where the program is stored NOTE You must download all program modules before OS 9 is executed for the first time Otherwise the modules wil
203. ices To change the operating parameters of your terminal type tmode and any parameters you want changed If no parameters are given the present values for each parameter are displayed Otherwise the parameter s given in the parameter list are processed You can give any number of parameters separated by spaces or commas If a parameter is set to zero OS 9 no longer uses the parameter until it is re set to a recognizable code For example to set xon and xoff to zero type tmode xon 0 xoff 0 Consequently OS 9 does not recognize xon and xoff until the values are re set To re set the value of a parameter to its default type tmode and specify the parameter with no value This re sets the parameter to the default value given in this manual Use the w lt path gt option to specify the path number to be affected If none is given standard input is affected NOTE If you use tmode in a shell procedure file you must use the option w lt path gt to specify one of the standard paths 0 1 or 2 to change the terminal s operating characteristics The change remains in effect until the path is closed Fora permanent change to a device characteristic you must change the device descriptor You may alter the device descriptor to set a device s initial operating parameters using xmode See the xmode utility for more information You cannot change the following five parameters by tmode type par cs stop and baud These are include
204. ign File names may not contain spaces Instead use the underscore _ or the period to improve the readability of file and directory names OS 9 does not distinguish upper case letters from lower case letters The names FRED and fred are considered the same name NOTE By OS 9 convention directory names are in upper case and file names are in low er case This allows you to easily distinguish directories from files This is only a recom mendation for easy use you may develop your own style Here are some examples of legal names raw data 2 project_review_backup X6809 SHIP DIR we 12345 Here are some examples of illegal names Max min is not a legal character open orders name cannot contain a space this name obviously has more than 28 characters too long NOTE File names that start with a period are not displayed by dir unless the a option is used This allows you to hide files within a directory Creating Files You can create files in many ways Text files are generally created with the build utility the edt utility or the UMACS text editor These file building tools are provided with the Professional OS 9 package for your convenience Using Professional OS 9 4 17 Examining File Attributes with Attr The OS 9 File System Use the build utility to create short text files To use the build utility type build followed by the name of the file you want to create build responds with the prompt
205. ing of one module by several tasks or users at the same time For example if four users want to run BASIC at the same time only one copy of the BASIC program module will be loaded into memory Other operating systems would typically load four exact copies of BASIC into memory thus requiring 300 more memory The shared module system is com pletely automatic and usually transparent to the user Another advantage of memory modules is that frequently used functions can share common library modules For example a standard OS 9 module called Math provides basic floating point arithmetic operations for virtually all programming languages and programs Again this eliminates the need for each program to include its own math package It also means that if you add a hardware floating point processor to your system you only need to replace this one module and all your other software will automatically be converted without modification In addition large and complex programs can be split up into smaller testable modules End of Chapter 1 1 6 Using Professional OS 9 2 Starting OS 9 Booting OS 9 Before using OS 9 on your computer you must boot the system Booting is also called a cold start or bootstrapping t involves the computer reading a portion of the system disk or tape into memory If your system is a standard disk based computer the system disk contains all the modules that make up OS 9 The system disk usually contains other fi
206. ing syntax function options if any examples and any special uses The utilities are broken down into three categories Basic Utilities Every user should become familiar with these utilities Many of them have been discussed in the earlier chapters because of their importance attr backup build chd chx copy date del deldir dir dsave echo edt format free help kill list makdir merge mfree pd pr procs rename set setime shell Ww wait Using Professional OS 9 1 System Command Descriptions The OS 9 Utilities Programmer Utilities These utility programs are extremely helpful to the intermediate or ad vanced programmer They allow greater exploration of OS 9 s timesharing environment and more dynamic file manipulation binex cfp cmp code compress count dump ex exbin expand frestore fsave grep load logout make printenv profile qsort save setenv tape tee touch tmode tr unsetenv System Management Utilities These utility programs are used primarily by system managers and advanced assembly language programmers Beginning programmers rarely need to use these commands break dcheck deiniz devs diskcache events fixmod ident iniz irqs link login mdir moded os9gen romsplit setpr sleep tapegen tsmon unlink xmode Formal Syntax Notation Each command section includes a syntactical description of the command line These symbolic descriptions use the following notations Enclosed items are optional Enclosed items
207. ing to use the RAM disk a library and definition file structure may be built on the RAM disk The next line in the startup file executes the init ramdisk procedure file init ramdisk is located in the root directory It sets up LIB and DEFS directories on dd To name the RAM disk r0 you must change a single line in init ramdisk change chd dd to chd r0 NOTE RAM disks are discussed elsewhere in this chapter Multi User Systems tsmon t1 amp The tsmon utility is used to make your system a multi user system This utility supervises idle terminals and initiates the login procedure for multi user systems The startup file command line tsmon t1 amp ini tiates the time sharing monitor on the serial port t1 tsmon can monitor up to 28 device name pathlists Therefore if you have multiple devices for tsmon to monitor you can specify up to 28 devices on each tsmon command line You can use the ex built in shell command to execute tsmon without creating another shell This conserves system memory For example ex tsmon term t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 amp When a carriage return is typed on any of the specified paths tsmon automatically forks login and stan dard I O paths are opened to the device The login procedure uses the password file located in the SYS directory for individual login validation The provided password file has two example login entries Each of the fields in an entry in the password file is explained in the chapter on the shell and
208. inks is assigned the value one links is incremented each time a process links to the event An event cannot be deleted unless the link count is zero If no active events are currently on the system events displays the message No active events OPTION Displays the function and command syntax of events 44 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities events EXAMPLE SEE ALSO Calvin OS 9 68K V2 4 eventID name evtfffe4000 irgqfffe4000 SysMbuf net_input Sur00227750 Str002261f0 Stw002261f0 Str00227380 Stw00227380 Str00232a50 Stw00232a50 Str0020ac30 Stw0020ac30 pkm00i f000e pkm000 10000f teln 1 130012 Str0020adf0 140013 Stw0020adf0 value The following example displays the active system events for a system named Calvin W inc S inc links 0 1 1 1 121952 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt erf stecocots F Event service request in the OS 9 Technical Manual Using Professional OS 9 45 ex The OS 9 Utilities ex SYNTAX FUNCTION EXAMPLES Execute Program as Overlay ex lt path gt lt arglist gt ex is a built in shell command that causes the process executing the command to start executing another program It permits a transition from the shell to another program without creating another process thus conserving system memory ex is often used when the shell is called from another program to execute a specific pro gram after which the shell is
209. input data These keyboard signals are useful to get the shell s attention while it is waiting for a process to terminate If the shell is waiting for keyboard input and lt control gt E is typed the shell forwards the keyboard abort signal to the current process and immediately prompts for command input sleep 500 E is typed abort The abort message is typed by the shell to acknowledge receipt of the interrupt If the shell is waiting for keyboard input and lt control gt C is typed the shell stops waiting for the current process to terminate and prompts for command input This action is similar to using an ampersand on the command line For example sleep 500 C is typed 8 It is important to remember that using lt control gt C in this fashion is possible only if the command in question has not yet performed I O to the terminal The signal is only received by the last process to perform I O If the shell has not yet finished setting up the command for execution the signal causes the shell to abort the operation and return the prompt lt control gt C stops the shell from waiting for the process to terminate and returns a prompt for a command lt control gt E forwards the keyboard abort signal to the process and immediately prompts for input You can also use the kill utility to terminate background processes by specifying the process number of the process to kill Obtain the process number of t
210. ion the final product is referred to as the target file and the files that make up the target file are referred to as dependents zee A makefile contains three types of entries e Dependency entries Command entries e Comment entries A dependency entry specifies the relationship of a target file and the dependents used to build the target file The entry has the following syntax lt target gt lt dependent gt lt dependent gt Using Professional OS 9 6 1 dependents Making Files The list of files following the target file is known as the dependency list Any number of dependents can be listed in the dependency list Any number of dependency entries can be listed in a makefile A dependent in one entry may also be a target file in another entry There is however only one main target file in each makefile The main target file is usually specified in the first dependency entry in the makefile A command entry specifies the particular command that must be executed to update if neces sary a particular target file make updates a target file only if its dependents are newer than itself If no instructions for update are provided make attempts to create a command entry to perform the operation make recognizes a command entry by a line beginning with one or more spaces or tabs Any legal OS 9 command line is acceptable More than one command entry can be given for any dependency entry Each command entr
211. ion directory type dir xe To display the contents of the current directory and all directories one level below this directory type dir r 1 The next example displays the entire description of all files within the current directory This includes files within all subdirectories of the current directory dir er This example displays all directory and file names that begin with B Dir n B Using Professional OS 9 33 diskcache The OS 9 Utilities diskcache Enable Disable or Display Status of Cache SYNTAX diskcache lt opts gt lt dev gt FUNCTION diskcache enables disables or displays the status of the cache Caching may be enabled for any type of RBF device and more than one device may be cached at a time The total amount of system memory used for caching all enabled drives can be set by the utility s t option If not explicitly defined the diskcache utility automatically selects a reasonable value based upon the amount of free system memory Caching may be dynamically enabled or disabled on a per drive basis while the system is running using the e and d options Statistical information regarding the hit miss ratios amount of memory allocated etc can be inspected on a drive by drive basis using the l option An example output of this information follows Current size 1047552 Size limit 1048576 Device h0 1 1 Requests Sectors Hits Zaps gt 2 Xfr Hit Rate Reads 47592 55436 21874
212. ional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Loading Utilities Into Memory load z sys loadfile Previous versions of the Professional OS 9 package had the following commented line in the startup file load utils This method involved creating a utils file by merging the desired utilities into a single file in the commands directory While this method may still be used using loadfile is preferable because it uses less disk space and is easier to edit Loading the Default Device Descriptor load bootobjs dd r0 Many OS 9 compilers and application programs look for definition files and libraries in directories located on the default system device The default system device is known as dd dd may be defined as any disk device but it is usually synonymous for one of the following devices rO RAM Disk hO Hard Disk do Floppy Disk If a default device is to be used dd and the device descriptor is not in the bootfile then you must load the device descriptor The next line in the startup file loads the device descriptor The default device is the RAM disk named r0 If you want another device to be the default device descriptor change the r0 extension to reflect the appropriate device If you have a dd device in your bootfile or if no default device is to be used leave this line as a comment Using Professional OS 9 8 19 Multi User Systems OS 9 System Management Initializing the RAM Disk init ramdisk gt nil gt gt nil amp If you are go
213. ions function and command syntax of fsave b lt int gt Allocates lt int gt k buffer size to read files from source disk d lt dev gt Specifies the target device to store the backup The default target de vice is mt0 Does not echo the file pathlist as it is saved to the target device f lt path gt Saves to a file g lt int gt Specifies a backup of files owned by group number lt int gt only j lt num gt Specifies the minimum system memory request I lt int gt Specifies the level of backup to be performed m lt path gt Specifies the pathlist of the date backup log file to be used The de fault is nO sys backup_dates p Turns off the mount volume prompt for the first volume S Displays the pathlists of all files needing to be saved and the size of the entire backup without actually executing the backup procedure t lt dirpath gt Specifies an alternate location for the temporary index file u lt int gt Specifies a backup of files owned by user number lt int gt only V Does not verify the disk volume when mounted x lt int gt Pre extends the temporary file lt int gt is specified in kilobytes EXAMPLES The following command specifies a level 0 backup of the current directory It assumes the device mt0O is to be used nO SYS backup_dates is used as the backup log file fsave This command specifies a level 2 backup of the current directory The device mt1 is used n
214. ips the specified number of blocks The default is one block If lt num gt is negative the tape skips backward e lt num gt Frases a specified number of blocks of tape f lt num gt Skips the specified number of tapemarks The default is one tapemark If lt num gt is negative the tape skips backward O Puts tape off line r Rewinds the tape S Determines the block size of the device t Retensions the tape w lt num gt Writes a specified number of tapemarks The default is one tapemark Z Reads a list of device names from standard input The default device is mt0 z lt file gt Reads a list of device names from lt file gt If you specify more than one option tape executes each option function in a specific order Therefore you can skip ahead a specified number of blocks erase and then rewind the tape all with the same command 128 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tape The order of option execution is as follows J lt gt O y Gets device name s from the Z option Skips the number of tapemarks specified by the f option Skips the number of blocks specified by the b option Writes a specified number of tapemarks Erases a specified number of blocks of tape Rewinds the tape Puts the tape off line EXAMPLES tape mt0 r Rewinds tape on device mt0 tape f 5 e 2 r Skips forward five files on device mt0 erases the next two blocks and then rewinds the t
215. ished a new entry is made in the file indicating the date name level etc of the current backup During the discussion of the actual fsave procedure references to fsave s options are made The options are Option Description Displays the use of fsave b lt int gt Allocates lt int gt k buffer size to read files from the source disk d lt dev gt Specifies the target device to store the backup The default is mt0 e Does not echo file pathlists as they are saved to the target device f lt path gt Saves to the file specified by lt path gt g lt int gt Specifies a backup of files owned by group number lt int gt only j lt number gt Specifies the minimum system memory request I lt int gt Specifies the level of the backup to be performed m lt path gt Specifies the pathlist of the date backup log file to use The default is nO sys backup_dates p Turns off the mount volume prompt for the first volume S Displays the pathlists of all files needing to be saved and the size of the entire backup without actually executing the backup procedure t lt dirpath gt Specifies the alternate location for the temporary index file 7 2 Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The fsave Procedure Option Description u lt int gt Specifies a backup of files owned by user number lt int gt only V Does not verify the disk volume when mounted x lt int gt Pre extends the temporary file
216. ize the programs so the output of one never gets ahead of the input request of the next program in the pipeline This ensures that data cannot flow through a pipeline any faster than the slowest program can process it Any program that reads data from standard input can read from a pipe Any program that writes data to standard output can write data to a pipe Several utilities are designed so that the standard output of one can be piped to the standard input of another For example dir e pr This example causes the standard output of dir to be piped to the standard input of the pr utility instead of on the terminal screen pr reads the output of dir even though pr reads standard input by default pr then displays the result dir e pipe tem pr WRITES READS The standard output of the dir e command is piped to the standard input of the pr command through an un named pipe The pr utility displays the results of the dir e command OS 9 uses two types of pipes named pipes and un named pipes 5 16 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Command Line Processing Un named Pipes Un named pipes are created by the shell when an input line with one or more exclamation point sepa rators is processed For each exclamation point the standard output of the program named to the left of the exclamation point is redirected by a pipe to the standard input of the program named to the right of the exclamation point
217. k is any task with a priority below D_MaxAge Low priority tasks continue aging until they reach the D_MaxAge cutoff but they are not executed unless there are no high priority tasks waiting to use the CPU A high priority task is any task with a priority above D_MaxAge A high priority task will receive the entire available CPU time but it will not be aged When the high priority task s are inactive the low pri ority tasks are run For example if D_MaxAge is set to 2000 and three processes with initial priorities of 128 are in the active queue the processes run just as if D_MaxAge had not been set Then if a process with an initial priority of 2500 is entered into the active queue it receives CPU time when the process currently in the CPU has finished Once using the CPU the high priority process runs uninterrupted until a process with a higher priority enters the active queue or the process finishes When the process finishes executing the low pri ority processes will again be able to use the CPU NOTE Any process performing a system call is not pre empted until the call is finished unless the pro cess voluntarily gives up its timeslice This exception is made because these processes may be executing critical routines that affect shared system resources and could be blocking other unrelated processes Using System State Processes and User State Processes The second method that OS 9 uses to manage real time priority processing is the
218. k or the drive it is in If an error occurs during the second pass the problem is with the destination disk If backup repeatedly fails on the second pass reformat the disk to make sure it has no bad sectors If the disk reformats correctly try the backup procedure again Using Professional OS 9 2 5 The Backup Procedure Starting OS 9 Multiple Drive Backup If your system has two disk drives place the source disk in the first drive dO and the destination disk in the second drive d1 At the prompt type backup and press the lt return gt key The system assumes you want to backup the disk in dO It responds to backup with the following prompt ready to BACKUP D0 to D1 If you have placed the correct disks in the correct drives type y for yes Otherwise type q for quit If you type y the system copies all information on the disk in dO on to the disk in d1 and returns the prompt Single Drive Backup If your system has only one drive the backup utility needs to be loaded into memory Make sure your system disk is in dO and type the following command load backup After you have loaded backup you may proceed with the backup procedure Type the following command backup d0 b 100k This tells the system that you are performing a single drive backup and that you want to use a 100K buffer for the backup If your system will allow you to use a larger buffer increase this number The larger the buffer the fe
219. kup The system asks if you are ready to backup Type y if you are ready Initially backup reads a portion of the source disk into memory backup then prompts you to exchange disks Remove the source disk from the drive and insert the destination disk backup writes the previously stored data on to this disk When the backup is finished an exchange is again requested This places the source disk back in the drive This exchange process continues until all of the data on the disk is copied The b option increases the amount of memory the backup procedure uses This decreases the number of disk exchanges required Two Drive Backup On a two drive system the names d0 and d1 are assumed if both device names are omitted on the command line If the second device name is omitted a single unit back up is performed on the drive specified To begin the backup procedure put the source disk in the source drive and the destination disk in the destination drive By default the source drive is dO and the destination drive is d1 Enter backup the name of the source drive and the name of the destination drive The system asks if you are ready to backup Enter y if you are ready If no error occurs the backup procedure is complete The backup procedure includes two passes The first pass reads a portion of the source disk into a buffer in memory and then writes it to the destination disk The second pass verifies that the data was copied correctly
220. kup a file it displays a message and continues the fsave operation If the backup requires more than one volume fsave prompts you to mount the next volume before continuing At the end of the backup fsave prints the following information fsave Saving the index structure Logical backup name Date of backup Backup made by Data bytes written Number of files Number of volumes Index is on volume By specifying one or more directories on the command line fsave performs recursive backups for each specified pathlist You can specify a maximum of 32 directories on the command line Use the d option to specify an alternative target device The default device is mt0 Use the m option to specify an alternative backup log file The default pathlist is n0O sys backup_ dates WARNING When using disks for backup purposes be aware that fsave does not use an RBF file structure to save the files on the target disk It creates its own file structure This makes the backup disk unusable for purposes other than fsave and frestore with out reformatting Any data on the disk before using fsave is destroyed by the backup NOTE For a full description of the fsave frestore and tape utilities read the chapter on backups in this manual The information in the chapter on backups includes work through examples and backup strategies for disk and tape Using Professional OS 9 59 fsave The OS 9 Utilities OPTIONS Displays the opt
221. l it automatically expands as needed The default is zero Each entry in the events table requires 32 bytes See the OS 9 Technical Manual for a discussion of event usage This value is no longer used Revision Compatibility This byte is used for revision compatibility The default is 0 The follow ing bits are currently defined Bit 0 Set to save all registers for IRQ routines Bit 1 Set to prevent the kernel from using stop instructions Bit 2 Set to ignore sticky bit in module headers Bit 3 Set to disable cache burst operation 68030 systems Bit 4 Set to patternize memory when allocated or deallocated Bit 5 Set to prevent kernel cold start from starting system clock Description 69 M Compat2 Compatibility Bit 2 This byte is used for revision compatibility The following bits are cur rently defined Bit Function 0 External instruction cache is not snoopy External instruction cache is snoopy or absent External data cache is not snoopy External data cache is snoopy or absent On chip instruction cache is not snoopy On chip instruction cache is snoopy or absent On chip data cache is not snoopy On chip data cache is snoopy or absent Kernel disables data caches when in I O Kernel does not disable data caches when in I O N o o o 0 0 snoopy cache that maintains its integrity without software interven tion Using Professional OS 9 Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module OS 9 S
222. l contains eight chapters Chapter 1 is a general introduction to OS 9 It introduces the concept of an operating system and explains some of OS 9 s basic features Chapter 2 describes how to get OS 9 up and running This includes formatting and backup procedures Chapter 3 helps you get started using the operating system The more frequently used system commands are discussed These are utilities that every user should be familiar with Chapter 4 is a detailed explanation of the tree structured file and directory system of OS 9 This includes e Directories Types of files e File security e Movement around the file directory system Chapter 5 contains a detailed description of the shell the OS 9 user interface Chapter 6 explains the make utility in detail This utility is used to maintain and regenerate software from a group of files Chapter 7 explains the concept of incremental backups The OS 9 utilities to create the backups are detailed here This chapter also offers two different strategies for making backups Chapter 8 contains information of interest to system managers Some of the topics covered include setting up your system defaults making a startup file and installing OS 9 on a hard disk Detailed descriptions of all OS 9 commands are located in the OS 9 Utilities section Using Professional OS 9 viii An Overview of OS 9 What Is an Operating System An operating system is the master supervisor of the
223. l not be found by the search The relocation register to the area of RAM reserved for downloaded code in the boot a special search table must be set The two versions of the download command are Name Description Using Professional OS 9 B 5 The Download Command The ROM Debugger lt HostCmd gt Downloads data in Motorola S record format lt HostCmd gt is sent to the host as a command line to trigger the download I O delay must be set in register dO before the download The load addresses are displayed every 512 bytes le lt HostCmd gt Same as lt HostCmd gt except received S records are also displayed on the console instead of load addresses The lt HostCmd gt sent to the host is the command required to dump the S record file For OS 9 hosts the screen pause must be turned off using the tmode nopause command A sample download command for an OS 9 host system is r 1000 1 binex objs boot320 A sample download command for a Unix host system is l cat s rec file The debugger transmits the command string to the host and then expects the host to begin transmitting S records The download ends when an S9 type record is received Sometimes the target system cannot keep up with a sustained high data rate when downloading Therefore the debugger sends xon and xoff to the host for flow control If the host system does not respond imme diately to xoff you must set up a buffering delay count in register dO before using
224. la standard format is often directly accepted by com mercial PROM programmers emulators logic analyzers and similar devices that use the RS 232 interface It can be useful for transmitting files over data links that can only handle character type data It can also be used for converting OS 9 assembler or com piler generated programs to load on non OS 9 systems binex converts the OS 9 binary file specified by lt path1 gt to a new file with S record format The new file is specified by lt path2 gt S records have a header record to store the program name for informational purposes and each data record has an absolute memory address This absolute memory address is meaningless to OS 9 because OS 9 uses position independent code binex currently generates the following S record types S1 records Use a two byte address field S2 records Use a three byte address field S3 records Use a four byte address field S7 records Terminate blocks of S3 records S8 records Terminate blocks of S2 records S9 records Terminate blocks of S1 records To specify the type of S record file to generate use the s lt num gt option lt num gt 1 2 etc corresponding to S1 S2 etc exbin is the inverse operation lt path1 gt is assumed to be an S Record format text file which exbin converts to pure binary form in a new file lt path2 gt The load addresses of each data record must describe contiguous data in ascending order exbin does not generate or
225. ld use this to execute any cleaning up procedures that should be performed on a regular schedule This might be anything from instigating a backup procedure of some sort to printing a reminder of things to do Here is an example logout file procs wait echo all processes terminated basic program to instigate backup if necessary disk_backup echo backup complete The Profile Command The profile built in shell command can be used to cause the current shell to read its input from the named file and then return to its original input source which is usually the keyboard To use the profile command enter profile and the name of a file profile setmyenviron The specified file in this case setmyenviron may contain any utility or shell commands including commands to set or unset environment variables or to change directories These changes will remain in effect after the command has finished executing This is in contrast to calling a normal procedure file by name only If you call a normal procedure file without using the profile command the changes would not affect the environment of the calling shell Profile commands may be nested That is the file itself may contain a profile command for another file When the latter profile command is completed the first one will resume A particularly useful application for profile files is within a user s login and logout files For example if each user includes the following line i
226. le name and a module name if different from the file name This module then becomes the current module The f command prompts for the name of a file containing one or more modules If a module in the file has the same name as the file it becomes the current module by default Use the m command to change the current module Edit Mode To edit the current module use the e command If there is no current module the editor prompts for the module name to edit The editor prints the name of a field its current value and prompts for a new value At this point you can enter any of the following edit commands Command Description lt expr gt A new value for the field Re displays the last field Leaves the edit mode Prints the edit mode commands 2 Prints a description of the current field lt cr gt Leaves the current value unchanged If the definition of any field is unfamiliar use the command for a short description of the current field Once you have made all necessary changes to the module exit edit mode by reaching the end of the module or by typing a period At this point the changes made to the module exist only in memory To write the changes to the actual file use the w command This also updates the module header parity and CRC 92 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities moded Listing Module Fields To examine the field values of the current module use the command This displays a formatte
227. les and directories frequently used during normal opera tions This includes a directory for each user a shared commands directory and files used by the system A description of the directories commonly supplied with Professional OS 9 is provided at the end of this chapter Two files which are called startup and OS9Boot by convention need to be discussed here startup is a shell procedure file that is processed immediately after the system starts running startup may contain any legal OS 9 command or program OS9Boot contains the OS 9 system modules that are read into memory The chapter on OS 9 system management contains information on changing the startup and OS9Boot files The boot procedure varies depending on the requirements of the specific hardware The manufacturer supplies detailed instructions outlining the boot procedure for the specific system involved You should follow the instructions as specified Using Professional OS 9 2 1 Booting OS 9 Starting OS 9 If the system fails to boot recheck the hardware setup instructions especially if you made any modifications to your computer Make sure the disk or tape was inserted correctly and try the boot sequence again If the boot sequence fails several times contact your supplier When the system boots correctly a welcoming message is displayed followed by the setime prompt The setime utility starts the system clock and allows OS 9 to keep track of the date and
228. ll simply reads the current di rectory or the given relative pathlist containing a wildcard and passes these file names to the command If the command then tries to find the files relative to the execution directory the search will most likely fail Using Professional OS 9 117 shell The OS 9 Utilities Setting Shell Options There are two methods of setting shell options The first method is to type the option on the command line or after the command shell For example np Turns off the shell prompt shell np Creates a new shell that does not prompt The second method uses the special shell command set To set shell options type set followed by the options desired When using set a hyphen is unnecessary before the letter option For example set np Turns off the shell prompt shell set np Creates a new shell that does not prompt As you can see the two methods accomplish the same function They are both provided for your convenience Use the method that is clearer for you The Shell Environment For each user on an OS 9 system the shell maintains a unique list of environment vari ables These variables affect the operation of the shell or other programs subsequently executed They are programmable defaults that you can set to your liking All environment variables can be accessed by any process called by the environment s shell or descendent shells This essentially allows you to use the environment variable
229. llowing a pound sign is considered part of a command entry All blank lines are ignored For example lt target gt lt file gt lt file gt the following command will be executed if the dependent files are newer than the target file lt OS 9 command line gt this is also a comment line You may continue entries on the next line by placing a space followed by a backslash at the end of each line to continue If a command line is continued a space or tab must be the first character in the continued line With non command lines leading spaces and tabs are ignored on continuation lines Entries longer than 256 characters must be continued on the next line For example FILES aaa r bbb r ccc r ddd r eee r fff r ggg r bhh r iii r jjj r make starts by reading the entire makefile and setting up a table of dependencies ex actly as listed in the makefile When make encounters a name on the left side of a co lon it first checks to see if it has encountered the name before If it has make connects the lists and continues After reading the makefile make determines the target file s The target file is the main file to be made on the list It then makes a second pass through the dependency table During the second pass make looks for object files with no relocatable files in their dependency lists and for relocatable files with no source files in their dependency lists This facilitates program compilation If make needs to find
230. lows you to have one or more tasks running in the background while a task is running in the foreground A foreground process is a task that requires your interaction For example if you are editing a file it is a foreground process because you are actively using it A program that prompts you for information is also a foreground process because you need to respond to it A background process is a task that does not require your attention For example if you are printing a text file you do not have to supervise the printing process Therefore you can have the file printing in the background while you edit another file This frees the computer from the limitation of doing only one thing at a time Je A foreground process requires your interaction A background process does not require your attention OS 9 s multi tasking capabilities make it possible for efficient memory use CPU time and I O operations to be shared by all programs without conflict Typical Multi tasking Usage Editing a file foreground process Listing a file to a printer background process Sorting and merging datafiles background process 1 4 Using Professional OS 9 An Overview of OS 9 Multi tasking and Multi user Features Multi user or timesharing operation is a natural extension of the system s basic multi tasking functions It allows several people to use the computer simultaneously OS 9 provides additional security
231. lt int gt is given in kilobytes The fsave Procedure Upon starting an fsave procedure fsave prompts you to mount the first volume to use Volume in this case refers to the disk or tape used to store the backup fsave please mount volume press return when mounted If a disk is used as the backup medium fsave verifies the disk and displays the following information verifying disk Bytes held on this disk 546816 Total data bytes left 62431 Number of Disks needed 1 NOTE The numbers above are used only as an example If a tape is used as the backup medium no preliminary information is displayed and the backup begins at this point As each file is saved to the backup device its pathlist is echoed to the terminal If this is a long backup you may want to use the e option to turn off the pathlist echoing If fsave receives an error when trying to backup a file it displays the following message and continues the fsave operation error saving lt file gt error lt error number gt its incomplete NOTE The most common error found when executing fSave is a record lock error Record lock errors are caused when another user has the file in question open 4 To prevent record lock errors perform fsave operations only when no one else is using the system If the backup requires more than one volume fSave prompts you to mount the next volume before continuing Using Professional OS 9 7 3 The fsave Proce
232. m memory request p Suppresses the prompt for the first volume Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The Interactive Restore Process Option Description q Overwrites an already existing file when used with the S option S Forces frestore to restore all files from the source device without an interactive shell t lt dirpath gt Specifies an alternate location for the temporary index file V Displays the same information as the i option but does not check for the index This option will not cause any files to be restored The information is displayed and frestore is terminated x lt int gt Pre extends the temporary file lt int gt is given in kilobytes The Interactive Restore Process Once you call frestore the following prompt is displayed frestore gt mount the last volume press return when ready When you are ready frestore attempts to read in the index and create the directory structure of the backup It then displays the prompt frestore gt This prompt tells you that you are in the interactive shell If the index is not on the mounted volume fre store displays an error message and again prompts you to mount the last volume Using Professional OS 9 7 7 The Interactive Restore Process Making Backups Once in the interactive shell the frestore commands and options are displayed when you type a return at the prompt frestore gt commands add lt path gt g lt gt u lt
233. mal storage It is also the most dangerous in case of tape failure Using a number of alternating tapes for each level cuts down on storage and still allows a safety net in the case of tape failure Using alternating level O tapes is another possibility 7 14 Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The tape Utility The tape Utility OS 9 provides a tape controller utility to facilitate setting up reading and rewinding tapes from the terminal When using tape media to backup or restore your system the tape utility is very practical The syntax of the tape utility is tape lt opts gt lt dev gt lt opts gt tape uses the default device mtO if you do not specify the tape device lt dev gt on the command line and you do not use the Z option tape has the following available options Options Description Displays the use of tape b lt num gt Skips a specified number of blocks Default is one block If lt num gt is negative the tape skips backward e lt num gt Erases a specified number of blocks of tape f lt num gt Skips a specified number of tapemarks Default is one tapemark If lt num gt is negative the tape skips backward O Puts tape off line r Rewinds the tape S Determines the block size of the device t Retensions the tape w lt num gt Writes a specified number of tapemarks Default is one tapemark Z Reads a list of device names from standard input The default is
234. mally lt control gt l default 09 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal Number of characters between tab stops The number is in decimal The default is 4 characters between tab stops Set the terminal back to its default characteristics This will not affect the following values type baud rate parity character length and stop bits Displays the option function and command syntax of tmode w lt path gt Changes the path number lt path gt affected EXAMPLES tmode noupc If null 4 bse 1F pause tmode pag 24 pause bsl noecho bsp 8 bsl C tmode xon xoff quit 5 Using Professional OS 9 135 touch The OS 9 Utilities Update the Last Modification Date of a File SYNTAX touch lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION touch updates the last modification date of a file Usually this command is used with a make command s makefile Associated with every file is the date the file was last modified touch simply opens a file and closes it to update the time the file was last modified to the current date To update the last modification date of a file type touch and the pathlist of the file to update touch searches the current data directory for the file to update if another direc tory or the xX option is not specified NOTE If the specified file is not found touch creates a file with a current modification date OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of touch C Does
235. mands are provided as comments If you want the command exe cuted during the startup procedure use a text editor to remove the asterisk preceding the command For example to execute the setime command when the startup file is executed remove the asterisk pre ceding the command NOTE For systems with battery backed clocks run setime to start time slicing but use the S option The date and time will be read from the clock Initializing Devices iniz rO hO dO t1 p1 The iniz rO hO dO t1 p1 commented command initializes the following specific devices rO RAM Disk ho Hard Disk do Floppy Disk t1 Terminal p1 Serial Printer Whenever OS 9 opens a path to a device it first checks to see if the device is known to OS 9 To be known a device must be initialized and memory must be allocated for its device driver If the device is unknown at the time of the request OS 9 initializes the device allocates memory and opens the path For example a simple dir d0 command initiates this sequence of events if dO has not been previously initial ized The iniz utility initializes devices iniz performs an I Attach system call on each device name passed to it This initializes and links the device to the system To initialize a device after the system has been started type iniz and the name s of the device s to attach to the system iniz goes through the procedure of initializing the device s and allocating the memory needed for the device If the
236. may be used 0 1 or many times lt gt Enclosed item is a description of the parameter to use lt path gt A legal pathlist lt devname gt A legal device name lt modname gt A legal memory module name lt proclID gt A process number lt opts gt One or more options specified in the command description lt arglist gt A list of parameters lt text gt Acharacter string ended by end of line lt num gt A decimal number unless otherwise specified lt file gt Anexisting file lt string gt An alpha numeric string of ASCII characters 2 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities General Notes General Notes e The utility syntax specified in the command section does not include the shell s built in options like alternate memory size I O redirection piping etc The shell filters out these options from the command line before processing the program being called e The equal sign used in many utility options is generally optional The k used in the alternate memory size option is also generally optional For example you may write b 256k as b256 b256k or b 256 e Utilities that use the Z option expect one file name to be input per line If you use the z lt file gt option of a utility lt file gt may contain comments e Unless otherwise specified command line options may appear anywhere on the command line For example the following command lines provide the same results attr a j
237. mber A procedure file is made up of executable commands Each command is executed exactly as if it were entered from the shell command line Each line that begins with an asterisk is a comment and is not executed From the root directory you can examine the startup file by entering list startup A listing similar to the following is displayed t np OS 9 Copyright 1984 by Microware Systems Corporation The commands in this file are highly system dependent and should be modified by the user x setime start system clock link shell cio make shell and cio stay in memory load math load math module iniz r0 h0 d0 t1 pl initialize devices load z sys loadfile make some utilities stay in memory load bootobjs dd r0 get default device descriptor init ramdisk gt nil gt gt nil amp initialize it if its the ramdisk tsmon tl amp start other terminals list sys motd The first executable line t np turns on the talk mode option of the shell and turns off the OS 9 prompt option for the duration of this procedure The talk mode option echoes each executed command to the ter minal display This allows you to see what commands are being executed 8 16 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Initializing Devices The other executable lines in the distributed startup file are followed by a comment explaining the purpose of the command Some standard com
238. mmands located inside the parentheses dir amp procs del whatever Using Professional OS 9 5 19 Shell Procedure Files The Shell Shell Procedure Files A procedure file is a text file containing one or more command lines that are identical to command lines manually entered from the keyboard The shell executes each command line in the exact sequence given in the procedure file A simple procedure file could consist of dir on one line and date on another When the name of this pro cedure file is entered from the command line dir would run followed by date Procedure files have a number of valuable applications They can e Eliminate repetitive manual entry of commonly used command sequences e Allow the computer to execute a lengthy series of programs in the background unattended or while you are running other programs in the foreground e Initialize your environment when you first log in In addition you can use a procedure file to redirect the standard input standard output and standard error paths from programs and utilities to procedure files This has many useful purposes For example instead of receiving the sometimes annoying output of shell messages to your terminal at random times you could redirect the shell s output to a procedure file and review the messages at a more convenient time You can also run procedure files in the background by adding the ampersand operator procfile amp 4 WARNING
239. mmon usage of Code is to discover the value of an unknown key on the keyboard or the hex value of an ASCII character OPTION Displays the function and command syntax of code EXAMPLE code ABORT or QUIT characters will terminate CODE a gt 61 e gt 65 A gt 41 gt 10 gt 04 Using Professional OS 9 17 compress The OS 9 Utilities compress Compress ASCII Files SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLES compress lt opts gt lt path gt compress reads the specified text file s converts it to compressed form and writes the compressed text file to standard output or to an optional output file To use compress type compress and the path of the text file to compress If no files are given standard input is used compress replaces multiple occurrences of a character with a three character coded se quence aaaaabbbbbeceeceecece Would be replaced with Ea Eb Jc Each compressed input file name is appended with _comp If a file with this name al ready exists the old file is overwritten with the new file Typical files compress about 30 smaller than the original file compress reduces the size of a file to save disk space See the expand utility for de tails on how to expand a compressed file WARNING Only use compress and expand on text files Displays the options function and command syntax of compress d Deletes the original file This is inappropriate when no pathlist is spe
240. module is also the logical name by which the device is referred to by the software device driver module A program module that contains the software necessary to interface OS 9 to a particular type of I O device A single driver module is often shared by many identical types of I O ports such as for terminals C 2 Using Professional OS 9 Glossary Glossary directory A special file used by OS 9 which contains the names of other files or directories A directory al lows you to organize your files by placing all files to be grouped together in one place DMA Abbreviation for Direct Memory Access This is a procedure or method used to gain direct access to the computer s main storage without involving the central processing unit CPU environment The shell environment is a list a variables that may be accessed by the shell and any user applica tions to be used as global variables Each user s shell maintains a unique environment exception A special control signal that diverts the attention of the computer from the main program because of a particular event signal or set of circumstances execution directory A directory used by OS 9 to locate files containing programs utilities You can change which directory is your current execution directory at will but usually the system wide commands direc tory CMDS is used See also directory execution modifier A character in a command line recognized by the shell th
241. mt0 z lt file gt Reads a list of device names from lt file gt If you specify more than one option tape executes each option function in a specific order Therefore it is possible to skip ahead a specified number of blocks erase and then rewind the tape all with the same command The order of options executed is as follows KS y l Re Gets device name s from the Z option Skips the number of tapemarks specified by the f option Skips the number of blocks specified by the b option Writes a specified number of tapemarks Erases a specified number of blocks of tape Rewinds the tape Puts the tape off line Using Professional OS 9 7 15 The tape Utility Making Backups For example the following command skips four files on the mtO device erases the next two blocks rewinds the tape and takes the tape off line tape e 2 f 4 ro The next example determines the block size of the device tape s The next example retensions the tape rewinds it and then takes it off line tape rot End of Chapter 7 7 16 Using Professional OS 9 8 OS 9 System Management System managers have a range of options to consider OS 9 allows system managers to tailor their system to the needs of users by changing system modules setting up the system defaults etc OS 9 also allows system managers to maximize the performance of their system by using RAM disks making bootfiles making a startup file
242. n When the n option is used the command is echoed to standard output but not actually executed This is useful when building your original makefile make normally stops if an error code is returned when a command line is executed Errors are ignored if the i option is used or if a command line begins with a hyphen Sometimes it is helpful to see the file dependencies and the dates associated with each of the files in the list The d option turns on the make debugger and gives a complete listing of the macro definitions a listing of the files as it checks the dependency list and all the file modification dates If it cannot find a file to examine its date it assumes a date of 1 00 00 00 00 indicating the necessity to update the file 6 6 Using Professional OS 9 Making Files make utility options If you want to update the date on a file but do not want to remake it you can use the t option make merely opens the file for update and then closes it thus making the date current If you are quite explicit about your makefile dependencies and do not want make to assume anything you may use the b option to turn off the built in rules governing implicit file dependencies Options Description Displays the options function and command syntax of make b Does not use built in rules bo Does not use built in rules for object files d Prints the dates of the files in makefile Debug mode dd Double debug mode Very
243. n Modifiers These modify a program s execution by redirecting I O or changing the priority or memory allocation of a pro cess lt mem size gt Allocates specified memory to a process A lt priority gt Sets the priority of the process lt Redirects standard input gt or Redirects standard output gt gt or Redirects standard error output The hyphen following the modifiers above signify to write over a specified file The plus appends the file with the redirected output Separators Separators connect command lines together in the same command line They specify to the shell how they are to be executed The separators are Indicates sequential execution amp Indicates concurrent execution Creates a communication pipe between processes Pipes connect the standard output of one process to the standard input of another Command Line Execution The shell command line syntax indicates that a keyword may be a program name pro cedure file name a pathlist or built in shell command Built in commands are execut ed immediately by the shell no directory searching is required nor is a process created to execute the command If the specified command is not a built in command the shell must locate the program to execute from a number of possible locations The following procedure describes the actions of the shell when processing a command 4 Get command line Prepare command a Validate syntax
244. n enen a a aS eaen EA a 4 7 Directory Charade teristies eini AE E E E EE ee eden E 4 8 Accessing Files and Directories The Pathlist sseeeeeseeeseesesseeesesresseserssressessresreesessreses 4 9 Basic File System Oriented Utilities isi c s0sadsseecetenssccestdsensnceessacceue tecsennsnsncactuseseedvasneveaies 4 11 Dir Displaying the Contents of Directories s ssssssesssesessseesseessersseesssesssressees 4 11 Chd and Chx Moving Around in the File System eeeseeeeeseseereesererrerrrsrrsrrsrreses 4 13 Climbing Directory Trees 5 lt ieiascissiesasugiad vasesdaatacushaa cs anbedeneadededacann sean eusesdaatacastaa tounsoeea 4 14 Usimath Pa Utility x ocssevahicsecveresesseugt onauanedetegtoeetveytnevaagatessnneseseet ges am E iS 4 16 Using Makdir to Create New Directories cee ceeeesecsseceseceeeeeeseecsaecnseenseeesaeenaes 4 16 Rules for Constructing File Names sqcys inden cosh aie eau ended eau 4 17 Creating HALES choo ececs se aucat eaten aa atest e a a a ai 4 17 Examining File Attributes with Att c sccecescccessceseeteecetseccensceconsecensencentetees 4 18 Listine Piles cute e n E ete ease Rote tana deh velo elses 4 19 RSM TTB ice eh a cca ai oct E eateas ns dees vate E 4 20 Dsave Copying Files Using Procedure Files 0 ecceeecccceseeeceeececeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeaees 4 22 Del and Deldir Deleting Files and Directories 2 0 0 0 ee eeeceeeeeeereeeeeeceseeeeneeeaeenes 4 25 The Shell The Functiomor the Shell
245. n on changing the shell prompt refer to the chapter on the shell 2 2 Using Professional OS 9 Starting OS 9 Backing Up the System Disk NOTE The following sections are specifically intended for systems distributed with floppy disk system disks These sections are also of general interest in terms of formatting and back ing up floppy disks If you have a hard disk or are booting from a media other than a disk refer to the OS 9 system management chapter Backing Up the System Disk Before experimenting with OS 9 you should make a backup of your master system disk The backup procedure involves making an exact copy of a disk If for any reason your system disk becomes damaged it may become unreadable For this reason it is important to have another copy stored safely away Before you can backup your system disk you need a properly formatted disk New disks cannot be read from or written to until they have been formatted The format utility initializes new disks for reading and writing backup the OS 9 utility that makes copies of disks requires the backup disk to be the same size and format as the original disk The following section describes the steps to be taken to backup a disk on a typical OS 9 system that boots from a floppy drive usually called d0 NOTE Before formatting your first disk it is strongly recommended that you read the entire section on formatting disks a NOTE A list of the naming conv
246. n one process This means that in addition to each user having their own shell an individual user can have multiple shells New shells can be created with procedure files For example to execute a shell whose standard input is obtained from procfile type shell lt procfile The new shell automatically accepts and executes the command lines from the procedure file instead of a terminal keyboard This technique is sometimes called batch processing Shells can also fork new shells by simply processing the procedure file procfile Basically both of the above commands execute the commands found in the procfile file By creating new shells you can also move around the file system more efficiently To demonstrate this concept the directory system in Figure 5a is used Root directory of device d0 DIRECTORY_1 DIRECTORY_2 DIRECTORY_3 DIR 4 file 1 DIR5 DIR6 file 2 file3 file4 DIR7 DIR8 file_5 DIR_9 file_6 file 7 file_8 Figure 5a An example directory If your current data directory is DIR_9 and you want to work on file_8 you would normally change your current data directory to DIR_8 and access the file by typing chd d0 DIRECTORY_3 DIR_8 To return to DIR_9 you would execute a similar command This is somewhat inconvenient and involves always knowing the path to each directory Using Professional OS 9 5 27 The Procs Utility The Shell Instead you can create a shell and change directories chd
247. n the login file then system wide commands common environments news bulletins etc can be included in the file dd SYS login_sys profile dd SYS login_sys A similar technique can be used for logout files 5 22 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Setting up a Time Sharing System Startup Procedure Setting up a Time Sharing System Startup Procedure File OS 9 systems used for timesharing usually have a procedure file that brings the system up by means of one simple command or by using the system startup file This procedure file initiates the timesharing mon itor for each terminal It begins by starting the system clock and initiating concurrent execution of a num ber of processes that have their I O redirected to each timesharing terminal tsmon is a special program which monitors a terminal for activity Typically tsmon is executed as part of the start up procedure when the system is first brought up and remains active until the system shuts down tsmon is normally used to monitor I O devices capable of bi directional communication such as CRT terminals However you can also use tsmon to monitor a named pipe If you do this tsmon creates the named pipe and then waits for data to be written to it by some other process You can run several tsmon processes concurrently each one watching a different group of devices Because tsmon can monitor up to 28 device name pathlists you must run multiple tsmon processes wh
248. ncremental backups are referenced by different level numbers For example a level 5 backup includes all files changed since the most recent backup with a level less than 5 While this sounds complex it is actually quite easy to use and extremely helpful Two other terms need to be defined A source device is the directory structure or file you are backing up A target device is the tape or disk you are using to hold your backup information Using Professional OS 9 7 1 Making an Incremental Backup The fsave Utility Making Backups Making an Incremental Backup The fsave Utility The fsave utility performs an incremental backup of a directory structure to tape s or disk s The syntax for the fsave utility is fsave lt opts gt lt path gt lt opts gt Typing fsave by itself on the command line makes a level 0 backup of the current directory onto a target device with the name mt0 n NOTE mit0 is the default OS 9 device name for tape device just as hO is the de fault OS 9 device name for a hard disk n0O sys backup_date is a backup log file maintained by fsave Each time you execute an fsave the backup log is updated The backup log keeps track of the name of the backup the date it was created and more importantly the level of the backup When you execute fsave this backup log is examined to find the specified level of the current backup and the previous backups with the same name Once the backup is fin
249. ndout not erased by writing over it xt boolean Tabs are destructive Of the capabilities the most complex and important capability is cm cursor addressing The string spec ifying the cursor addressing is formatted similar to the C function printf It uses notation to identify addressing encodings of the current line or column position The line and the column being addressed could be considered the arguments to the cm string All other characters are passed through unchanged The following is the notation used for cm strings d a decimal number origin 0 o2 same as 2d 3 same as 3d ASCII equivalent of value So X adds x to value then o gt XY if value gt X adds y no output Yor reverses the order of row and column no output i increments line column for 1 origin AP gives a single n exclusive or row and column with 0140 B BCD 16 x 10 x 10 no output D reverse coding x 2 x 16 no output The following examples illustrate the use of the preceding notations cm 6 E amp r 2C 2Y This terminal needs a 6 millisecond delay rows and columns reversed and rows and columns to be printed as two digits The lt esc gt amp and Y are sent unchanged HP2645 Using Professional OS 9 8 35 Example Termcap Entries OS 9 System Management cm 5 E i d dH This terminal needs a 5 millisecond delay rows and columns separated by a semicolon and because of its origin of 1 rows and columns are increm
250. new shell by typing shell optionally followed by a command line The shell reads and interprets one text line at a time from standard input After inter preting each line the shell reads another line until an end of file condition occurs at which time it terminates itself An exception occurs when the shell is called from another program In this case the shell processes the specified command as if it was typed on a shell command line Con trol returns to the calling program after the single command line is processed If no command is specified shell lt cr gt or the command is a shell option or built in com mand chd chx etc more lines are read from standard input and processed as normal This continues until an end of file condition or the logout command is executed CAVEAT The shell s ex command does not recognize utility options unless they are separated from the utility name with a space For example ex procs e works proper ly but ex procs e does not The shell uses special characters for various purposes Special characters consist of the following Modifiers Memory allocation Process priority modification gt Standard output redirection lt Standard input redirection gt gt Standard error output redirection Separators Sequential execution amp Concurrent execution Pipe interprocess communication 116 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities shell Wildcards Stands for any st
251. nitially has all the permissions set except the single user permission To examine file attributes use the attr utility To use this utility type attr followed by the name of a file For example attr newtest 4 18 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Listing Files The file newtest has the permissions set for owner reading and owner writing Access to this file by anyone other than the owner is denied Just a reminder Users with the same group user ID as the person who created the file are considered owners However if the file is created by a group 0 user only users in the super group can read write or execute the file If you use attr with a list of one or more attribute abbreviations the file s attributes are changed accordingly provided you have the proper write permission to access the file The attribute abbreviations do not have to be listed in any particular order The letter n preceding an attribute removes that permission The following command enables public read and write permission and removes execution permission for both the owner and the public attr newtest pw pr ne npe If you are the owner of a file you can change the access permissions regardless of what the permissions indicate Thus the owner always has the right to delete a file change the user privileges etc Users in the same group have the same permissions as the owner The directory attribute is somewhat differ
252. not create a file if not found q Does not quit if an error occurs X Searches the execution directory for the file Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt path gt Reads the file names from lt path gt EXAMPLES touch c h0 doc program touch cz dir u touch 136 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tr tr SYNTAX FUNCTION Transliterate Characters tr lt opts gt lt str1 gt lt str2 gt lt path1 gt lt path2 gt tr transliterates characters from lt str1 gt into a corresponding character from lt str2 gt If lt str1 gt contains more characters than lt str2 gt the final character in lt Str2 gt is used for each excess character in lt str1 gt To use the tr utility type tr and the characters to search for lt str1 gt and optionally the replacement characters lt str2 gt the input file s pathlist lt path2 gt and the output file s pathlist lt lt path2 gt lt str1 gt is required If lt str2 gt is missing all characters in lt str1 gt are deleted from the output If lt pathi gt and lt path2 gt are missing standard input and output are assumed If only one path is specified it is used as the input file pathlist lt str1 gt and lt str2 gt are interpreted as character classes To facilitate creating character classes use the following metacharacters Char Name Description RANGE The hyphen is defined as representing
253. not needed For example applications which use only BASIC need not waste memory space on shell ex should always be the last command on a shell input line because any command lines following it are never processed NOTE Because this is a built in shell command it does not appear in the CMDS directory ex BASIC tsmon t1 amp tsmon t2 amp ex tsmon term 46 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities expand expand Expand a Compressed File SYNTAX expand lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION expand restores compressed files to their original form It is the complement command of the compress utility To expand a compressed file type expand and the name of the file to expand If no file names are given on the command line standard input is assumed OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of expand d Deletes the old version of the file This option is not appropriate when no pathlist is specified on the command line and standard input is used n Sends output to a file instead of the standard output The file has _exp appended to it unless the file name already has a_comp suffix In this case the _Comp is removed Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES expand data a nd Expands and then deletes data a creating data a_exp expand filel_comp Expands filel1_comp and displays output on standard output
254. nt execution allows several com mand lines to begin execution and run simultaneously Execute commands sequentially by separating the command lines with a semicolon Execute commands concurrently by separating the command lines with an ampersand amp Sequential Execution When you enter one command per line from the keyboard programs execute one after another or sequen tially All programs executed sequentially are individual processes created by the shell After initiating execution of a program to be executed sequentially the shell waits until the program it created terminates The command line prompt does not return until the program has finished For example the following command lines are executed one after another The copy command is executed first followed by the dir command copy myfile D1 newfile dir gt p 5 14 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Shell Command Line Processing Specify more than one program on a single shell command line for sequential execution by separating each program name and its parameters from the next one with a semicolon For example copy myfile D1 newfile dir gt p The shell first executes Copy and then dir No command line prompt appears between the execution of the copy and dir commands The command line executes exactly as the previous two command lines unless an error occurs If any program returns an error subsequent commands on the same line are not executed
255. nt module the editor prompts for the module name to edit The editor prints the name of a field its current value and prompts for a new value You can enter the following edit commands Command Description lt expr gt A new value for the field Re display last field Leave edit mode Print edit mode commands Print description of the current field lt CI gt Leave current value unchanged If the definition of any field is unfamiliar use the command This provides a short description of the current field Once you have made all necessary changes to the module exit the edit mode by reaching the end of the module or by typing a period At this point the changes made to the module exist only in memory To write the changes to the actual file use the w command This also updates the module header parity and CRC Using Professional OS 9 8 9 Editing the Systype d File OS 9 System Management NOTE moded is mainly used for editing existing descriptors It is somewhat restrictive and as a result if you are building a device descriptor or changing a field such as the file manager names you may not want to use moded Complete documentation is available for the moded utility in the OS 9 Utilities section Editing the Systype d File The second method of changing system modules requires editing the systype d file located in the DEFS directory The systype d file contains macros such as TERM DiskHO etc for each device
256. ntents of your current execution directory PAUL directory of 14 05 06 gee ick c map Climbing Directory Trees You can use OS 9 s special naming conventions to move around the file system As a reminder the naming conventions are periods specifying the current directories and directories higher in the file structure For example refers to the current directory refers to the parent directory refers to two directory levels higher etc When used as the first name in a path you can use these naming conventions in conjunction with relative pathlists NOTE If you are planning to port your code to other operating systems you must remember that most operating systems only use this convention as it refers to the current and parent directories For example if you use to refer to the directory above a parent directory most operating systems require you to use instead The examples below relate to the file structure in Figure 4g The examples assume your initial current data directory is PROG The following example displays the contents of PROG It is functionally the same command as dir dir directory of 14 04 32 funct main 4 14 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Climbing Directory Trees The next command displays the contents of PROG s parent directory CHRIS dir directory of 14 05 58 PROG TEXT letter This example displays the contents of TEXT by specifying a path starting with t
257. o and init see the OS 9 Technical Manual End of Chapter 2 Using Professional OS 9 3 Basic Commands and Functions Learning the Basics Now that your system is up and running it is time to learn about OS 9 s basic features and utility commands This chapter and the chapter on the OS 9 file system provide a fast track introduction to OS 9 designed to get you started quickly The secret of getting up to speed quickly with OS 9 is to first identify and learn only the basic everyday functions necessary to run application programs and programming languages It is fairly easy to learn more as you continue to work with the system The general topics covered in this chapter are e Logging on timesharing systems e An introduction to the shell e Use of the keyboard and display e The page pause feature e help free and mfree utilities Using Professional OS 9 3 1 Logging on to a Timesharing System Basic Commands and Functions Logging on to a Timesharing System If you are using a single user system such as a personal computer you can skip this section Otherwise you need to know how to log on to a multi user system This applies to both hardwire and dial up terminals Until you press the lt return gt key idle terminals on multi user systems do nothing but beep at you Press ing the lt return gt key starts the log on program called login login s function is to maintain system security
258. ocatable files not specified by a full pathlist If RDIR is not defined make searches the current directory by default 6 4 Using Professional OS 9 Making Files Macro Recognition Macro Definition CFLAGS lt opts gt RFLAGS lt opts gt LFLAGS lt opts gt CC lt comp gt RC lt asm gt LC lt link gt These compiler options are used in any necessary compiler command lines These assembler options are used in any necessary assembler command lines These linker options are used in any necessary linker command lines make uses this compiler when generating command lines The default is cc make uses this assembler when generating command lines The default is r68 make uses this linker when generating command lines The default is cc Some reserved macros are expanded when a command line associated with a particular file dependency is forked These macros may only be used on a command line When you need to be explicit about a com mand line but have a target program with several dependencies these macros can be useful In practice they are wildcards with the following meanings Macro Definition Expands to the file name made by the command Expands to the prefix of the file to be made Expands to the list of files that were found to be newer than the target on a given dependency line Using Professional OS 9 Make Options Making Files Make Generated Command Lines make can genera
259. odule format See also memory module public attributes Public read public write public execute The public is defined as any user not having the same user ID or group number as the file If set these attributes allow anyone access to the file See owner attributes RAM disk A special device driver module that allows the part of the system s main memory to behave as a disk drive This permits high speed but non permanent storage for small commonly used files RBF The Random Block File manager is the OS 9 file manager module that supports random access block oriented mass storage devices disk systems etc RBF can handle any number or type of such systems simultaneously It is responsible for maintaining the logical and physical file structure for OS 9 record locking A special function built into OS 9 s file management system which eliminates problems caused by two or more users trying to update the same part of a file at the same time redirection A method of changing the normal input and or output of a program to alternate files or I O devices This is done at the time the program is run through the use of modifiers in the command line as opposed to at the time it is written See also standard I O paths C 6 Using Professional OS 9 Glossary Glossary re entrant code Code shared by two or more programs This saves program memory space that would be duplicat ed in each program Re entrant code must not alter
260. of each module by one mdir Module Directory at 14 44 35 kernel init p32clk rbf p32hd ho d0 r0 edit mdir unlink edit mdir Module Directory at 14 44 35 kernel init p32clk rbf p32hd ho d0 r0 mdir 142 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities unsetenv w wait unsetenv Clear Environment Parameter SYNTAX unsetenv lt eparam gt FUNCTION unsetenv deletes the specified environment variable from the environment list To use setenv type unsetenv followed by the environment parameter to delete This removes the variable from the environment list NOTE If the specified variable has not been previously defined unsetenv has no effect and it gives you no message EXAMPLES unsetenv _sh unsetenv TERM SEE ALSO setenv and printenv utility descriptions w wait Wait for One All Child Process es to Terminate SYNTAX w wait FUNCTION w causes the shell to wait for the termination of one child process before returning with a prompt wait causes the shell to wait for all child processes to terminate before returning with a prompt Type w or wait and a carriage return When the shell prompt is displayed the child process es have terminated EXAMPLES _ list filel gt p1 amp list file2 temp filter gt file2 amp wait list file2 gt p1 In this example the prompt returns when the first of these three processes one two or three terminates one amp two amp three w Using
261. ome 4 7 5 3 Makdir utility 4 16 Name rules 4 17 Parent 4 6 4 14 Pathlist 4 9 4 10 Root 4 6 D_MaxAge 8 27 D_MinPty 8 27 Dsave utility 4 22 4 25 Edt utility 4 18 Environment variables 5 3 5 5 Changing 5 4 HOME 4 8 5 3 PATH 5 3 PORT 5 3 PROMPT 5 4 _sh 5 4 SHELL 5 3 TERM 5 4 USER 5 3 Ex utility 5 6 Executable program module files 4 3 l 2 Using Professional OS 9 Index Index E continued Execution modifiers 5 12 Additional memory size 5 9 TO redirection 5 10 Process priority 5 12 Files Accessing 4 4 4 9 4 10 4 13 4 16 Attributes 4 4 4 5 4 18 4 19 Copy utility 4 20 4 22 Copying files 4 20 4 25 Creating 4 17 4 18 Build utility 4 18 Edt utility 4 18 uMACS 4 18 Deleting 4 25 4 26 Directory 4 8 Executable program module 4 3 File pointer 4 2 Function 1 3 4 1 List utility 4 19 4 20 Name rules 4 17 Ownership 4 4 4 19 Password 5 24 Pathlist 4 9 Procedure files 5 21 5 27 Jogin 5 21 logout 5 21 Applications 5 20 Cfp utility 5 25 Dsave utility 4 22 Password 5 24 Startup file 8 17 Security 4 4 4 5 Termcap 8 31 8 37 Text 4 3 Filters 5 18 Foreground process Definition 1 4 F continued Format utility 2 3 2 5 Multiple disk 2 4 Parameters 2 3 Single disk 2 4 Free utility 3 9 Frestore utility 7 6 7 11 Fsave utility 7 2 7 5 Group user ID 4 4 Grouping commands 5 19 Hard disk Installing OS 9 8 24 Help utility 3 8 Hexadecimal conversion chart Apdx A Home directo
262. or more than one blank between characters you must enclose the string with double quotes A single backslash is echoed by entering two backslashes NOTE Do not include any of the punctuation characters used by the shell in the text unless you enclose the string with double quotes OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of echo N Separates the text with carriage returns r Does not send a carriage return after lt text gt Z Reads the text from standard input z lt file gt Reads the text from lt file gt EXAMPLES echo Here is an important message Here is an important message echo 1b gt p1 Sends an lt escape gt character to a printer p1 echo column1 column2 column3 column1 column2 column3 echo column1 column2 column3 column1 column2 column3 Using Professional OS 9 41 edt The OS 9 Utilities edt SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS Line Oriented Text Editor edt lt opts gt lt path gt edt is a line oriented text editor that allows you to create and edit source files To use the line oriented text editor type edt and the pathlist desired If the file is new or cannot be found edt creates and opens it edt then displays a question mark prompt and waits for a command If the file is found edt opens it displays the last line and then displays the prompt The first character of a line must be a space if text is to be inserted If any other c
263. ou can have an opportunity to see the files in the directory before they are deleted A q response aborts the command before action is taken After listing the files deldir prompts with delete y n The directory to be deleted may include directory files which may themselves include directory files etc In this case deldir operates recursively that is lower level direc tories are also deleted The lower level directories are processed first You must have correct access permission to delete all files and directories encountered If not deldir aborts upon encountering the first file for which you do not have write per mission deldir automatically calls dir and attr so they must reside in the current execution directory When deldir calls dir it executes a dir a command to show all files contained in the directory NOTE You should never delete the current data directory Displays the options function and command syntax of deldir f Deletes files regardless of whether write permission is set q Quiet mode No questions are asked The directory and its sub directories are all deleted if possible Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt 28 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities devs devs Display System s Device Table SYNTAX devs FUNCTION devs displays a list of the system s device table The device table contains an entry
264. owing is the syntax for the cfp utility cfp lt opts gt lt path1 gt lt path2 gt lt opts gt To use the cfp utility type cfp the name of the procedure file lt path1 gt and the file s lt path2 gt used by the procedure file The name of the procedure file may be omitted if the s lt string gt option is used All occurrences of an asterisk in the procedure file are replaced by the given pathlist s unless preceded by the tilde character For example translates to The command procedure is not executed until all input files have been read For example if you have a procedure file in your current data directory called copyit that consists of a single command line copy you could put all of your C programs from two directories PROGMS and MISC JUNK into your current data directory by typing cfp copyit progms c misc junk c If you do not have a procedure file you can use the S option The S option causes the cfp utility to read the string surrounded by quotes instead of a procedure file For example cfp s copy progms c misc junk c In this case the cfp utility creates a temporary procedure file to copy every file ending in c in both PROGMS and MISC JUNK to the current data directory The procedure file created by cfp is deleted when all the files have been copied Using the S option is convenient because you do not have to edit the procedure file if you want to change
265. pace sequences to erase the same line for video terminals Default No backspace over line Lines are deleted by printing a new line se quence for hard copy terminals Input characters echoed back to terminal Default No echo Auto line feed on Line feeds are automatically echoed to terminal on input and output carriage returns Default Auto line feed off Set null count Number of null 00 characters transmitted after carriage returns for return delay The number is decimal By default the null count is set to zero Screen pause on Output suspended upon full screen See pag parameter for definition of screen size Output can be resumed by typing any key Screen pause mode off Set video display page length to n lines N is a decimal number Used for pause mode see above Function bsp h Set input backspace character normally lt control gt H default 08 Using Professional OS 9 145 xmode The OS 9 Utilities Numeric value of character in hexadecimal del h Set input delete line character normally lt control gt X default 18 Nu meric value of character in hexadecimal eor h Set end of record input character normally lt cr gt default OD Numeric value of character in hexadecimal eof h Set end of file input character normally lt esc gt default 1B Numeric value of character in hexadecimal reprint h Set reprint line character normally lt control gt D default 04 Numeric
266. piler Ex ainp lect neers 2th tie So a Pe ee A 6 9 Example Three A Makefile that Uses Macros ccceesccessseeeesseceeseeeceeceeeseeeesteeeenaees 6 11 Example Four Putting It All Together 0 0 0 eee ceeccecssececeseceeeneeeenaeeeesaeeeenaeeeeaeeeeaaes 6 12 Making Backups Incremental Back ps zrzetrno neta aaah sonia ucts sees E E e E wae one 7 1 Making an Incremental Backup The Fsave Utility cee eeseeeceeeceeseeeeeseeeeesteeeeaees 7 2 The Psave Procedure j sicscesthtecrcseele estes ace ieee eee eatin 7 3 Example save Commit ans neern vaste Gach unas aa a aa e iani 7 4 Restoring Incremental Backups The Frestore Utility 00 eee eeseesseceeeeeeeeeeseeenaeenes 7 6 The Interactive Restore Process cused tious otic eae Seve eee 7 7 Brample Command Liesvei nent udcadou eei aaee o o edges aes tnceatetybeneens 7 11 Incremental Backup Strategies 1 j sascsieisvessadstaccaeennsavestiseesadeesbaccededceanacdesaceceenseavaatdedeeneds 7 12 v Using Professional OS 9 Table Of Contents Table Of Contents The Small Daily Backup Strategy as ssscc sescectawiecsiecscnsschashavcavabecnentansendectaasacsasendiennss 7 12 The Single Tape Backup Strategy annua te ana eae aes 7 13 TSB Ol Pape sy IIS KS iesirea a ed yea ties eastodaareens ep ecanteneeatents 7 14 The Tape Utility iscitecisceccietvestcceassanssicausa pune EE E AAi E ORE ES AE ERE 7 15 OS 9 System Management Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module ee eeeeeeeseeeseeceseeeeeeee
267. pressions S Squeezes all repeated output characters or expressions in lt str2 gt to single characters or expressions V Same as C Z Reads standard input for list of file names z lt path gt Reads the file names from lt path gt You can generally give options anywhere on the command line If you wish to use the pathlists but not lt str2 gt you must specify the d option prior to the pathlists Similarly if you use the Z option to read pathlists from standard input the Z must precede lt path2 gt The S option does not differentiate between characters originally in lt str2 gt and transliterated characters It always returns a string with no consecutively repeated characters For example the command tr s abcde x transliterates the string exasperate into xspxrxtx The s and d options are mutually exclusive If you use the c option to change all but a certain sequence of characters it also chang es carriage returns and newlines unless they are specified in the sequence of characters WARNING tr always deletes ASCII nul 00 The following examples use standard input for the input to tr The output is sent to standard output Thus the first line following each command line is the standard input and the second line is the standard output tr abcd jklm Transliterates standard input converting a to j aabdc_efg b to k c to l and d to m jjkml_efg tr abcd j Transliterates standard input converting
268. put can be resumed by typing any key nopause Screen pause mode off pag n Set video display page length to n lines where n is in decimal Used for pause mode see above bsp h Set input backspace character normally lt control gt H default 08 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal del h Set input delete line character normally lt control gt X default 18 Nu meric value of character in hexadecimal Name Function eor h Set end of record input character normally lt cr gt default OD Numeric value of character in hexadecimal Using Professional OS 9 133 tmode The OS 9 Utilities eof h Set end of file input character normally lt esc gt default 1B Numeric value of character in hexadecimal reprint h Set reprint line character normally lt control gt D default 04 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal dup h Sets the duplicate last input line character normally lt control gt A default 01 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal psc h Set pause character normally lt control gt W default 17 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal abort h Abort character normally lt control gt C default 03 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal quit h Quit character normally lt control gt E default 05 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal bse h Set output backspace character default 08 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal bell h Set bell alert ou
269. r ID A unique code number used to identify the user s files and processes See also user name and password file utility One of the set of programs supplied with OS 9 that is used to perform housekeeping maintenance customization and convenience functions End of Appendix C C 8 Using Professional OS 9 Glossary NOTES NOTES Using Professional OS 9 C 9 NOTES Glossary C 10 Using Professional OS 9 login file 5 21 logout file 5 6 5 21 5 22 _sh environment variable 5 4 5 28 Abort process 3 6 5 2 5 6 5 21 5 31 Access to files directories 4 4 4 5 4 9 4 15 4 19 Additional memory size modifier 5 9 Application program 1 2 ASCII conversion table Apdx A Attach device 8 8 Attr utility 4 18 4 19 Attributes 4 18 4 19 Abbreviations 4 5 Attr utility 4 18 4 19 Changing 4 19 Displaying 4 18 File security 4 4 Background process 3 6 5 15 5 20 5 21 5 30 5 32 Definition 1 4 INDEX B continued Backup procedure 2 3 2 5 2 7 Frestore utility 7 6 7 11 Fsave utility 7 2 7 5 Incremental 7 1 7 14 Multiple drive 2 6 Single drive 2 6 Backup utility 2 3 2 5 2 7 Binary conversion table Apdx A Binex utility B 5 Boot 2 1 8 26 Bootfiles 8 14 Build utility 4 3 4 18 Built in shell commands 5 6 Chd utility 4 7 4 13 4 14 5 3 5 6 Chx utility 4 13 4 14 5 6 Ex utility 5 6 Kill utility 5 6 5 32 Logout utility 5 6 Profile 5 6 5 32 Set utility 5 6 Setenv utility 5 4 5
270. r as the owner to access the module Public permis sions allow access to the module regardless of the group user number The following example allows the owner and the group to read and execute the module but bars access to the public Permission 55 T r OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of ident m Searches for modules in memory q Quick mode Only one line per module S Silent mode Quick but only displays bad CRC s X Searches for modules in the execution directory Z Reads the module names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the module names from lt file gt EXAMPLE ident m ident Header for ident Module size 1562 5474 Owner 0 0 Module CRC FA8ECA Good CRC Header parity 2471 Good parity Edition C 12 Ty La At Rev 101 8001 Permission 555 Tr r r Exec off 4E 78 Data size 15EC 5612 Stack size C00 3072 Init data off 1482 4250 Data ref off 151A 5402 Prog mod 68000 obj Sharable 66 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities iniz iniz Attach Devices SYNTAX iniz lt opts gt lt devname gt FUNCTION iniz performs an I Attach system call on each device name passed to it This initializes and links the device to the system To attach a device to the system type iniz and the name s of the device s to be at tached to the system OS 9 searches the system module directory using the name of the device to see if
271. r current shell enter set and the desired shell options This command is the equivalent of typing the options directly after the shell prompt on the command line This is a preferred method of changing shell parameters within pro cedure files because of its clarity The hyphen that usually proceeds declared options is unnecessary when using the set command The options specified by set change the shell parameters only in the shell in which they are declared All descendant shells have the default parameters unless changed within the new shell NOTE set is a built in shell command Therefore it is not in the CMDS directory OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of set e lt file gt Prints error messages from lt file gt If no file is specified the default file used is dd sys errmsg Without the e option shell prints only error numbers with no message description ne Prints no error messages This is the default l Must log off system with logout nl Must log off system with lt esc gt p Displays prompt The default prompt is np Does not display prompt p lt string gt Sets current shell prompt equal to lt string gt t Echoes input lines nt Does not echo input lines This is the default V Verbose mode Displays a message for each directory searched when executing a command nv Turns off verbose mode 110 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities set X Aborts process upon error
272. r sockman 006c0500 4 lo0 ifloop ifman 006c0380 4 le0 am7990 ifman 006bed60 1 pipe null pipeman 0068ecc0 3 pk pkdvr pkman 0048dc90 1 pkm00 pkdvr pkman 00427b50 1 3807 rb320 rbf 007e94a0 12 pcd0 rb320 pcf 007e94a0 3 pks00 pkdvr scf 004279b0 2 SEE ALSO The iniz and deiniz utilities 30 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities dir dir Display Names of Files in a Directory SYNTAX dir lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION dir displays a formatted list of file names of the specified directory file on standard output To use the dir utility type dir and the directory pathlist if desired If no parameters are specified the current data directory is shown If you use the X option the current execution directory is shown If a pathlist of a directory file is specified the files of the indicated directory are shown If the e option is included each file s entire description is displayed size address owner permissions date and time of last modification Because the shell does not in terpret the x option wildcards do not work as expected when this option is used Unless the a option is used file names that begin with a period are not displayed Unformatted Directory Listing You can print an unformatted directory listing using the u option This allows only the names of the entries of a directory to be displayed No directory header is displayed Entries are printed as follows dir
273. railer pr file1 gt p1 The following example prints file1 with no title This uses 56 lines of text per page pr file1 t gt p1 The following example prints file1 using 90 lines per page Pagination begins with page 10 pr file1 x 10 p 90 gt p1 To display a numbered unformatted listing of the data directory type dir u pr n Using Professional OS 9 101 printenv The OS 9 Utilities printenv Print Environment Variables SYNTAX printenv FUNCTION _ printenv prints any defined environment variables to standard output EXAMPLE _ printenv NAME andy TERM abm85 LIST p1 As_long_as_you_want long_value SEE ALSO setenv and unsetenv utility descriptions and the discussion of the shell environment in the chapter on the shell 102 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities procs procs Display Processes SYNTAX procs lt opts gt FUNCTION procs displays a list of processes running on the system owned by the user invoking the routine Processes can switch states rapidly usually many times per second Conse quently the display is a snapshot taken at the instant the command is executed and shows only those processes running at that exact moment procs with no options displays ten pieces of information for each process Id Process ID Pld Parent process ID Grp usr Owner of the process group and user Prior Initial priority of the process MemSiz Amount of memory the process is using
274. re Files login and logout 5 21 The Profile Commando cenone rr ni e E EEE EE E E R des 5 22 Setting up a Time Sharing System Startup Procedure File eee eee eeseeseeeeeeeeeees 5 23 The Password Filenin isisisi insesi i eee uae beia ean 5 24 Creating a Temporary Procedure Bile scsesesl hei accecivenctasitandisai tunes 5 25 IVT Te SHEL Sn cectust acceasen ccotanuzatn a a a anes E A 5 27 The Proes Wulity 1 25 22 cree ee ee 5 28 Waiting For The Background Procedures 0 ceeceeescceesseceesteeeenaeceensecesaeeeenaeeeeaaes 5 30 Stopping Procedure Seseent a seacsannavadsa EAE E E Ea E aS 5 31 Error Reportin teares a laa ates Ea cat et a de et ea tas S S 5 33 Running Compiled Intermediate Code Programs eeseseesessressesressersresreesersrerreesreseese 5 34 Making Files The Make Ulty ce nnen e Sealed ee E E ele EE N allen baad 6 1 Implicit LDS MILI OMS recess cnsothss eenn E e EE iA 6 3 Macro RecognitlOn sessie sais jee anni i a a R 6 4 Make Generated Command Lines s sssssseseeeseeeseseessrserssresstsresereseeseseresreseserssresseseese 6 6 MRE OS a A ON 6 6 Examples of the Make Utility scicscdisescaisasbevsasalsesatcensaczsdasedveseacostacdasscvedearsosastavsgecceans 6 7 Example One Updating a Document sssesseseeesseeesseeeseesseesseeesseesseesseesseeeseeessseessesse 6 8 Example Two Compiling C ProgramSs eesesssesessseesseessersseesseresseeessresseesseesseresseeessesse 6 9 Refining the C Com
275. re entered on the command line make reads and processes the entire makefile and only attempts to make the appropriate file s A makefile contains three types of entries Dependency Entry This specifies the relationship of a target file and the file s used to build the target file The entry has the following syntax lt target gt lt file gt lt file gt The list of files following the target file is known as the dependency list Command Entry This specifies the command that you must execute to update a particular target file if the target file needs to be updated make updates a target file only if it depends on files newer than itself If no instructions for update are provided make attempts to create a com mand entry to perform the operation make recognizes a command entry by a line beginning with one or more spaces or tabs Any legal OS 9 com mand line is acceptable You can list more than one command entry for any dependency Each command is forked separately unless continued from the previous command with a backslash Do not intersperse comments with commands For example lt target gt lt file gt lt file gt lt OS 9 command line gt lt OS 9 command line gt 80 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities make Comment Entry This consists of any line beginning with an asterisk All characters following a pound sign are also ignored as comments with one exception a digit fo
276. re gt dir dirl Directory of DIR1 file4 file5 file6 SE An asterisk preceding the name of a file in a dir listing indicates an error occurred while backing up this file This file is incomplete and should not be restored There are two methods of restoring files more than once The first method uses the a option with the add command This forces the file s previously marked as restored to be marked as to be restored The second method requires the f option to be used with the rest command This forces any file previously marked as restored to be restored in the current directory 7 10 Using Professional OS 9 Making Backups The Interactive Restore Process The S option forces frestore to restore all files directories of the backup from the source device without the interactive shell Using the d option allows you to specify a source device other than mtO For example to restore all files directories found on the mt1 source device to the directory BACKUP without using the interactive shell type frestore d mt1 s BACKUP The v option causes frestore to identify the name and volume number of the backup mounted on the source device The date the backup was made and the group user number of the person who made the backup is also displayed This option does not restore any files For example frestore v Backup DOCUMENTATION Made 1 16 91 10 10 By 0 0 Volume 0 The i option displays the abo
277. rect the output of dsave to a file When you redirect the output the commands that are output from dsave are essentially captured in a file You can later execute this file to actually perform the dsave operation To redirect the output from dsave to a file use the redirection modifier for standard output The standard output modifier is the gt symbol Using Professional OS 9 4 23 Dsave Copying Files Using Procedure Files The OS 9 File System For example from the PROGMS directory you can redirect the output from dsave into a file called make bckp by typing dsave gt make bckp This command creates make bckp in the current data directory To perform the dsave type make bckp at the command line Redirecting the output to a file is helpful when you want to save most but not all of the files in the direc tory or directories being saved You can edit make bckp before performing the dsave This allows you to save only selected files Regardless of how you decide to perform the dsave if dsave encounters a directory file it automatically creates a new directory and changes to that directory before generating Copy commands for files in the subdirectory In the dsave example the directory structure looks like the following after dsave has finished hO NOTES listing PROGMS CONVERSION MY PROJ CONVERSION MY PROJ temp c tally c prog1 test c temp c tally c prog1 test c If the current
278. rectory of the system disk On a multi user system your current data and execution directories are established for you as part of the initial login sequence When you login your initial directories are set up according to your password file entry A password entry is established for each user on a multi user system This entry lists the user s password current directories etc For more information on password files see the chapter in this manual on the shell and the login utility in the OS 9 Utilities section Your execution directory on a multi user system is usually the CMDS directory The CMDS directory is shared with other users CMDS contains OS 9 utilities and other executable files If all users had their own copy of all OS 9 commands a great deal of disk space would be wasted Private execution directories are also possible and are discussed later in this chapter The Home Directory On typical multi user systems all users have their own data directory but share an execution directory The private data directory allows you to organize your own files by project function or any other method without affecting other user s files The data directory specified in the password file entry is known as your home directory When you first login to the system you are placed in this directory Using the chd utility with no parameters also places you in this directory The chd utility is discussed later in this chapter On single user system
279. rent data directory For example if your current data directory is PAUL pd h0 USR PAUL Likewise if you forget which directory is your current execution directory type pd x to display the pathlist to the current execution directory Using Makdir to Create New Directories You create new directories using the makdir utility For example to create a directory called The makdir hO usr MARKET command BUS DEPT type creates a new directory called MARKET in the USR directory makdir BUS DEPT hO BUS DEPT now is a new entry in your current directory CMDS USR SYS If you want the new directory created somewhere other than your current directory you must specify a __ pathlist For example makdir CHRIS MARKET PAUL nO usr BUS DEPT creates the new directory in USR 4 16 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Rules for Constructing File Names Rules for Constructing File Names When creating files and directories you must follow certain rules Any file name can contain from 1 to 28 upper or lower case letters numbers or special characters as listed below While the file name may begin with any of the following characters or digits each file name must contain at least one letter or number Within these limitations a name can contain any combination of the following upper case letter A Z underscore lower case letter a Z period decimal digits 0 9 dollar s
280. resources and functions of a computer system Com puter resources consist of memory CPU time and input output devices such as terminals disk drives and printers OS 9 is a sophisticated operating system for microcomputers OS 9 s basic functions are to Provide an interface between the computer and the user Manage the input output I O operations of the system Provide for the loading and execution of programs Create and manage a system of directories and files Manage timesharing and multi tasking Allocate memory for various purposes Using Professional OS 9 Using OS 9 as Your Operating System An Overview of OS 9 Using OS 9 as Your Operating System The most visible function of the operating system is its role as an interface between you and the complex internal hardware and software functions of the system OS 9 was designed to make its powerful features easy to use even by persons with limited technical knowledge Because an operating system provides only part of the overall software necessary to make the computer useful application programs such as word processors and accounting packages tend to be the most frequently used programs They are not part of the operating system but they rely heavily on services such as input and output provided by the operating system Most application programs are written by users or obtained from commercial software suppliers Similarly programming languages are tools used to crea
281. ression Silent Mode Does not display matching lines Prints all lines except for those that match Reads the file names from standard input Reads the file names from lt path gt NOTES l and n cannot be used at the same time n and S cannot be used at the same time EXAMPLES To write all lines of myfile that contain occurrences of xyz to standard output enter grep xyz myfile This example searches myfile for expressions input from words counts the number of matches and gives the line number found with each occurrence grep f words myfile nc Using Professional OS 9 63 help The OS 9 Utilities help SYNTAX FUNCTION EXAMPLES On Line Utility Reference help lt utility name gt help displays information about a specific utility For information about a specific utility type help and the name of the desired utility help displays the function syntax and options of the utility After the information is displayed control returns to the shell For information about the help utility type help by itself help lists the syntax and function of the help utility NOTE Built in shell commands do not have help information help build help attr 64 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities ident ident Print OS 9 Module Identification SYNTAX ident lt opts gt lt modname gt FUNCTION ident displays module header information and the additional information
282. ring of characters Stands for any single character To send one of these characters to a utility program you must use a method called quot ing to prevent the shell from interpreting the special character Quoting consists of en closing the sequence of characters to be passed to a routine in single or double quotes For example lt char gt or lt char gt The following command line prints the indicated string echo Hello goodbye Hello goodbye However the following command displays the string Hello on your terminal screen and then attempts to execute a program called goodbye echo Hello goodbye The shell expands the two wildcards to build pathlists The question mark wildcard matches any single character The asterisk wildcard matches any string of characters dir displays the names of files in the current directory that are four characters long dir s displays all names of files in the current directory that begin with s Any command that uses a pathlist on the command line accepts a pathlist specified with wildcards When shell expands the wildcards if no explicit directory is given the files in the current data directory are searched for the matched expansion If an explicit directory name is given in the pathlist the specified directory is searched NOTE If a command uses an option to search for a file in the current execution direc tory wildcards may produce unexpected results The she
283. rk matches any single character The shell searches the current data directory or the directory given in a path for matching file names For the following examples a directory containing the following files is used directory of FILES 14 45 20 diary diary2 form form backup forms login names logistics logs old oldstuff setime c shellfacts sizes sizes backup utils1 The command list log lists the contents of login names logistics and logs The pattern log matches all file names beginning with log followed by zero or more characters The following commands demonstrate the function of this wildcard list s Lists all files in the current data directory beginning with s Shellfacts setime c and sizes del Deletes every file in the directory FILES dir backup Lists all files in the parent directory that end with backup dir x d Lists all files in the current execution directory that start with the letter d This can be helpful if you are unsure of the spelling of a particular utility The question mark matches any single character in the position where the wildcard character is located For example the command line list log only lists the contents of the file logs The following commands demonstrate the function of this wildcard del form Deletes the file forms but not form list s2 Lists the contents of sizes but not setime c or shellfacts In both examples the shell only searches for names with five char
284. rograms to use termcap They are provided for completeness P indicates that pad ding may optionally be specified P indicates that the optional padding may be based on the number of lines affected Name Type Padding Description ae string P End alternate character set al string P Add new blank line am boolean End alternate character set as string P Start alternate character set bc string Backspace if not H bs boolean Terminal can backspace with H bt string P Back tab bw boolean Backspace wraps from column 0 to last column CC string Command character in prototype if terminal settable cd string P Clear to end of display ce string P Clear to end of line ch string P Horizontal cursor motion only line stays some cl string P Clear screen cm string P Cursor motion co numeric Number of columns in line cr string P Carriage return default M cs string P Change scrolling region VT100 like cm CV string P Vertical cursor motion only da boolean Display may be retained above dB numeric Number of milliseconds of backspace delay needed db boolean Display may be retained below dC numeric Number of milliseconds of carriage return delay needed dc string P Delete character dF numeric Number of milliseconds of formfeed delay needed dl string P Delete line 8 32 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Termcap Capabilities Name Type Padding Description dm string Delete mode enter dN numeric N
285. rors Using Professional OS 9 8 11 Editing the Systype d File OS 9 System Management The SCF and RBF device descriptor macro definitions are used when creating device descriptor modules Five elements are common to SCF and RBF Name Description Port Port is the address of the device on the bus Generally this is the lowest address that the device has mapped Port is hardware dependent Vector Vector is the vector that is given to the processor at interrupt time Vector is hardware software dependent Some devices can be programmed to produce different vectors IRQLevel IRQLevel is the interrupt level 1 7 for the device When a device interrupts the processor the level of the interrupt is used to mask out lower priority devices Priority Priority is the interrupt polling table priority and is software dependent A non zero priority determines the position of the device within the vector Lower values are polled first A priority of zero indicates that the device desires exclusive use of the vector OS 9 does not allow a device to claim exclusive use of a vector if another device has already been installed on the vector nor does it allow the vector to be used by another device once the vector has been claimed for exclusive use DriverName DriverName is the module name of the device driver This name is determined by the programmer and is used by the I O system to attach the device descriptor to the driver RBF macros may
286. rsonally have running under each other The is used as a replaceable macro for the shell level number The environment vari able _ sh sets the base level This specifies the base level for counting the number of shell levels For example set the shell prompt to howdy and _sh to 0 setenv _sh 0 p howdy howdy shell 1 howdy shell 2 howdy eof 1 howdy eof howdy This specifies the specific terminal being used This allows word processors screen editors and other screen dependent programs to know what type of terminal configuration to use The Environment Utilities Three utilities are available to manipulate environment variables e setenv declares the variable and sets its value The variable is placed in an environment storage area accessed by the shell For example setenv PATH h0 cmds d0 emds dd emds Using Professional OS 9 119 shell The OS 9 Utilities setenv _sh 0 e unsetenv clears the value of the variable and removes it from storage For example unsetenv PATH unsetenv _sh e printenv prints the variables and their values to standard output For exam ple printenv PATH h0 cmds d0 cmds dd cmds PROMPT howdy _sho The Profile Command The profile built in shell command can be used to cause the current shell to read its input from the named file and then return to its original input source which is usually the keyboard To use the profile command
287. rtup 8192 00 K bytes Current total free RAM 2084 00 K bytes Free memory map Segment Address Size of Segment 5B000 1000 4 00 K bytes 5F000 2000 8 00 K bytes 99000 1E3000 1932 00 K bytes 29C000 3000 12 00 K bytes 2A1000 1F000 124 00 K bytes 2C5000 1000 4 00 K bytes End of Chapter 3 3 10 Using Professional OS 9 4 The OS 9 File System OS 9 File Storage All information stored on an OS 9 computer system is organized into files and directories Files and di rectories provide a way for you to organize your information A file may contain a program data or text A directory is a file containing the names and locations of the files and directories it contains This allows you to organize your files by topic work group etc When a file is created the information is stored as an ordered sequence of bytes These bytes are organized into sectors A sector is a pre defined group of bytes For example a sector may be composed of 256 bytes This means that every 256 bytes are grouped together as a sector During the format procedure each sector is marked as being unused The allocation map keeps track of each sector If a sector is in use it is marked in the allocation map located at the beginning of each disk as being in use When a file is created the information is stored in sectors When a file is expanded the new information is stored in sectors When a file is shortened or deleted the previously used sectors
288. rve the needs of a broad audience Whether you are a casual user or a professional programmer you will find many useful features in OS 9 Professional OS 9 is designed to provide a friendly software interface for personal computers educational systems and the professional programmer The Professional OS 9 package includes over 70 utility programs Using Professional OS 9 has been designed for use as a reference and learning guide It is divided into three distinct parts Chapters 1 4 discuss the file structure and utilities available for using OS 9 Chapter 5 6 and 7 discuss some of the advanced utilities in detail Chapter 8 discusses topics of interest to system managers This manual is the basic user reference manual for OS 9 The OS 9 Technical Manual is a companion manual for advanced programmers who wish to learn about the internal operation and function of the system At first glance the OS 9 manual set especially the OS 9 Technical Manual may seem overwhelming Fortunately you only need to know a fairly small percentage of the material presented in this manual to vii Using Professional OS 9 Preface Preface use OS 9 effectively You will find that it is easy to learn about OS 9 as you continue to work and experiment with it The secret to getting up to speed quickly with OS 9 is to first identify and learn only the basic everyday functions necessary to run applications programs and programming languages This manua
289. ry 4 7 5 3 HOME environment variable 4 8 5 3 Init module 8 2 CONFIG macro 8 10 Initializing devices 8 18 Iniz utility 8 18 Keyword 5 7 5 8 Kill utility 5 6 5 31 5 32 List utility 4 19 Load utility 8 20 Login procedure 3 2 Logout utility 5 6 Makdir utility 4 16 Make utility Chap 6 Memory allocation Mfree utility 3 9 3 10 Mfree utility 3 9 3 10 Moded utility 8 9 Modifiers 5 7 5 13 Execution 5 7 5 13 Memory size 5 9 Process priority 5 9 Redirection 5 9 5 10 5 12 Using Professional OS 9 l 3 Index Index M continued Modules De initializing 8 18 Editing Moded utility 8 9 Systype d file 8 10 Executable program 4 3 Extension 8 8 Init 8 2 8 6 8 12 Initializing 8 18 Library 1 6 Loading 8 20 Memory 1 6 8 21 Moded utility 8 9 Multi tasking features 1 4 1 5 Multi user 1 4 1 5 8 21 Multiple shells 5 27 Named pipes 5 17 Naming conventions Files directories 4 17 T O devices 5 11 Octal conversion chart Apdx A Operating system Definition 1 1 Function 1 1 1 2 OS9Boot file 2 1 8 2 Owner attributes 4 5 4 19 Page pause 3 6 Parameter Command line 5 7 5 8 Parent directory 4 6 4 14 Password file 5 24 PATH environment variable Pathlist Full 4 9 Naming conventions 4 10 Relative 4 9 4 10 4 14 5 3 P continued Pd utility 4 16 Pipe line 5 16 Construction 5 9 Definition 5 16 5 17 Filters 5 18 Named 5 17 Un named 5 17 PORT environment variable 5 3 Powering down the system 8 22 8
290. s moded OPTIONS a4 Description Lines After the Field Descriptor lines you can use any number of lines to describe the field This description is displayed when the edit mode com mand is used Each description line must begin with an exclamation point to differentiate it from a Field Descriptor These lines are optional but they are use ful when editing uncertain module fields The following lines might be used to de scribe the example used for the Field Descriptor This field contains the name that the descriptor will be known by when in memory Example Module Description in Moded fields The following example shows how you could set up a module description BO EE E E E oS kk k the following section describes an RBF device descriptor EEEE EE EEE K E E E E E E E E E E K E E E K os E E K E K E K E fs EE K k K K KK K K K kk KK KK KKK 15 1 descriptor name 5 c 0 0 This field contains the name that the descriptor will be known by when in memory port address 4 30 16 0 This is the absolute physical address of the hardware controller irq vector 1 34 10 0 This is the irq vector that the device will assert Auto vectored interrupt devices will use vectors 25 31 Vectored interrupt devices will use vectors 64 255 The Provided Moded fields File The provided moded fields file comes with module descriptions for standard RBF SBF SCF PIPE NETWORK UCM and GFM module descriptor
291. s It also includes a description for the Init module Displays the help message d lt path gt Use lt path gt for the field descriptions moded fields e lt path gt Use lt path gt for the error message file f lt path gt Specifies a file consisting of one or more modules to be loaded into the moded buffer Using Professional OS 9 95 os9gen The OS 9 Utilities os9gen Build and Link a Bootstrap File SYNTAX FUNCTION os9gen lt opts gt lt devname gt lt path gt os9gen creates and links the OS9Boot file required on any disk from which OS 9 is to be bootstrapped You can use os9gen to make a copy of an existing boot file add modules to an existing boot file or create an entirely new boot file for a different sys tem These are just a few examples To use the os9gen utility type os9gen and the name of the device on which the OS9Boot file is to be installed os9gen creates a working file called TempBoot on the device specified Each file specified on the command line is opened and copied to the TempBoot file NOTE Only super users 0 n may use this utility OS9gen can also only be used on format enabled devices After all input files are copied to TempBoot any existing OS9Boot file on the target device is renamed OldBoot If an OldBoot file is already present it is deleted before OS9Boot is renamed TempBoot is then renamed OS9Boot Its starting address and size are linked in the di
292. s as global variables NOTE If a subsequent shell redefines an environment variable the variable is only redefined for that shell and its descendents NOTE Environment variables are case sensitive Several special environment variables are automatically set up when you log on a time sharing system PORT _ This specifies the name of the terminal This is automatically set up by tsmon t1 is an example of a legal PORT name 118 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities shell HOME SHELL USER This specifies your home directory The home directory is the directory specified in your password file entry This is also the directory used when the command chd with no parameters is executed This is the process that is first executed upon logging on to the system This is the user name you type when prompted by login Four other important environment variables are available PATH This specifies any number of directories Each directory must be separated by a colon The shell uses this as a list of commands directories to search when executing a command If the default commands directory does not include the file module to execute each directory specified by PATH is searched until the file module is found or until the list is exhausted PROMPT This specifies the current prompt By specifying an at sign as _sh TERM part of your prompt you may easily keep track of how many shells you pe
293. s between the year month day etc colon semicolon slash comma or space If semicolons are used as field delimiters the date and time string must be enclosed by quotes For example setime 91 1 1531 25 30 pm If no parameters are given setime issues the prompt setime yy mm dd hh mm ss am pm Time When no am pm field is specified OS 9 system time uses the 24 hour clock For example 15 20 is 3 20 pm Midnight is specified as 00 00 Noon is specified as 12 00 Using the am pm field allows you to use the 12 hour clock If a conflict exists between the time and the am pm field such as 15 20 pm the system ignores the am pm designation Entering setime echoes the date and time when set IMPORTANT NOTE You must execute this command before OS 9 can perform time sharing operations If the system does not have a real time clock you should still use this command to set the date for the file system Systems with Battery Backed Up Clocks setime should still be run to start time slicing but you only need to give the s The date and time are read from the clock Using Professional OS 9 113 setime The OS 9 Utilities OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of setime d Does not echo date time when set S Reads time from battery backed up clock EXAMPLES setime 91 01 13 15 45 Set to January 13 1991 3 45 PM setime 910113 154500 Same as above setime 91 01 1
294. s you may establish a home directory by setting the HOME environment variable Refer to the chapter on the shell for more information on setting the HOME environment variable Using Professional OS 9 4 7 Current Directories The OS 9 File System Directory Characteristics Some important characteristics relating to directory files are e Directories have the same ownership and attributes as regular files However directories always have the d attribute set e Each file name within a directory must be unique For example you cannot store two files with the name of trial in the same directory Files can have identical names as long as they are stored in different directories e All files are stored on the same device as the directory in which they are listed The only limit to the number of files that can be stored in a directory is the amount of free disk space 4 8 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Accessing Files and Directories The Pathlist Accessing Files and Directories The Pathlist You can access all files or directories in your current data directory by specifying the name of the file or directory after the proper command When only a file or directory name is given OS 9 will not look outside your current data directory to find it If you want to access a file that is not in your current data directory or run a program that is not in your current execution directory you must either change your c
295. s 0 01 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t2 procs a displays nine pieces of information the process ID the parent process ID the process name and standard I O paths and six new pieces of information Aging F calls I calls Last Read Written The age of the process based on the initial priority and how long it has waited for processing The number of service request calls made The number of I O requests made The last system call made The number of bytes read The number of bytes written The following is an example of procs a procs a Id PId Aging F calls I calls Last Read Written Module amp I O Using Professional OS 9 5 29 Waiting For The Background Procedures The Shell 2 1 129 5 1 Wait 0 Osysgo lt gt gt gt term 3 2 132 116 127 Wait 282 129 shell lt gt gt gt term 4 3 11 1 0 TLink 0 Oxhog lt gt gt gt term 5 3 128 7 4GPrDsc 0 0 procs lt gt gt gt term 6 0 130 2 7Readlin 0 0 tsmon lt gt gt gt t1 7 0 129 2 7 ReadLn 0 Otsmon lt gt gt gt t2 The b option displays all information from procs and procs a The e option displays information for all processes in the system For more information on procs see the OS 9 Utilities section Waiting For The Background Procedures If you use OS 9 s multi tasking ability there will be times when a number of procedures are running in the background If it is important to wait for these tasks to finish before running a new procedure use the W or
296. s exited The default data length is one byte 8 bits The lt mod gt options are R W words 16 bits R W long words 32 bits No read for match or print No reread for match test R W odd addresses bytes only R W even addresses bytes only a a ee Change mode commands are lt CR gt Move to next location lt num gt Store new value reread verify match move to next location Move to previous location Move to next location Exit mode Commands may be strung together For example the following command changes one location and then exits change mode c a5 3c FF d lt addr gt lt len gt Enter memory display mode beginning at lt addr gt Contents of memory are dis played in hex and ASCII If lt len gt is not specified 256 bytes are displayed Dis play mode commands are lt CR gt Display next lt len gt bytes Exit mode other Exit mode interpret as command NOTE The display mode and change memory mode commands for the debugger are not affected by the relocation register offset Using Professional OS 9 B 7 Basic Debugger Commands The ROM Debugger Command Description di lt addr gt lt len gt e g g lt addr gt k lt addr gt k I lt chostcmd gt le lt hostcmd gt rst t lt num gt tm lt EscChar gt Command Disassemble and display lt len gt instructions beginning at lt addr gt If lt len gt is not specified 20 instructions are displayed Disa
297. s format protected Use the c option for large drives only The format utility asks whether you want to perform a physical format and a physical verify Answer y to both questions The physical format operation is a lengthy process The larger your hard disk is the longer you can expect to wait The logical verify reads each cluster from the disk Copying the Distribution Software on to the Hard Disk Once the hard disk has been formatted correctly use the dsave utility to copy the distribution software on to the hard disk To copy the distribution files Insert the first system disk in drive d0 The first system disk contains the CMDS directory i Change your current data directory to d0 chd d0 Copy all files from d0 to h0 dsave eb50 h0 If you have more than one floppy disk to copy Remove the disk in dO and replace it with the new disk to copy f Change your execution directory to NO CMDS chx h0 cmds The hard disk is now your current execution directory Y Copy all files from d0 to h0 dsave eb50 h0 Repeat this step until all floppy disks have been copied to the hard disk NOTE The first disk copied to the hard disk is the distribution disk containing the CMDS directory Making the Hard Disk the System Boot Disk Copying files on to the hard disk installs the software on the hard disk It does not make the hard disk a bootable disk To make the hard disk the system boot disk use the os9gen
298. s login with standard I O paths opened to the device If login fails because you could not supply a valid user name or password control returns to tsmon Most programs terminate when an end of file character normally lt escape gt is entered as the first character on a command line This logs you off the system and returns control to tsmon tsmon prints a message when you log off Logout after 11 minutes 30 seconds Total time 3 57 46 The Total time figure is the total amount of time that the terminal has accumulated on line since the tsmon was started tsmon is normally used to monitor I O devices capable of bi directional communication such as CRT terminals However you may use tsmon to monitor a named pipe If this is done tsmon creates the named pipe and then waits for data to be written to it by some other process When data arrives tsmon starts a shell with its input redirected to the pipe file This is useful for starting remote processes in a networked environment You can run several tsmon processes concurrently each one watching a different group of devices This must be done when more than 28 terminals are to be monitored but is sometimes useful for other reasons For example you may want to keep modems or terminals suspected of hardware trouble isolated from other devices in the system tsmon forks login with the PORT environment variable set to the SCF device name and all other environment variables cleared
299. s the first process executed when you log on to the system USER This is the user name you typed when prompted by the login command On single user systems you can set these variables with the setenv command You can also set up a procedure file with your normal configuration of these variables This procedure file could then be executed each time you startup your terminal There are four other important environment variables Variable Description PATH This specifies any number of directories A colon must separate directory paths The shell uses PATH as a list of commands directories to search when executing a command If the default commands directory does not include the file module to execute each directory specified by PATH is searched until the file module is found or the list is exhausted Variable Description Using Professional OS 9 5 3 The Shell Environment The Shell PROMPT This specifies the current prompt By specifying an at sign as part of your prompt you may easily keep track of how many shells you have running under each other is areplaceable macro for the shell level number The base level is set by the environment variable _ sh _sh This specifies the base level for counting the number of shell levels For example set the shell prompt to howdy and _ sh to 0 setenv _sh 0 p howdy howdy shell 1 howdy shell 2 howdy eof 1 howdy eof howdy TERM This specifies
300. s the specified module s from memory into your current data directory The file s created in your directory have the same name s as the specified module s To save a specified module type save followed by the name s of the module s to save lt modname gt must exist in the module directory when saved The new file is given access permissions for all modes except public write If you specify more than one module each module is stored in a separate file unless you use the f option In that case all modules listed are saved in the specified file NOTE To save a module the module must have read access permission for either your group or user ID NOTE save uses the current execution directory as the default directory Executable modules should generally be saved in the default execution directory OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of save f lt path gt Saves all specified modules to lt path gt r Rewrites existing files X Changes the default directory to the current execution directory Z Reads the module names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the module names from lt file gt EXAMPLES save x dir copy save f d1 math_pack add sub mul div Using Professional OS 9 109 set The OS 9 Utilities set Set Shell Options SYNTAX set lt opts gt FUNCTION set changes shell options for the individual shell in which they are declared To change the options for you
301. se pa rameters only if the device is iniz ed directly after the xmode changes and the driver supports these chang es Changing these parameters is usually done in the startup file or by first deiniz ing a file For example the following command sequence changes the baud rate of t1 to 9600 deiniz t1 xmode t1 baud 9600 iniz t1 This type of command sequence changes the device descriptor and initializes it on the system Only the five parameters mentioned above need this special sequence to be changed All other xmode parameters are changed immediately xmode s parameters are documented in the OS 9 Utilities section Using Professional OS 9 8 29 The Termcap File Format OS 9 System Management The Termcap File Format The termcap file is a text file that contains control code definitions for one or more types of terminals Each entry is a complete description list for a particular kind of terminal The first section of a termcap entry is divided into three parts e A two character entry e The most common name e A long name Each part is a different way of naming the terminal A character separates the parts of a termcap entry The first part is a two character entry This is a holdover from early UNIX editions The second part is the most common name for the terminal This name must contain no blanks The final part is a long name fully describing the terminal This name may contain blanks for readability For example
302. sectors of track zero These sectors cannot be defective 52 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities format NOTE format uses a fast verify mode This means that format reads a minimum of 32 sectors If the cluster size is greater than 32 sectors then one cluster worth of sectors is read If the cluster size is less than 32 sectors 32 sectors are read If you want format to use the cluster size regardless of the number of sectors per cluster you must use the nf option For example if your cluster size has one sector 32 sectors are read by default while only one sector would be read if you specify nf NOTE You must run os9gen to create the bootstrap after the disk has been formatted if you use the disk as a system disk OPTIONS l lt num gt nf np NV sd SS t lt num gt V lt name gt Displays the options function and command syntax of format Specifies the number of sectors per cluster lt num gt must be decimal and must be a power of 2 The default is 1 Double density floppy disk Double sided floppy disk Displays elapsed verify time This is useful for checking the sector interleave values Specifies the number for sector interleave offset value lt num gt is decimal Specifies no fast verify mode Specifies no physical format Specifies no physical verification Inhibits the ready prompt This option is ignored if the device is a hard disk This makes it necessary
303. sed in creating short text files RETURN list newfile Build should only be used in creating short text files Using Professional OS 9 11 cfp The OS 9 Utilities cfp SYNTAX FUNCTION Command File Processor cfp lt opts gt lt path1 gt lt path2 gt Cfp creates a temporary procedure file in the current data directory and then invokes the shell to execute it To create a temporary procedure file type cfp the name of the procedure file lt path1 gt and the file s lt path2 gt to be executed by the procedure file All occurrences of an asterisk in the procedure file lt path1 gt are replaced by the given pathlists lt path2 gt unless preceded by the tilde character For example translates to The command procedure is not executed until all input files have been read For example if you have a procedure file in your current data directory called copyit that consists of a single command line copy all of your C programs from two directories PROGMS and MISC JUNK are placed in your current data directory by typing cfp copyit progms c misc junk c If you use the s lt string gt option you may omit the name of the procedure file but you must enclose the option and its string in quotes The s option causes the cfp utility to use the string instead of a procedure file For example cfp s copy progms c misc junk c NOTE You must
304. sgo lt gt gt gt term 3 2 0 0 128 4 75k Ow 4 11 01 13 shell lt gt gt gt term 43 00 5 400k Oa 12 42 06 00 14 xhog lt gt gt gt term 5 3 0 0 128 850k 0 0 08 00 00 procs lt gt gt term 6 0 0 0 128 400k Os 0 02 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t1 7 0 0 128 4 00k Os 0 01 01 12 tsmon lt gt gt gt t2 procs a Id PId Aging F calls I calls Last Read Written Module amp I O 2 1 129 5 1 Wait 0 Osysgo lt gt gt gt term 3 2 132 116 127 Wait 282 129 shell lt gt gt gt term 43 11 1 0 TLink 0 Oxhog lt gt gt gt term 5 3 128 7 4GPrDsc 0 0 procs lt gt gt gt term 6 0 130 2 7ReadLn 0 0tsmon lt gt gt gt tl 7 0 129 2 7ReadLn 0 Otsmon lt gt gt gt t2 104 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities profile profile Read Commands from File and Return SYNTAX FUNCTION profile lt path gt profile causes the current shell to read its input from the named file and then return to its original input source which is usually the keyboard The file specified in lt path gt may contain any utility or shell commands including those to set or unset environment variables or to change directories These changes remain in effect after the command executes This is in contrast to calling a normal procedure file by name only which would then be executed by a child shell This would not affect the environment of the calling shell You can nest profile commands That is the file itself may contain a profile command
305. sk s Identification Sector LSN 0 for use by the OS 9 bootstrap firmware If your boot file is non contiguous or larger than 64K use the e option NOTE Your bootstrap ROMs must support this feature If they do not you should not use this option If the z option is used oS9gen first uses the files specified on the command line and then the file names from its standard input or from the specified pathlist one pathlist per line If the names are entered manually no prompts are given and the end of file key usually lt escape gt or a blank line is entered after the line containing the last path list To determine what modules are necessary for your boot file use the ident utility with the OS9Boot file that came with your system The q option updates information in the disk s Identification Sector by directing it to point to a file already contained in the root directory of the specified device The q option is useful when restoring the OldBoot file as the valid boot on the disk os9gen renames the specified file to be OS9Boot and saves the current boot as described previously 96 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities os9gen The r option removes the pointer to the boot file but does not delete the file This is useful if you delete the bootfile from your disk using the del command Deleting the bootfile from the file structure does not remove the bootfile pointers from the disk s Identification Sector It
306. ss of the type of execution specified the shell immediately returns command to the keyboard displays the prompt and waits for a new com mand This frees you from waiting for a process or sequence of processes to terminate This is especially useful when making a listing of a long text file on a printer Instead of waiting for the listing to print to completion you can use the concurrent execution separator to use your time more effi ciently Using Professional OS 9 5 15 Shell Command Line Processing The Shell If you have several processes running at once you can display a status summary of all your processes with the procs utility procs lists your current processes and pertinent information about each process The procs utility is discussed later in this chapter Pipes and Filters The third kind of separator is the exclamation point used to construct pipelines Pipelines consist of two or more concurrent programs whose standard input and or output paths connect to each other using pipes A pipe is simply a way to connect the output of a process to the input of another process so the two run as a sequence of processes a pipeline Pipes are one of the primary means by which data is transferred from process to process for interprocess communications Pipes are first in first out buffers They may hold up to 90 bytes of data at a time All programs in a pipeline are executed concurrently The pipes automatically synchron
307. ssemble mode commands are lt CR gt Display next lt len gt bytes Exit mode other Exit mode interpret as command Enable disable debugger Execute program starting at lt PC gt Execute program starting at lt addr gt NOTE If the program is stopped at a breakpoint it is necessary to trace one instruction before using the g command Kill remove breakpoint located at lt addr gt lt addr gt is relative to the default relocation register Kill all breakpoints Download data in Motorola S record format lt hostcmd gt is sent to the host as a command line to trigger the download I O delay must be set in dO before the download The load addresses are displayed every 512 bytes Same as I lt hostcmd gt except received S records are displayed instead of load addresses Reset system PC Initial PC SSP Initial SSP and SR Supervisor state in terrupts masked are set to level 7 This allows a g command to restart the system Enter trace mode and trace lt num gt instructions Trace mode commands are lt CR gt Trace lt num gt more instructions Exit trace mode other Exit trace mode interpret as command Enter talk through mode This mode is exited when the specified escape character is typed Description lt reg gt lt num gt pc lt addr gt Display all registers Set register lt reg gt to value lt num gt Set program counter to lt addr gt Using Professional OS 9 The ROM Debu
308. st If you execute dir you see that test is no longer displayed When deleting files you may use wildcards For example if you have three files trial trial1 and trial c in a directory and you want to use wildcards to delete trial and trial1 you may be tempted to type del trial but this would also delete trial c a file you want to keep Use caution when you use wildcards with utilities like del and deldir It is easy to unintentionally delete files you want to save NOTE Wildcards are discussed in the chapter on the shell The del p option displays the following prompt before deleting a file delete lt filename gt y n a q Type y to delete the file n if you do not want to delete the file a if you want to delete all specified files without further prompts and q if you want to quit the deleting process This helps prevent deleting files you want to keep Deleting a directory is a little different Use the deldir utility to delete directories deldir first deletes all the files and directories in the given directory and then if no errors occur finally deletes the directory name For example deldir USER2 Deleting directory USER2 Delete List or Quit d l or q At the prompt type to list the contents of the directory d to delete the directory or q to quit and not delete anything Just a reminder Never delete a file or directory unless you are sure you do not need it End of Chapter 4 4 26 Using Prof
309. st six commands after the comment identifying the function of the procedure broadcast three warn ings to the terminals on the system The first warning tells the users that the system is going down The other two warnings serve as reminders Remember that you should also give verbal warnings The remaining command lines shut down the system spl This command terminates the spooler All unfinished jobs are lost when the spooler is terminated nmon nO d This command brings the network down Users from other networks will no longer be able to login to the system being shut down sleep s3 This command causes the system to wait three seconds before executing the next command line This allows the previous commands time to complete execution break This command sends a break call to the ROM debugger When the ROM debugger receives this call the system shuts down 8 22 Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Installing OS 9 On a Hard Disk Installing OS 9 On a Hard Disk Once you have brought up the system and tested its basic operations install OS 9 on the hard disk and use it as the system boot device Installing the distribution software on the hard disk involves five steps e Checking the hard disk device descriptor e Formatting the hard disk e Copying the distribution software on to the hard disk e Making the hard disk the system boot disk e Test booting from the hard disk Checking the Hard Disk Device Descrip
310. stead of I ReadLn it is possible to output data to a terminal that is not logged in without having to wait for someone to press a key Using Professional OS 9 141 unlink The OS 9 Utilities unlink Unlink Memory Module SYNTAX unlink lt opts gt lt modname gt FUNCTION unlink tells OS 9 that you no longer need the memory module s named To unlink an attached module type unlink and the name s of the module s to unlink The link count is then be decremented by one If the link count becomes zero the mod ule directory entry is deleted and the memory is de allocated It is good practice to un link modules whenever possible to make most efficient use of available memory re sources WARNING Never unlink a module you did not link to or load Unlinking a module more than once may prematurely lower its link count and possibly destroy the module while it is still in use OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of unlink Z Reads the module names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the module names from lt file gt EXAMPLES unlink pgm pm5 pgm9 Unlinks pgm pgm5 and pgm9 and lowers the link count of each module by one dir u unlink z Pipes an unsorted listing of the current data directory to unlink This unlinks all modules contained in the directory and lowers the link count of each module by one unlink z namefile Unlinks each module listed in namefile and lowers the link count
311. system It is the primary interface with the system When you enter a command it is the shell s job to translate the command into something OS 9 can understand The shell provides many functions and options A chapter is exclusively devoted to an in depth discussion of the features available This section is intended to provide just enough familiarity with the shell for you to run basic OS 9 commands The shell functions in two ways e Accepting interactive commands from your keyboard e Reading a sequence of command lines from a special type of file called a procedure file The shell executes each command line in the procedure file just as if the command lines had been typed in manually from the keyboard Procedure files are a convenient way to eliminate typing frequently used identical sequences of commands When the shell is ready for command input it displays a prompt You can now enter a command line followed by a carriage return The first word of the command line is the name of a command It may be in upper or lower case The command may be the name of e AnOS 9 utility command e An application program or programming language e A procedure file Most commands require or accept additional parameters or options These parameters and options provide the program and or the shell with additional information such as file names and directory names to search Almost all options are preceded by a hyphen character All parameters ar
312. system manager should assign a unique ID to each potential user Initial process priority This number may be from 1 to 65535 It indicates the priority of the initial process f Initial execution directory This field is usually set to d0 CMDS Specifying a period for this field defaults the initial execution directory to the CMDS file Y Initial data directory This is usually the specific user directory Specifying a period for this directory defaults to the current directory y Initial Program This field contains the name and parameters of the program to be initially executed This is usually shell NOTE Fields left empty are indicated by two consecutive commas The following is a sample password file superuser secret 0 0 255 shell p howdy suzy morning 1 5 128 d0 SUZY shell don dragon 3 10 100 d0 DON Basic For more information on password files see the login utility in the OS 9 Utilities section 5 24 Using Professional OS 9 The Shell Creating a Temporary Procedure File Creating a Temporary Procedure File You can create temporary procedure files to perform tasks which require a sequence of commands The cfp utility creates a temporary procedure file in the current data directory and calls the shell to execute it After the task is complete cfp automatically deletes the procedure file unless you use the nd option to specify that you do not want the procedure file deleted The foll
313. t descriptors are bad Therefore the allocation map is not updated for bad FDs While building the allocation map dcheck ensures that each disk cluster appears only once in the file structure If a cluster appears more than once dcheck displays a message Sector xxxxxx byte nn bit n previously allocated This message indicates the cluster at sector XXXXXX has been found at least once before in the file structure byte nn bit n specifies in which byte of the bitmap this error occurred and in which bit in that byte The first byte in the bitmap is numbered zero For dcheck s purposes bits are numbered zero through seven the most significant bit is numbered zero The message may be printed more than once if a cluster appears in a segment in more than one file Occasionally sectors on a disk are marked as allocated even though they are not asso ciated with a file or the disk s free space This is most commonly caused by media de fects discovered by format These defective sectors are not included in the free space for the disk This can also happen if a disk is removed from a drive while files are still open or if a directory containing files is deleted by a means other than deldir Using Professional OS 9 23 dcheck The OS 9 Utilities OPTIONS If all the sectors of a cluster are not used in the file system dcheck prints a message xxxxxx cluster only partially used The allocation map created by dcheck is then compared
314. t file3 gt p2 The following command accomplishes the same thing cfp s list gt p2 file1 file2 file3 14 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities chd chx chd chx Change Current Data Directory Current Execution Directory SYNTAX chd lt path gt chx lt path gt FUNCTION chd and chx are built in shell commands used to change OS 9 s working data directory or working execution directory To change data directories type chd and the pathlist to the new data directory To change execution directories type chx and the pathlist to the new execution directory In both cases a full or relative pathlist may be used Relative pathlists used by chd and chx are relative to the current data and execution directory respectively If the HOME environment variable is set the chd command with no specified directory will change your data directory to the directory specified by HOME NOTE These commands do not appear in the CMDS directory as they are built in to the shell EXAMPLES chd d1 PROGRAMS chx chx binary_files test_programs chx D0 CMDS chd D1 Using Professional OS 9 15 cmp The OS 9 Utilities cmp Compare Two Binary Files SYNTAX cmp lt opts gt lt path1 gt lt path2 gt FUNCTION cmp opens two files and performs a comparison of the binary values of the correspond ing data bytes of the files If any differences are encountered the file offset address the hexadecimal value an
315. t routine sets the initial execution and data directories to this device prior to forking the SysStart process Set this label to zero for a ROM based system For example SysDev set 0 ConsolINm ConsolNm is a character string that contains the name of the path to the console terminal port Messages to be printed during startup appear here ClockNm ClockNm is a character string that contains the name of the clock module You can set other system parameters in this macro to override the default values created by the init a source file This allows you to perform system tuning without modifying the generic init a file The following is a portion of an example systype d file CONFIG macro endm Slice set 10 ifdef _INITMOD Compat set ZapMem patternize memory endc When editing the Init module constants may use either values or labels CPUTyp set 68020 is an exam ple of a constant that uses a value These constants may appear anywhere in the systype d file Compat set ZapMem is an example of a constant that uses a label These constants must appear outside the CON FIG macro and must be conditionalized to be invoked only when init a is being assembled If these values are placed inside the CONFIG macro the old defaults are still used If a constant that requires a label is placed outside the macro and not conditionalized illegal external reference errors result when making other files You can use the _INITMOD label to avoid these er
316. t use either of these options unless you thoroughly understand what you are doing These errors could be caused by previously mentioned problems and perhaps should not be repaired Restrictions Only the super user user 0 n may use this utility dcheck should have exclusive access to the disk being checked dcheck can be fooled if the disk allocation map changes while it is building its bitmap file from the changing file structure Displays the options function and command syntax of dcheck d lt num gt Prints the path to the directory lt num gt deep r Repair mode Prompts to turn on or off bits in the bit map y Repair mode Does not prompt for repair but answers yes to all 24 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities dcheck EXAMPLE prompts This option must be used with the r option dcheck d2 Volume Ram Disk Caution Volatile on device dd 001000 total sectors on media 256 bytes per sector Sector 000001 is start of bitmap 0200 bytes in allocation map 1 sector s per cluster Sector 000003 is start of root dir Building allocation map 0003 sectors used for id sector and allocation map Checking allocation map Ram Disk Caution Volatile file structure is intact 5 directories 60 files 580096 of 1048576 bytes 0 55 of 1 00 meg used on media Using Professional OS 9 25 deiniz The OS 9 Utilities deiniz Detach a Device SYNTAX FUNCTION
317. table before executing an unfamiliar module OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of mdir a Displays the language field instead of the type field in an extended listing Displays the extended module directory t lt type gt Displays only the modules of the specified type u Displays an unformatted listing used for piping the output etc EXAMPLES To save space the following examples are fairly incomplete Module directories are generally much larger mdir Module Directory at 15 32 38 kernel syscache ssm init tk147 rtclock rbf mdir e Addr Size Owner Perm Type Revs Ed Lnk Module name 00006f00 27562 0 0 0555 Sys a000 83 2 kernel 0000daaa 368 0 0 0555 Sys a000 10 1 syscache 0000dcla 1682 0 0 0555 Sys a000 29 1ssm 0000e2ac 622 0 0 0555 Sys 8000 20 0 init 0000e51a 322 0 0 0555Sys a000 7 1tk147 0000e65c 494 0 0 0555 Subr a000 8 0 rtclock 0000e84a 8952 0 0 0555 Fman e000 79 26 rbf mdir ea Addr Size Owner Perm Lang Revs Ed Lnk Module name 00006f00 27562 0 0 0555 Obj a000 83 2 kernel 0000daaa 368 0 0 0555 Obj a000 10 1 syscache 0000dcla 1682 0 0 0555 Obj a000 29 1 ssm 0000e2ac 622 0 0 0555 8000 20 Oinit 0000e51a 322 0 0 0555 Obj a000 7 1tk147 0000e65c 494 0 0 0555 Obj a000 8 amp 8 Ortclock 0000e84a 8952 0 0 0555 Obj e000 79 26rbf 88 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities merge Copy and Combine Files to Standard Output SYNTAX merge lt opts gt lt path gt FUNCTION merge copies
318. te application programs These rely heavily on and are closely related to the operating system To help make OS 9 easy to use a set of over 70 programs called utilities are included Utilities are not part of the basic operating system Instead they are actually small application programs that provide essential housekeeping management customization and maintenance functions Some utilities such as the uMACS text editor are useful general purpose application programs Using OS 9 s Functions OS 9 s many capabilities and functions can be used in two basic ways The first method uses the utility command set and the shell command interpreter program This allows you to type OS 9 commands directly on your keyboard These commands are translated into the more complex internal system calls actually required to carry out the desired operations The OS 9 utilities are described in detail in the OS 9 Utilities section The second method uses system calls System calls are requests made to OS 9 within programs written in assembler or a high level language These system calls are available to load programs into memory create new tasks create or delete files read write open or close files and so on All OS 9 programming languages have statements that cause the program to use OS 9 system calls often in a hidden manner System calls are largely of interest to advanced programmers and are discussed in detail in the OS 9 Technical Manual 1 2
319. te three types of command lines compiler command lines assembler command lines and linker command lines Compiler command lines are generated if a source file with a suffix of c p or f needs to be recompiled The compiler command line generated by make has the following syntax CC CFLAGS r RDIR SDIR lt file gt c f or p Assembler command lines are generated when an assembly language source file needs to be re assembled The assembler command line generated by make has the following syntax RC RFLAGS SDIR lt file gt a o RDIR lt file gt r Linker command lines are generated if an object file needs to be relinked in order to re make the program module The linker command line generated by make has the following syntax LC LFLAGS RELS lt file gt r f ODIR lt file gt WARNING When make is generating a command line for the linker it looks at its list and uses the first relocatable file that it finds but only the first one For example prog xr y r z r generates ce x r NOt cc xr y r z r OF cc prog r Make Options Several options allow make even greater versatility for maintaining files modules These options may be included on the command line when you run make or they may be included in the makefile for conve nience When a command is executed it is echoed to standard output unless the S or silent option is used or the command line starts with an at sig
320. th descrip tor contains information specific to an open path Every open path is represented by a path descrip tor Path descriptors are allocated and deallocated as paths are opened and closed pathlist A list of names that specifies the location of the file or I O device to be associated with a path It may in various combinations include a device name one or more directory names and a file name permission Term used to indicate that a certain attribute is set for a file For example owner read permission Also sometimes used for the term attribute pipe A special type of I O path that connects and synchronizes the standard output of a program to the standard input of another simultaneously running program Chains of piped programs are called pipelines See also filter and standard I O paths Using Professional OS 9 C 5 Glossary Glossary pipeline See pipe position independent code Code that does not reference absolute addresses All OS 9 code must be position independent procedure file A file that contains a list of commands to be performed by the shell as if they were typed in from a keyboard process An individual running program synonymous with task process ID A unique code number assigned by OS 9 when a new process is created It identifies the process in subsequent commands or system calls program module A memory module which contains executable code All OS 9 programs must be kept in memory m
321. the computer Once format has been loaded into mem ory you can remove your system disk from the drive OS 9 can execute the copy of format that resides inmemory Any OS 9 utility can be loaded and executed in this fashion To load the format utility into memory type the following command at the prompt load format When format has been loaded remove the system disk from the drive Place the disk to format into the drive At the prompt type format d0 This command line formats the disk Continuing the Formatting Process with Either a Single Drive or a Multiple Drive In the case of both single and multiple drive systems format displays the specific disk format settings followed by a prompt Formatting device lt drive name gt proceed NOTE lt drive name gt is replaced by the name of the device on which you are trying to format For example d0 If the drive name in the prompt is not the name of the drive with the blank disk type q to quit or your only system disk may be erased If the drive name and parameters in the prompt are correct type y for yes If you type y at the prompt there will be a pause while the disk is being formatted format then prompts for the name of the disk volume name After you have entered the volume name format prints 2 4 Using Professional OS 9 Starting OS 9 The Backup Procedure verifying media building bitmap During the final phase of the process the hexadecim
322. the de fault column separator d Specifies the actual page depth f Pads the page using a series of n new line instead of a f form feed h lt num gt Sets the number of blank lines after title line The default is 5 k lt num gt Sets the lt num gt columns that the output file will be listed in for multi column output l lt num gt Sets the left margin to lt num gt The default is 0 m Prints files simultaneously one file per column If three files are given on the command line each file is printed in its own column on the page n lt num gt Specifies the line numbering increment lt num gt The default is 1 100 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities pr O Truncates lines longer than the right margin By default long lines are wrapped around to the next line p lt num gt Specifies the number of lines per page lt num gt The default is 61 r lt num gt Sets the right margin to lt num gt The default is 79 t Does not print title u lt title gt Uses specified title instead of file name lt title gt may not be longer than 48 characters x lt num gt Sets the starting page number to lt num gt The default is 1 Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES The following example prints file1 using the default values of 55 lines of text per page one line for the title and 5 lines each for the header and t
323. the download com mands A value of 20 works well in most cases with a data link running at 9600 baud but you may have to experiment with this value as it is dependent on a combination of characteristics of the host system e xoff response lag time e The target system CPU speed e The baud rate If the download command seems to hang up a lt Ccontrol gt E character aborts the download and also sends an abort signal to the host system This may happen if the I O buffer delay is not large enough or if the OS 9 host s screen pause is on Downloading using these commands should only be attempted after a hardware reset or after a debugger rst command Otherwise stack data conflicts may occur within OS 9 and may produce strange results If you are debugging only one module the module should be kept in a different file than the main OS 9 download file This allows the main OS 9 code already in memory to be used and only the new version of the module will have to be downloaded This will save a considerable amount of time The rst com mand must be used first B 6 Using Professional OS 9 The ROM Debugger Basic Debugger Commands Basic Debugger Commands Command Description b Display addresses of all breakpoints b lt addr gt Set breakpoint at lt addr gt lt addr gt is relative to the default relocation register c lt mod gt lt addr gt Enter change memory mode starting at lt addr gt lt mod gt applies until change mode i
324. the user input commands after logging in The login and logout procedure files provide a way to execute desired commands when logging on to and leaving the system To make use of these files they must be located in the home directory login is executed each time the login command is executed This allows you to run a number of initializing commands without remembering each and every command login is processed as a command file by the login shell immediately after successfully logging on to a system After all commands in the login file are processed the shell prompts the user for more commands The main difference in handling login is that the login shell itself actually executes the commands rather than creating another shell to execute the commands You can issue commands such as set and setenv within login and have them affect the login shell This is especially useful for setting up the environment variables PATH PROMPT TERM and _ sh Here is an example login file setenv PATH h0 cmds d0 cmds dd cmds h0 doc spex setenv PROMPT what next setenv _sh 0 setenv TERM abm85h querymail date dir Using Professional OS 9 5 21 Shell Procedure Files The Shell logout is executed to exit the login shell and leave the system logout is processed before the login shell terminates It only processes the logout file when given to the login shell other subsequent shells simply terminate You cou
325. ther redirect os9gen standard input or use the specified file as input build d0 bootlist Create file bootlist d0 os9boot Enter first file name d0 tape driver Enter second file name d2 video driver Enter third file name V1 2 of video driver Comment line RETURN Terminate build os9gen d1 z lt d0 bootlist Redirects standard input os9gen d1 z d0 bootlist Reads input from pathlist NOTE os9gen treats any input line preceded by an asterisk as a comment The following command makes the OldBoot file the current boot and saves the current OS9BOOT file as OldBoot os9gen d1 q oldboot 98 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities pd pd Print the Working Directory SYNTAX pd lt opts gt FUNCTION pd displays a pathlist showing the path from the root directory to your current data directory Programs can use pd to discover the actual physical location of files or by users to find their whereabouts in the file system pd x displays the pathlist from the root directory to the current execution directory OPTIONS Displays the option function and command syntax of pd X Displays the path to the current execution directory EXAMPLES chd D1 STEVE TEXTFILES MANUALS pd d1 STEVE TEXTFILES MANUALS chd pd d1 STEVE TEXTFILES chd pd d1 STEVE pd x d0 CMDS Using Professional OS 9 99 pr The OS 9 Utilities pr SYNTAX FUNCTION OP
326. tional program because you cannot invoke it from the command line Assuming the ROM debugger is present and enabled it is invoked in the following situations e When the machine is turned on and the UseDebug routine in the sysinit a file returns the Zero flag of the CCR as false e When the abort signal auto vector level 7 is encountered e When a bus error address error illegal instruction error or trace exception is encountered Overview of Debugger Functions The ROM debugger loads and tests OS 9 and I O drivers The debugger s command set allows you to analyze programs by tracing single instruction stepping and breakpointing It can disassemble instruc tions as the instructions are traced or stepped or as a block Commands can also examine or alter memory or CPU registers Depending on the type of debugger options selected you can communicate with the host system as a ter minal and download programs into RAM for testing via the communications link Using Professional OS 9 B 1 Overview of Debugger Functions The ROM Debugger The debugger accepts command lines from the console The command lines consist of a command code followed by a return key Use the backspace lt control gt H and line delete lt control gt X keys to correct errors If the system s ioxxx a files resemble the standard Microware versions you can use Xoff lt control gt S and xon lt control gt Q to suspend and resume output respectively
327. to an existing file you will receive Error 000 218 Tried to create a file that already exists If you know the file exists but you want to overwrite it anyway use the r option For example the following command replaces the contents of green with the contents of fall copy fall green r If you list the contents of both files you will see that they are identical At some point you may want to copy more than one file at a time into another directory By using the w lt dir gt option of Copy you can copy more than one file with a single command For example if your current directory is PROG and you want to copy all of the files in PROG into the TEXT directory you could type the following command line copy w text This option will print the name of the file after each successful copy If an error occurs the prompt continue y n is displayed Remember that an asterisk is a wildcard For more information about wildcards refer to the section on wildcards in the chapter on the shell ae copy uses a4K memory buffer by default This means that only 4K of information is read from the original file and written to the new file at one time Using Professional OS 9 4 21 Dsave Copying Files Using Procedure Files The OS 9 File System If you have a large file the copy procedure may be slow because the system has to perform multiple read and write statements The b option may be used to increase the buffer size
328. to explicitly state that you want to format a hard disk Single density floppy disk Single sided floppy disk Specifies the number of cylinders given in decimal Volume name This name can be 32 characters maximum NOTE If the name contains blanks enclose the option and name with quotation marks For example v Name of disk EXAMPLES format D1 dsdd v database t 77 format D1 sssd r Using Professional OS 9 53 free The OS 9 Utilities free Display Free Space Remaining on a Mass Storage Device SYNTAX FUNCTION OPTIONS EXAMPLE free lt opts gt lt devname gt free displays the number of unused 256 byte sectors on a device available for new files or for expanding existing files free also displays the disk s name creation date cluster size and largest free block in bytes To use the free utility type free followed by the name of the device to examine The device name must be the name of a mass storage multi file device Data sectors are allocated in groups called clusters The number of sectors per cluster depends on the storage capacity and physical characteristics of the specific device This means that small amounts of free space given in sectors may not be divisible into the same number of files For example a given disk system uses 8 sectors per cluster A free command shows the disk has 32 sectors free Because memory is allocated in clusters a maximum of four
329. to the editor s memory If a module of the same name exists in the file it becomes the current module If no such module exists there is no current module If the f option is used and a module name is specified on the command line the specified module becomes the current module The following commands may be executed from command mode Command Description e dit Edits the current module f ile Opens a file of modules I ist Lists the contents of the current module m odule Finds a module in a file w rite Updates the module CRC and writes to the file q uit Returns to the shell Calls the OS 9 shell Prints this help message Once moded is invoked it attempts to read the moded fields file This file contains module field information for each type of module to edit Without this file moded cannot function Using Professional OS 9 91 moded The OS 9 Utilities moded searches for moded fields in the following directories in this order e Search device dd first e Search the default system device as specified in the Init module M SysDev If the Init module cannot be linked to the SYS directory is searched for on the current device If this file cannot be found an error is returned Selecting the Current Module If you do not specify a module or file on the command line you may open a module or file from command mode using the e or f commands respectively The e command prompts for a fi
330. to the system at startup be iniz ed in the startup file NOTE Non sharable devices must be placed in a bootfile to become known to the system If a non shar able device is iniz ed it is unusable because the link count will have been incremented causing it to appear to be in use iniz ing the connected device at startup initializes the device and allocates memory for its driver for the duration of the time that the system is running unless specifically deiniz ed For example a system with two floppy drives and one hard disk would iniz these devices in the startup file iniz h0 d0 d1 t1 p1 p NOTE For more information on the iniz and deiniz utilities refer to the OS 9 Utilities section Loading Utilities Into Memory load z sys loadfile The next line of the startup file loads a number of utilities into memory If a utility is not already in mem ory it must be loaded into memory before it is used Pre loading basic utilities at startup time avoids the necessity of loading the utility each time it is executed To load utilities into memory at startup you must create a file containing the names of each utility to load one utility per line While the file may have any desired name Microware recommends loadfile for obvi ous reasons This file can be located in any directory as long as you specify its location on the command line If loadfile were located in the SYS directory the startup file command line is 8 18 Using Profess
331. tor The installed hard disk may not necessarily match the parameters in the provided h0 and hOfmt device descriptors For example the number of cylinders heads etc for your hard disk may be different than the default parameters specified in the device descriptors Before attempting to use the hard disk carefully examine the disk macros in systype d If the parameters match the drive in use the supplied descriptors will work If not edit systype d and remake the descriptors or use the moded utility to remake the descriptors The moded utility makes changes any device descriptor module and updates its CRC Once the descriptors are made make a new bootfile with the new descriptors replacing the old ones Formatting the Hard Disk Once the descriptors match the type of drive in use format the hard disk Formatting the hard disk builds an OS 9 file structure on the media and tests the media for defective areas Any new descriptors are also checked you should perform backups to floppy or tape of this information The format process WARNING If you have any vital information such as data or programs on this disk completely erases any data on the disk Using Professional OS 9 8 23 Copying the Distribution Software on to the Hard Disk OS 9 System Management To turn off page pause and format the hard disk enter tmode nopause format hOfmt c lt cluster size gt NOTE hOfmt must be the device name as hO i
332. tput character default 07 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal type h ACIA initialization value shows parity character size and number of stop bits Value in hexadecimal This value is affected by changing the individual par ity CS character length and stop stop bits values This value cannot be changed by tmode par s Shows parity using one of the following strings odd even or none Changing parity will affect the type value Parity cannot be changed by tmode cs n Shows character length using one of the following values n 8 7 6 or 5 bits Changing character length will change the type value Character length cannot be changed by tmode Name Function stop n Shows number of stop bits used n 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits Changing the stop bit value affects the type value The number of stop bits used cannot be changed by tmode 134 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities tmode baud n xon h xoff h tabc h tabs n normal OPTIONS Baud rate The baud rate may currently be set to the following values n 50 134 5 600 2000 4800 19200 75 150 1200 2400 7200 38400 110 300 1800 3600 9600 extern The baud rate cannot be changed by tmode DC1 resume output character normally lt control gt Q default 11 Nu meric value of character in hexadecimal DC2 suspend output character normally lt control gt S default 13 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal Tab character nor
333. tructure of the makefile must be carefully examined Implicit Definitions Any time a command line is generated make assumes that the target file is a program to compile There fore if the target file is not a program to compile any necessary command entries must be specified for each dependency list make uses the following definitions and rules when forced to create a command line object files Files with no suffixes An object file is made from a relocatable file and is linked when it needs to be made relocatable files Files appended by the suffix r Relocatable files are made from source files and are assembled or compiled if they need to be made source files Files having one of the following suffixes a c f or p default compiler cc default assembler r68 Using Professional OS 9 6 3 Macro Recognition Making Files default linker cc default directory for all files current data directory NOTE The default linker should only be used with programs using Cstart Macro Recognition In addition to recognizing compilation rules and definitions make recognizes certain macros make rec ognizes a macro by the dollar sign character in front of the name If a macro name is longer than a single character the entire name must be surrounded by parentheses For example R refers to the macro R PFLAGS refers to the macro PFLAGS B and B refer to the macro B and BR is interpreted as the value for the
334. ts a user name and password which is checked against a validation or password file If the information is correct the user s system priority user ID and working directories are set up according to information stored in the file The initial program specified in the password file is also executed This initial program is usually the shell The date time and process number are also displayed If you cannot supply a correct user name and password after three attempts the login attempt is aborted NOTE If the shell from which you called login is not needed again you may discard it using the ex utility to start the login command ex login To log off the system you must terminate the initial program specified in the password file For most programs including shell you can do this by typing an end of file character escape as the first character on a line If the file SYS motd exists a successful login displays the contents of motd on your terminal screen Using Professional OS 9 75 login The OS 9 Utilities The Password File The password file must be present in the SYS directory being used h0 SYS dO SYS etc The file contains one or more variable length text entries one for each user name These entries are not shell command lines Each entry has seven fields Each field is delimited by a comma The fields are User name This field may be up to 32 characters long It cannot include spaces The user name m
335. ttributes of any file in the system The file permission abbreviations are d Directory file S Single user file s denotes a non sharable file r Read permission to owner w Write permission to owner e Execute permission to owner pr Read permission to public pw Write permission to public pe Execute permission to public NOTE The owner is the creator of the file Owner access is given to any user with the same group ID number as the owner The public is any user with a different group ID number than the owner You can determine file ownership with the dir e command SPECIAL USE You can use attr to change a directory file to a non directory file if all entries have been deleted from it You may also use the deldir utility to delete directory files You cannot change a non directory file to a directory file with this command The directory attribute can only be turned on when a directory is created with the makdir utility Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities attr OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of attr a Suppresses the printing of attributes X Searches for the specified file in the execution directory The file must have execute permission to be found using X Z Reads the file names from standard input z lt file gt Reads the file names from lt file gt EXAMPLES attr myfile attr myfile npr npw attr myfile rweprpwpe attr z attr z
336. u file1 file2 file3 DIR1 The output of a dir u can be sent through a pipe to another utility or program that can use a pipe For example dir u attr z This displays the attributes of every entry in the current directory The e option can be used to display an extended directory listing without the header by adding the U option Using Professional OS 9 31 dir The OS 9 Utilities OPTIONS Displays the options function and command syntax of dir a Displays all file names in the directory This includes file names begin ning with a period d Appends a slash to all directory names listed This does not affect the actual name of the directory Displays an extended directory listing excluding file names beginning with a period N Displays directory names without displaying the file names they contain This option is especially useful with wildcards r Recursively displays the directories This does not include file names be ginning with a period r lt num gt Displays the directories recursively up to the lt num gt level below the cur rent directory This does not include file names beginning with a period S Displays an unsorted listing This does not include file names beginning with a period u Displays an unformatted listing This does not include file names begin ning with a period X Displays the current execution directory This does not include file names beginning with a period Z Reads
337. u use a relative pathlist and the desired destination requires going up the directory tree you can use special naming conventions to make moving around the pathlist easier A single period refers to the current directory Two periods refer to the current directory s parent directory Add a period for each higher directory level For example to specify a directory two levels above the current directory three periods are required Four periods refer to a directory three levels above the current directory L Relative Pathlist A relative pathlist begins at your cur rent directory regardless of its location in the overall file structure Example Your data directory is RE SEARCH A relative pathlist to cur rent is current HO WORK TE ae E oe NOTE Using these name substitutes does not change the actual directory s name The following example is a relative pathlist which begins in your current directory and goes through the subdirectories DOC and LETTERS to the file jim doc letters jim The next pathlist goes up to the next directory above your current directory and then through the subdirectory CHAP to the file page chap page The next pathlist specifies a file within your current directory No directories are searched other than the current directory accounts 4 10 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 File System Basic File System Oriented Commands Basic File S
338. ued Shutting down the system 8 22 8 23 Source device 7 1 Source disk 2 5 Startup file 2 1 8 17 Startup procedure 5 22 8 17 Super user Defined 4 4 System disk Directories 2 8 System security 4 4 System shut down 8 22 8 23 Systype d file 8 2 8 10 Tape utility 7 15 7 16 Target device 7 1 TERM environment variable Termcap file 8 31 8 37 Tmode utility 3 6 8 29 Tsmon utility 5 23 8 21 Un named pipes 5 17 Unsetenv utility 5 4 5 6 USER environment variable W utility 5 6 5 30 Wait utility 5 6 5 30 Wildcards 5 9 5 13 5 14 Xmode utility 8 29 5 4 5 3 Using Professional OS 9 1 5 Index Index Notes 1 6 Using Professional OS 9
339. umber of milliseconds of newline delay needed do string Down one line dT numeric Number of milliseconds of tab delay needed ed string End of delete mode ei string End insert mode NOTE If ic is used enter ec eo string Can erase overstrikes with a blank ff string P Hardcopy terminal page eject default L he boolean Hardcopy terminal hd string Half line down 1 2 linefeed ho string Home cursor if no cm hu string Half line up hz string Hazeltime cannot print tildas ic string P Insert character if string Name of file containing initialization string im boolean Insert mode enter NOTE If ic is specified use im in boolean Insert mode distinguishes nulls on display ip string P Insert pad after character inserted is string Terminal initialization string kO k9 string Sent by other function keys 0 9 kb string Sent by backspace key kd string Sent by down arrow key ke string Take terminal out of keypad transmit mode kh string Sent by home key kl string Sent by left arrow key kn numeric Number of other keys ko string Termcap entries for other non function keys kr string Sent by right arrow key ks string Put terminal in keypad transmit mode ku string Sent by up arrow key Using Professional OS 9 8 33 Termcap Capabilities OS 9 System Management Name Type Padding Description 10 19 string Labels on other function keys li numeric Number of lines on screen or page II string Last line first column if no
340. unk pw attr junk a pw attr junk pw a e Utilities with only the option do not allow you to list any other options on the command line Also built in shell commands such as chd and set do not have any options including the option e cio the utility trap handler must be in the execution directory or pre loaded into memory By using special I O techniques cio allows the utilities to be much smaller Most utility programs fail to execute if cio is missing cio is typically loaded into memory at startup Using Professional OS 9 3 attr The OS 9 Utilities Change Examine File Security Attributes SYNTAX FUNCTION attr lt opts gt lt path gt lt permissions gt attr is used to examine or change the security attributes lt permissions gt of the spec ified file s To use the attr utility type attr followed by the pathlist for the file s whose security permissions you want to change or examine Then enter a list of permissions to turn on or off You turn on a permission by giving its abbreviation preceded by a hyphen You turn it off by preceding its abbreviation with a hyphen followed by the letter n n Permis sions not explicitly named are unaffected If no permissions are specified on the command line the current file attributes are displayed You cannot examine or change the attributes of a file you do not own unless you are the super user A super user can examine or change the a
341. urrent directory or specify a pathlist through the file system for OS 9 to follow There are two types of pathlists e Full pathlists Full Pathlist A full pathlist begins at the root directory e Relative pathlists regardless of where your current data di A full pathlist starts at the root directory and rectory is located It lists each directory follows the directory names in the list down the file located between the root directory and a structure to a specific file or directory A full specific file or subdirectory pathlist must begin with a slash character Slashes separate names within the pathlist Example Your data directory is RESEARCH A full pathlist to current The following example is a full pathlist from the is hO work current root directory d1 through two subdirectories PASCAL and TESTS to the file futureval d1 Pascal tests futureval in The next example specifies a path from the root di WORK rectory hO through the USR subdirectory to the NICHOLLE subdirectory FUTURE oldstuff current h0 usr nicholle RESEARCH Using Professional OS 9 4 9 Accessing Files and Directories The Pathlist The OS 9 File System A relative path starts at the current directory and proceeds up or down through the file structure to the specified file or directory A relative pathlist does not begin with a slash Slashes separate names within a relative pathlist When yo
342. use double quotes to force the shell to send the string s copy as a single parameter to Cfp The quotes also prevent the shell from expanding the asterisk to include all pathlists in the current data directory In the above examples cfp creates a temporary procedure file to copy every file ending in c in both PROGMS and MISC JUNK to the current data directory The procedure file created by cfp is deleted when all the files have been copied Using the S option is convenient because you do not have to edit the procedure file to change the copy procedure For example if you are copying large C programs you may want to increase the memory allocation to speed up the process 12 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities cfp OPTIONS You can allocate the additional memory on the cfp command line cfp s copy b100 progms c Amisc junk c You can use the z and z lt file gt options to read the file names from either standard input or a file Use the Z option to read the file names from standard input For exam ple if you have a procedure file called count em that contains the command count l and you want to count the lines in each program to see how large the programs are before you copy them enter the following command line cfp z count em The command line prompt does not appear because cfp is waiting for input Enter the file names on separate command lines For example cfp z count em
343. user with the same group ID as the file is also considered an owner This allows people who work on the same project to be able to access the same files via their group number interrupt A control signal caused by an event signal or set of circumstances that cause a break in the normal flow of a system or routine such that the flow can be resumed from that point at a later time keyword A program procedure file or built in command that the shell recognizes in a command line link An OS 9 function used to request the location of a memory module of a given name prior to its use Causes the user count of the module to be increased by one unlink is the opposite function See also memory module and module directory memory module A named block of program code or data that is or can be loaded into memory Memory modules use a special standardized format See also data module module directory and program module MMU Abbreviation for Memory Management Unit MMU is special hardware used to provide logical to physical address translation and to protect system memory from accidental modification Some MMU hardware also provides virtual memory capabilities MMU is a super set of SPU See SPU module directory A list automatically maintained by OS 9 of the name location and user count of each memory module which is present in memory See also link and memory module multi tasking A feature of the operating system which allows multipl
344. value of character in hexadecimal dup h Set duplicate last input line character normally lt control gt A default 01 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal psc h Set pause character normally lt control gt W default 17 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal abort h Abort character normally lt control gt C default 03 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal quit h Quit character normally lt control gt E default 05 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal bse h Set output backspace character default 08 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal bell h Set bell alert output character default 07 Numeric value of character in hexadecimal type h ACIA initialization value Sets parity character size and number of stop bits Value in hexadecimal This value is affected by changing the individual par ity cs character length and stop stop bits values This value is not affected by the xmode normal command This value is not changed until the specified device is iniz ed par s Sets parity using one of the following strings odd even or none Setting parity affects the type value This value is not affected by xmode normal This value is not changed until the specified device is iniz ed Name Function cs n Sets character length using one of the following values n 8 7 6 or 5 bits 146 Using Professional OS 9 The OS 9 Utilities NOTES EXAMPLES stop n baud n xon h xoff h ta
345. ve information and also indicates whether the index is on the volume Both the v and i options terminate frestore after displaying the appropriate information These options are useful when trying to locate the last volume of the backup if any mix up has occurred The e option echoes each file pathlist as the index is read off the source device Example Command Lines To restore files directories from the source device mtO to the current directory by way of an interactive shell type frestore The following example restores files directories from the source device dO to the current directory using a 32K buffer to write the restored files As each file is read from the index the file s pathlist is echoed to the terminal frestore eb 32 d d0 Using Professional OS 9 7 11 Incremental Backup Strategies Making Backups Incremental Backup Strategies Many different strategies are available for those concerned with regularly scheduled backups Most strat egies are well documented in computer books and magazines The following two strategies are offered as examples of methods that can be used The Small Daily Backup Strategy This strategy requires making a level 0 backup once every four weeks Level 1 level 2 level 3 and level 4 backups are made on the weeks following the level 0 backup Between each major backup four daily backups would be made level 5 6 7 and 8 A recommended daily schedule is graphically presente
346. ven though getfd r does not have any explicit dependents its dependency on getfd a is still checked The source files are all found in the current directory Notice that this makefile can also be used to make listings By typing make print file on the command line make expands the macro to include all of the files updated since the last time print file was updated If you keep a dummy file called print file in your directory make will only print out the newly made files If no print file exists all files are printed End of Chapter 6 6 12 Using Professional OS 9 7 Making Backups Incremental Backups Whether it s caused by system failure or accidental erasure loss of stored data is a programmer s night mare Consequently backups of files programs and disks are a normal part of existence Backing up a hard disk is usually slow and tedious because the entire system is backed up You can use incremental backups instead of full system backups Incremental backups save only the files that have changed since the last backup You must still perform a full system backup but by using incremental backups you can perform them less often T OS 9 provides two utilities that may be used with either tape or disk media to facili tate the use of incremental backups e fsave e frestore Certain terms must be defined to discuss incremental backups A full system backup is referred to as a level 0 backup Consequent i
347. wer swaps you will have to make The system responds with the following prompt ready to BACKUP D0 to D0 2 6 Using Professional OS 9 Starting OS 9 The Backup Procedure Type y if you are ready to perform the backup Otherwise type q for quit If you type y the system begins a series of prompts to complete the backup procedure This consists of swapping the source and destina tion disks in the disk drive as prompted by the system The first prompt is ready destination hit a key At this prompt remove the source disk from the drive and insert the destination disk Once this is done press any key to continue the backup procedure The next system prompt is ready source hit a key At this prompt remove the destination disk from the drive and insert the source disk Once this is done press any key to continue the backup procedure The exchanging of disks continues until the backup procedure is completed When you have backed up the system disk store the original disk in a safe place and use the duplicate as your working system disk Using Professional OS 9 2 7 Directories Contained on the System Disk Starting OS 9 Directories Contained on the System Disk The following is a list of directories commonly distributed with Professional OS 9 They are all contained in the primary directory the root directory of your system BOOTOBUJS Contains the system modules for bootstrap files system specific fil
348. with the d option chd d0 BACKUP dir Directory of 14 14 32 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 90 11 12 1417 wr 20CO 11113 program c 12 4 90 10 05 1601 wr 313D 5744 prog 2 chd d0 WORKFILES dir Directory of 14 14 32 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 90 11 12 1417 wr DODO 11113 program c 12 4 90 11 12 1601 wr 3458 5780 prog 2 dsave deb32 d0 BACKUP chd d0 BACKUP dir Directory of 14 14 32 Owner Last Modified Attributes Sector Bytecount Name 12 4 90 11 12 1417 wr 5990 11113 program c 12 4 90 11 12 1601 wr A12B 5780 prog 2 Only prog 2 was copied to the BACKUP directory because the date was more recent in the WORKFILES directory For more information about dsave refer to the OS 9 Utilities section Del and Deldir Deleting Files and Directories Use the del and deldir utilities to eliminate unwanted files and directories If you no longer need a file deleting the file frees disk space You must have permission to write to the file or directory in order to delete it e del deletes a file e deldir deletes a directory To delete a file type del followed by the name of the file that you want deleted For example to delete the file test that you created with build you would type Using Professional OS 9 4 25 Del and Deldir Deleting Files and Directories The OS 9 File System del te
349. y line is assumed to be complete unless it is continued from the previous command with a backslash Comments should not be interspersed with commands For example lt target gt lt file gt lt file gt lt OS 9 command line gt lt OS 9 command line gt lt continued command line gt A comment entry consists of any line beginning with an asterisk All characters following a pound sign are also ignored as comments unless a digit immediately follows the pound sign In this case the pound sign is considered part of the command entry All blank lines are ignored For example lt target gt lt file gt lt file gt the following command will be executed if the dependent files are newer than the target file lt OS 9 command line gt this is also a comment Any entry may be continued on the following line by placing a space followed by a backslash at the end of the line to be continued All entries longer than 256 characters must be continued on another line All continuation lines must adhere to the rules for its type of entry For example if a command line is continued on a second line the second line must begin with a space or a tab FILE aaa r bbb r ccc r ddd r eee r fff r ggg r touch aaa r bbb r ccc r ddd r eee r fff r ggg r NOTE Spaces and tabs preceding non command continuation lines are ignored 6 2 Using Professional OS 9 Making Files Implicit Definitions To run the make
350. ystem Management 6A 6C 6E Colored Memory List This is an offset to the memory segment list The colored memory list contains an entry for each type of memory in the system The list is terminated by a long word of zero If this field contains a 0 colored memory is not used in this system For a complete discussion on colored memory see the OS 9 Technical Manual This field contains the size in longwords of the kernel s IRQ stack The value must be 0 or between 256 and ffff If the value is zero the kernel uses a small default IRQ stack A larger IRQ stack is recommended The default value is 256 longwords This is the retry counter if the kernel s initial chd to the system device fails The default value is zero Throughout this chapter the system directories referred to are the defaults found in the Init module unless otherwise specified Using Professional OS 9 OS 9 System Management Setting Up the System Defaults the Init Module The following is a portion of the distributed init a file _INITMOD equ 1 flag reading init module CPUTyp set 68000 cpu type 68008 68000 68010 Level set 1 OS 9 Level One Vers set 2 Version 2 4 Revis set 3 Edit set 1 Edition IP_ID set0 _ interprocessor identification code Site set 0 installation site code MDirSz set 128 initial module directory size unused PollSz set 32 IRQ polling table size fixed DevCnt set 32 device table size fixed
351. ystem Oriented Utilities This section explains some of the OS 9 utility commands that manipulate the file system The utilities include dir chd chx pd build makdir list copy dsave del deldir and attr The examples given refer to the file system diagram in Figure 4f Root Directory hO po DEFS CMDS SYSMODS C startup USR SYS IO MACROS LIB list copy etc CHRIS PAUL ELLEN TEXT letter PROG map gee ick c fall ice green E manual funct main Figure 4f Diagram of a Typical File System Dir Displaying the Contents of Directories The dir utility displays the contents of directories Typing dir by itself displays the contents of your current data directory For the following example the current data directory is hO in Figure 4f dir directory of 13 56 58 C CMDS DEFS IO LIB MACROS SYS SYSMODS USR startup To look at directories other than your current data directory you must either provide a pathlist to the desired directory or change your current data directory Changing directories is discussed later in this chapter J To display the contents of another directory without changing your current data directory type dir and the pathlist to the directory For example if you are in the root directory and you want to see what is in the DEFS directory type Using Professional OS 9 4 11 Dir Displaying the Contents of Directories The OS 9 File System dir

Using Professional OS-9 V2.4 - TRS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents